User Manual

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP

Catalog Numbers 280E, 281E, 284E
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required
to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a
hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or
death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and
recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert
people that dangerous voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert
people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

Allen-Bradley, ArmorConnect, ArmorStart, ControlLogix, DeviceLogix, On-Machine, PowerFlex, RSLinx, RSLogix 5000, RSNetWorx, and StepLogic are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions. It has been
designed and tested to meet the following directives.

Low Voltage and EMC Directives

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive and Council Directive
2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) by applying the following standard(s):

• Bulletin 280E/281E: EN 60947-4-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-
starters — Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.

• Bulletin 284E: EN 61800-5-1 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 5-1: Safety requirements
— Electrical, thermal and energy.

• Bulletin 284E: EN 61800-3 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods.

This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - June 2015 3

Notes:

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - June 2015

 Table of Contents

European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Low Voltage and EMC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 1
Product Overview Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mode of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Full-Voltage Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Sensorless Vector Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Description of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Embedded Switch Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Switched vs. Unswitched Control Power Input/Output (I/O)
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
EtherNet/IP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Embedded Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
EtherNet/IP LED Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Control Module LED Status and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fault Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Protection Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Standard Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Gland Plate Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Motor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DeviceLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Factory-Installed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Optional HOA Keypad Configuration
(Bulletin 280E, 281E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function
(Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . 25
EMI Filter (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Dynamic Brake Connector (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Output Contactor (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Shielded Motor Cable (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 5

Table of Contents

Chapter 2
Installation, Wiring, and Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Maintenance Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Precautions for Bulletin 284E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
280E, 281E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
280E, 281E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
284E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
284E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
280E, 281E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin . . . . . . . . 35
284E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Mount Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Power, Control, and Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Standard Conduit/Knockout Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Terminal Designations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Control Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
24V DC Control Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP Internal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Recommended Cord Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
AC Supply Considerations for Bulletin 284E Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disconnecting MOVs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets. . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Other System Design Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
General Notes (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Grounding Safety Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Grounding PE or Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Shield and Grounding of Motors and Motor Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Motor Cable Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Unshielded Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Shielded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Shield Terminating Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ArmorConnect Power Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ArmorConnect Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Control Power Overview Using 6/5 Pin Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Control Power using 4-Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter . . . . . . . . 57
ArmorConnect Cable Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Table of Contents

Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect

Three-Phase Power Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Ethernet and I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Optional Locking Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Chapter 3
Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Device Level Ring Technology Introduction to EtherNet/IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Linear Network Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Device Level Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Number of Nodes on a DLR Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Ethernet Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
EtherNet/IP General Wiring Guideline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Requested Packet Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Chapter 4
Product Commissioning IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Configuring EtherNet/IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Use the Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Save the Relation List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DHCP IP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using the Rockwell Automation Embedded Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Internal Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Network Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ethernet Statistics Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connection Manager Cmd Object Info Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Ring Statistics Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Chapter 5
Adding an ArmorStart to RSLogix Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5000 Connect and Configure ArmorStart with Add-On-Profile (AOP) . . . 98
Offline Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Connection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Parameters Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 7

Table of Contents

Online Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Parameters Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Module Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Internet Protocol Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Port Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Network Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Auto-Generated Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Chapter 6
Optional HOA Keypad Operation Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Keypad Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Keypad and HOA Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Chapter 7
Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Basic Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Programmable Parameters Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Parameter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Basic Status Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Produced Assembly Config Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Starter Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Starter Display Group (Bulletin 280E, 281E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Starter Setup Group (Bulletin 280E, 281E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Basic Status Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Produced Assembly Config Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Starter Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Drive I/O Configuration Group (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . 168
Drive Display Group (Bulletin 284E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Drive Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Drive Advanced Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault
without Restarting the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Linear List of Parameters for Bulletin 280E, 281E and
Bulletin 284E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Chapter 8
How to Configure an Explicit Message Programming ControlLogix Explicit Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Table of Contents

Setting Up the MSG Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Formatting an Explicit Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Performing Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 9
Diagnostics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Protection Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Clear Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fault Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fault Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Short Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Overload Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Phase Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Stall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Control Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
I/O Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Over Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Phase Imbalance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Over Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
A3 Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Internal Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
DC Bus Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EEPROM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Hardware Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Restart Retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Miscellaneous Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
EtherNet/IP LED Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Control Module LED Status and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Control Module Fault LED Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fault 11 Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Resetting Device to Factory Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Chapter 10
Troubleshooting Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bulletin 280E, 281E Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Bulletin 284E Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fault Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IP67 Dynamic Brake Diagnostic (DB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
DB1 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 - Dynamic Brake. . . 232
DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
DB1 Overcurrent Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 9

Table of Contents

DB1 Undercurrent Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

DB1 Switch Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
DB1 Open Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
DB1 VBus Link Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
DB1 Comm Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
DB1 Thermal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Reading the Control Supervisor Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Hardware Fault - Fan RPM Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
FAN Fault Handling with Firmware 66.21 of 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Starter Status, Warning Bit 5:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Warning Status, Parameter 62:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Annunciation using PLC Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Internal Drive Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Troubleshoot and General Solutions for Linear or DLR Networks . . 241
Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Troubleshoot Intermittent Ethernet Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Etherner Managed Switch Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Internet Group Multicast Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Virtual Local Area Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Control Module Removal and Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Removal of Control Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Installation of Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Resetting Source Brake Fuse Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Chapter 11
Specifications for EtherNet/IP Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Contactor Life Load Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Altitude Rating for 280/281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Altitude Rating for 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12
Accessories Industrial Ethernet Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
D Code Connectivity (M12) – 1585D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Sensor Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Sensor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Motor and Brake Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Table of Contents

Three-Phase Power Field-Installed Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Sealing Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Handle and Cord Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Dynamic Braking Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Minimum Resistance and
Recommended Modules for Option DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Bulletin 284E Option (-DB) – IP20 Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Recommended Dynamic Brake
Modules for Option DB1 (IP67 Resistor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Motor Controller in a Single Branch ArmorStart Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Multiple-Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group
Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Installation – General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Complete Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Explanatory Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and
291E Controllers (a). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers (b) . . . . 295
Combined Load Conductors (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Appendix B
CIP Information High Level Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Product Codes and Name Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
CIP Explicit Connection Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
EDS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
CIP Object Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Identity Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Assembly Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
I/O Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Connection Manager Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
CLASS CODE 0x0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Class 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Exclusive Owner Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Listen Only Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Class 3 CIP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Discrete Input Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Discrete Output Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
CLASS CODE 0x0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Parameter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 11

Table of Contents

CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Parameter Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Discrete Input Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
CLASS CODE 0x001D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Discrete Output Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Control Supervisor Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
CLASS CODE 0x0029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Overload Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CLASS CODE 0x002C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Device Level Ring (DLR) Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CLASS CODE 0x0047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Qos Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CLASS CODE 0x0048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
DPI Fault Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
DPI Alarm Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Interface Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
CLASS CODE 0x00B4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
TCP/IP Interface Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
CLASS CODE 0x00F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Ethernet Link Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
CLASS CODE 0x00F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix DeviceLogix Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
DeviceLogix Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Import and Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Appendix D
Renewal Parts Bulletin 280E, 281E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Bulletin 284E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Replacement Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Appendix E
System Design Considerations When General Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Using a Line Reactor Reasons to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Table of Contents

Appendix F
Application Examples Manual Brake Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
284 - VFD Preset Speed Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
DeviceLogix Ladder Editor Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits . . . . . . 360
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Reporting Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
How to Report the RPM of the 284 Internal Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
How to report the Heat Sink Temperature of the 284 . . . . . . . . . . 364
How to Report the Last Four Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
How to Report an IP Address Conflict Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Demand Torque Off Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Keypad Disable with DeviceLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Motion Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 13

Table of Contents

Notes:

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 1

Product Overview

Bulletin 280E/281E 284E

Type EtherNet/IP
Horsepower Range:
0.5…10 Hp (0.37…7.5 kW) ✓ —
0.5…5 Hp (0.4…3.0 kW) — ✓
Starting Method:
Full-Voltage and Reversing ✓ —
Sensorless Vector Control — ✓
Environmental Rating:
IP67/NEMA Type 4 ✓ ✓
Control Voltage:
24V DC ✓ ✓
Operational Voltage Ratings:
200…480V AC ✓ —
380…480V AC — ✓
Rated for Group Motor Installations ✓ ✓
Local logic using ✓ ✓
Logix
I/O Capability:
Four Inputs ✓ ✓
Two Outputs ✓ ✓
Network Communications:
EtherNet/IP ✓ ✓
LED Status Indication ✓ ✓
Gland Plate Entry:
Conduit Entrance ✓ ✓
ArmorConnect® Power Media ✓ ✓
Quick Disconnects (I/O, Communications, Motor ✓ ✓
Connection, Three-Phase, and Control Power)
Extended Length Motor and Brake Cables ✓ ✓
Factory Installed Options:
Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) Keypad ✓ ✓
Source Brake Contactor — ✓
Dynamic Brake Connector — ✓
Output Contactor — ✓
EMI Filter — ✓
Shielded Motor Cable — ✓

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 15

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Introduction This chapter provides a brief overview of the features and functionality of the
ArmorStart® EtherNet/Industrial Protocol (IP) Distributed Motor Controllers,
Bulletin 280E, 281E, and 284E.

Description The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Distributed Motor Controllers are integrated, pre-
engineered, motor starting solutions. Bulletins 280E and 281E are used for full-
voltage and reversing applications, respectively. Bulletin 284E is used in variable
frequency applications where more precise motor control is needed. The
ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller offers a robust IP67/UL Type 4/12
enclosure design, that is suitable for water wash down environments.

ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller includes an embedded dual port switch that

supports Device Level Ring (DLR) applications. It supports IEEE 1588 end-to-
end transparent clock. This allows synchronization within a distributed network
of devices. Transparent clocks in combination with enhanced or managed
ethernet switches are able to adjust for network introduced timing delays and
improve the performance of motion applications.

The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP network address can be configured dynamically or

statically via the embedded Web Server. In addition, the controller’s IP address
can be manually set via three IP address switches found on the I/O section of the
device.

The controller’s embedded web server allows the user to check status, diagnostics,
and perform simple device configuration using a standard web browser. It also
supports SMTP protocol that allows the user to configure the device to send an
alert e-mail of potential issues.

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller is a modular “plug and play”

(PnP) design that offers simplicity in wiring and installation. The quick
disconnects for the I/O, communications, and motor connections reduce the
wiring time and minimize wiring errors. The controller offers, as standard, four
configurable (sink/source) DC inputs and two sourcing solid state outputs, to be
used with sensors and actuators respectively, for monitoring and controlling the
application process. The ArmorStart controller’s light-emitting diode (LED)
status indication and built-in diagnostics capabilities allow ease of maintenance
and troubleshooting. The optional Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad
configuration allows local start/stop control.

An Add-On-Profile (AOP) for ControlLogix is available. AOPs streamline the

programming and installation by eliminating the task of individually configuring
the device tags.

The copy and paste function allows easy configuration of multiple ArmorStart
controllers. RSLogix 5000 revision 17.01 or later is required to implement AOP
support.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Overview Chapter 1

The ArmorStart controller and associated motor cable have been evaluated as a
system by UL and is suitable for group installation. ArmorStart controllers
contain a UL Listed disconnect that in many applications, eliminates the need for
additional components.

Catalog Number Explanation Examples that are given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic
explanation should not be used for product selection because not all
combinations produce a valid catalog number.

Figure 1 - Catalog Number Explanation for 280E, 281E

280 E – F 12Z – 10 C – CR – Option 1
a b c d e f g h

a e h
Bulletin Number Short Circuit Protection Option 1
Code Description (Motor Circuit Protection) Code Description
Full Voltage Starter Code Description Hand/Off/Auto Selector Keypad
280 3
281 Reversing Starter 10 10 A Rated Device Hand/Off/Auto Selector Keypad with
3FR
25 25 A Rated Device Forward/Reverse
b
f
Code Description Overload Selection Current Range
E EtherNet/IP Code Description
A 0.24…1.2 A

c B 0.5…2.5 A
C 1.1…5.5 A
Enclosure Type
D 3.2…16 A
Code Description
F IP67/ UL Type 4/12
g
d Control and 3-Phase Power Connections/Motor Cable Connection
(CR: Conduit/Round Media) or (RR: Round/Round Media) or (DR: D/Round Media)
Contactor Size/Control Voltage
Description
24V DC Code Control Power 3-Phase Power Motor Cable
12Z
3 m, unshielded cordset
23Z CR blank Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance male 90°
CR W Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance No cable
3 m, unshielded cordset
DR blank Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain
male 90°

DR W Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain No cable

Round Media (Male Round Media (Male 3 m, unshielded cordset

RR blank Receptacle) male 90°
Receptacle)
Round Media (Male Round Media (Male
RR W No cable
Receptacle) Receptacle)

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 17

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Figure 2 - Catalog Number Explanation for 284E

284 E – F V D2P3 D – 10 – CR – Option 1 – Option 2 – Option 3
a b c d e f g h i j k

a d f i
Bulletin Number Torque Performance Mode Control Voltage Option 1
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description
284 VFD Starter Sensorless Vector Control Z 24V DC Hand/Off/Auto Selector
V 3
and Volts per Hertz Keypad with Jog Function

b
g j
Communications e
Short Circuit Protection (Motor
Code Description Output Current Circuit Protector) Option 2
E EtherNet/IP 380…480V Code Description Code Description
Code Description 10 10 A Rated Device DB blank DB Brake Connector
D1P4 1.4 A, 0.4 kW, 0.5 Hp 25 25 A Rated Device Connectivity to IP67
c DB1 blank
DB Resistor
D2P3 2.3 A, 0.75 kW, 1.0 Hp
Enclosure Type Source Brake
D4P0 4.0 A, 1.5 kW, 2.0 Hp SB blank
Code Description Contactor
D6P0 6.0 A, 2.2 kW, 3.0 Hp
F Type 4 (IP67) SB W No cable
D7P6 7.6 A, 3.3 kW, 5.0 Hp

k
h
Option 3
Control and 3-Phase Power Connections / Motor Cable Connection
Code Description
(CR: Conduit/Round Media) or (RR: Round/Round Media)
EMI EMI Filter
Description
Code OC Output Contactor
Control Power 3-Phase Power Motor Cable
3 m, unshielded
CR blank Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance
cordset male 90°
3 m, shielded
CR N Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance
cordset male 90°
CR W Conduit Entrance Conduit Entrance No cable
3 m, unshielded
DR blank Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain
cordset male 90°
3 m, shielded
DR N Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain
cordset male 90°
DR W Conduit Daisy Chain Conduit Daisy Chain No cable
Round Media Round Media 3 m, unshielded
RR blank
(Male Receptacle) (Male Receptacle) cordset male 90°
Round Media Round Media 3 m, shielded
RR N
(Male Receptacle) (Male Receptacle) cordset male 90°
Round Media Round Media
RR W No cable
(Male Receptacle) (Male Receptacle)

Operation The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three-phase squirrel-
cage induction motors as follows:

Bulletin 280E, 281E: up to 10 Hp (7.4 kW) at 480V AC

Bulletin 284E: up to 5 Hp (3.0 kW) at 480V AC

ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controllers accept 24V DC control voltage. The control

voltage provides power to inputs (unswitched) and outputs (switched).
Unswitched control voltage is used to ensure no loss of sensor or other field input
status under normal operation.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Mode of Operation Bulletin 280E, 281E

Full-Voltage Start
This method is used in applications requiring across-the-line starting, where full
inrush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The ArmorStart Bulletin
280E offers full-voltage starting and the Bulletin 281E offers full-voltage starting
for reversing applications.

Figure 3 - Full-Voltage Start

100%

Percent
Voltage

Time (seconds)

Bulletin 284E

Sensorless Vector Control

Sensorless vector control provides exceptional speed regulation and very high
levels of torque across the entire speed range of the drive. Features include:

• Autotune feature allows the motor controller to adapt to individual motor

characteristics.

• Able to develop high torque over a wide speed range and adapts to
individual motor characteristics.

Figure 4 - Sensorless Vector Control

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 19

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Description of Features Overload Protection

The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates, as standard,

electronic motor overload protection. This overload protection is accomplished
electronically with an I2t algorithm. The ArmorStart controller’s overload
protection is programmable via the communication network, providing the user
with flexibility.

The Bulletin 280E, 281E overload trip class can be selected for class 10, 15, 20
protection. The Bulletin 284E overload trip class is Class 10 only. Ambient
insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload (see Chapter 11
for the specification for overload trip curves).

Embedded Switch ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller includes embedded switch technology as

standard. Each ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller consumes one Common
Technology Industrial Protocol (CIP) connection. The ArmorStart controller consumes a
Class 3 connection when RSLogix 5000 software displays the AOP.

In general, for a Device Level Ring (DLR) or linear network keep individual
segments to 50 nodes or less. In addition, it is important to reserve a minimum of
10% of available bandwidth to allow for processing of explicit messages.

Common features are:

• Designed according to the ODVA specification for EtherNet/IP.

ODVA specification found at http://www.odva.org/

• Embedded switch technology is designed to enable end devices to form

linear and ring network topologies

• Supports DLR protocol

• Supports IEEE 1588 transparent clock for CIP Motion and CIP Sync
applications

• Supports the management of network traffic to ensure timely delivery of

critical data, that is, QoS and IGMP protocols are supported

Note: DLR ports cannot be used as two Network Interface Cards (NICs)
connected to two different subnets.

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Switched vs. Unswitched The voltage at terminals A1/A2 supplies power to the ArmorStart outputs.
Removing this power or placing the ArmorStart disconnect in the “OFF”
Control Power Input/Output position disables the outputs.
(I/O) Connections
The unswitched power A3/A2 supplies power to the input and communication
module. This power is not affected by the state of the disconnect switch. This
ensures that anytime the controller can communicate, the state of the inputs is
correct.

Figure 5 - Input and Output Configuration

EtherNet/IP Ports ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller includes a dual port Ethernet switch that
supports 10/100 Mbps It utilizes a sealed D-coded micro (M12) style ethernet
connector. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled as the
factory default. Before using your adapter in an EtherNet/IP network, you may
need to configure an IP address or set the address statically.

ATTENTION: To avoid unintended operation, the adapter must be assigned a fixed IP

address. If a DHCP server is used, it must be configured to assign a fixed IP address for
your adapter.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of
process control.

Embedded Web Server The embedded web server allows the user to view information and configure the
ArmorStart controller via a web browser. The default login is “Administrator”.
There is no password set by default.

IMPORTANT The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel. If the
Login and password are lost, you will need to reset the device to factory defaults
via the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Note: The configuration will be lost.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 21

Chapter 1 Product Overview

E-mail Notification Configuration

The embedded web server supports configuration of the Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP). Once properly configured, the motor controller e-mails the
user with specific fault/trip messages.

EtherNet/IP LED Status

Indication EtherNet/IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs.
Figure 6 - EtherNet/IP LED
• Link Activity/Status LEDS

– Ethernet Link1 Activity/Status (Port 1) – LED Color: Bicolor

(Green/Yellow)

– Ethernet Link2 Activity/Status (Port 2) – LED Color: Bicolor

(Green/Yellow)

• “MOD” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the ethernet module status

• “NET” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the ethernet network status

Control Module LED Status

and Reset The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs
Figure 7 - LED Status and a Reset button.
Indication and Reset
• POWER LED
The LED is illuminated solid green when switched (+A1/A2) control
power is present and with the proper polarity.

• RUN LED
This LED is illuminated solid green when a start command and control
power are present.

• NETWORK LED
This bicolor (red/green) LED indicates the status of the internal
communication link.

• FAULT LED
This indicates a Controller Fault (trip) condition.

The “Reset Button” is a local trip reset.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) EtherNet/IP devices have Electronic Data Sheets (EDS). These are specially
formatted text files, as defined by the CIP specifications, that represent the object
model of the device. EDS files contain details about the readable and
configurable parameters of the EtherNet/IP device. They also provide
information about the I/O connections the device supports and the content of
the associated data structures. EDS files are used by EtherNet/IP device
configuration tools, such as RSNetWorx™ for EtherNet/IP, and data servers such
as RSLinx® Classic.

EDS files for all ArmorStart EtherNet/IP devices can also be uploaded directly
from the device via the web server interface. Rockwell Automation product EDS
files are also available on the internet at: http://www.ab.com/networks/eds.

Fault Diagnostics Fault diagnostics capabilities that are built in the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting
and quick restarting.

Protection Faults
Protection Faults are generated when potentially dangerous or damaging
conditions are detected. Protection Faults are also known as “Trips.”

Table 1 - Protection Faults

Bulletin 280E, 281E Trip Status Bulletin 284E Trip Status PowerFlex® 40 Fault Codes
Short Circuit Short Circuit —
Overload Overload (Drive Codes 7 and 64)
Phase Loss Phase Short (Drive Codes 38…43)
Reserved Ground Fault (Drive Code 13)
Reserved Stall (Drive Code 6)
Control Pwr Loss Control Pwr Loss —
Input Fault Input Fault —
Over Temperature Over Temperature —
Phase Imbalance Over Current (Drive Codes 12 and 63)
A3, Unswitched Power Loss A3, Unswitched Power Loss —
Reserved Internal Comm (Drive Code 81)
Reserved DC Bus Fault (Drive Codes 3, 4 and 5)
EEprom EEprom (Drive Code 100)
Hdw Flt Hdw Flt (Drive Codes 70 and 122)
Reserved Restart Retries (Drive Code 33)
Reserved Misc. Fault ➊ (Drive Codes 2, 8, 29, 48 and 80)

➊ Included is DB1 monitoring or resistor issue.

Parameter Group “Start Protection,” Parameter 24 “PrFault Enable” is used to

enable and disable the above protection faults. See Parameter 61 “LastPR Fault”
for additional details of the last protection fault.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 23

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Standard Features Inputs

The EtherNet/IP version includes four 24V DC inputs that are single keyed (two
inputs per connector) and sourced from A3/A2 control power. The inputs use
two M12 connectors. Each input has an LED status indication. They are
configurable as sinking or sourcing.

Outputs

The EtherNet/IP version includes two self-protected solid state outputs that are
single keyed (one per connector), sourced from A1/A2 control power. Outputs
are sourcing type with a maximum current per output point of 0.5 A DC. The
outputs use one M12 connector per output, each having LED status indication.
For high duty cycle applications, consider using an interposing relay to reduce the
wear on the internal output.

Gland Plate Entrance

The ArmorStart controller offers three different methods of connecting
incoming three-phase and control power to the device. One method that is
offered is the traditional conduit entrance with a 0.75 in. and a 1 in. conduit hole
opening. The second method that is offered is daisy chain (feed through) power
reducing the need for additional components such as junction boxes. The third
method offers connectivity to the ArmorConnect power media. Factory-installed
receptacles are provided for connectivity to both three-phase and control power
media.

Motor Cable

With every ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller, a 3-meter unshielded

4-conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard. If the optional
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter is selected for Bulletin 284E units, a
shielded 4-conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard.

DeviceLogix

DeviceLogix™ is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. DeviceLogix is programmed locally
using the AOP and implements Boolean math operations, such as, AND, OR,
NOT, Timers, Counters, and Latches. DeviceLogix can run as a stand-alone
application, independent of the network. However, 24V DC via A3 unswitched
control power, must be maintained.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Factory-Installed Options Optional HOA Keypad Configuration (Bulletin 280E, 281E only)

The ArmorStart controller offers two optional factory-installed Hand/Off/Auto

(HOA) configurations: Standard and Forward/Reverse HOA.

Figure 8 - Optional HOA Configuration (Bulletin 280E left, 281E right)

Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function (Bulletin 284E only)

The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function allows for local start/stop control
with capabilities to jog in forward/reverse motor directions.

Figure 9 - Optional HOA with Jog Function Configuration

Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 284E only)

An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake On/

Off. The motor brake contactor is powered from the main power circuit. The
configuration of the R1 relay controls the function of the brake. A customer
accessible 3 A fuse is provided to protect the brake cable. Included is a 3-meter,
3-pin cordset for connection to the motor brake as standard.

EMI Filter (Bulletin 284E only)

The EMI filter is required to be CE compliant. When selected, a 3-meter,

shielded 4-conductor motor cordset is provided as standard. The filter must only
be used in installations with solidly grounded AC supply distribution and must
be bonded to the power distribution ground.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 25

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Dynamic Brake Connector (Bulletin 284E only)

The user selectable DB Option includes a 3-meter, 3-pin cordset for connection
to an IP20 Dynamic Brake Module. See Chapter 11 for available dynamic brake
modules.

Note: The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor cannot be used with the -DB
factory-installed option.

IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor (Bulletin 284E only)

The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor design offers simplicity in wiring and
installation. The user-selectable DB1 option provides the quick connector and an
internal resistor monitoring circuit board. The cable lengths available are 0.5 m
and 1.0 m. The IP67 Dynamic Brake is separately ordered. See Chapter 11 for
available IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistors.

Note: The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor is used only with the -DB1
factory-installed option. Only the specified IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor can be
used based on the VFD horsepower. Connecting resistors other than those
specified, result in a DB1 fault.

Output Contactor (Bulletin 284E only)

An internal contactor is sourced from the 24V DC (A1/A2) control voltage to
isolate the load side of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller. When control power is applied to A1/A2, the output contactor
closes. When control power is removed, the output contactor opens. There is no
other switching element that allows alternate control of the output contactor. A
sequenced stop involving the output contactor cannot be performed.

Shielded Motor Cable (Bulletin 284E only)

If the EMI Filter is selected, a 3-meter, shielded 4-conductor cordset is provided

as standard.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Overview Chapter 1

ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Figure 10 - Bulletin 280E, 281E ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP

Communication Protocol
Features
Local Disconnect LED Status
Indication and Reset

IP Address Notation Area Control Module

2 Outputs (Micro/M12)

Hand-Off-Auto Keypad
4 Inputs (Micro/M12)

IP Address Switches

Ethernet Ports (DLR) Motor Connection

Figure 11 - Bulletin 284E ArmorStart with EtherNet/IP Communication Protocol

Local Disconnect
LED Status
Indication and Reset
IP Address Notation Area
Control Module

2 Outputs (Micro/M12)
Hand-Off-Auto Keypad
4 Inputs (Micro/M12)
Source Brake Connection
IP Address Switches
Motor Connection
Ethernet Ports (DLR)

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 27

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Notes:

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 2

Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Receiving It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before
accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received
against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is the responsibility of the
user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the
freight bill. If any concealed damage is found during unpacking, it is again the
responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must
be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual
inspection of the equipment.

Unpacking Remove all packing material, wedges, or braces from within and around the
Armorstart distributed motor controller. Remove all packing material from the
device(s). Check the contents of the package. Contact your local Allen-Bradley®
representative if any items are missing.

IMPORTANT Before the installation and start-up of the drive, a general inspection of mechanical
integrity (i.e. loose parts, wires, connections, packing materials, etc.) must be made.

Inspecting After unpacking, check the item(s) nameplate catalog number(s) against the
purchase order. See Chapter 1 for an explanation of the catalog numbering system
that aids in nameplate interpretation.

Storing The controller should remain in its shipping container before installation. If the
equipment is not to be used for a period of time, it must be stored according to
the following instructions to maintain warranty coverage.

• Store in a clean, dry location.

• Store within an ambient temperature range of –25…+85 °C

(–13…+185 °F).

• Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, noncondensing.

• Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive

atmosphere.

• Do not store equipment in a construction area.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 29

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

General Precautions In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual, the following
statements, that are general to the system, must be read and understood.

SHOCK HAZARD: Risk of electrical shock. Do not disconnect

or connect power cables under load.

ATTENTION: Total circuit impedance must be low enough to ensure any short
circuit or ground fault current is large enough to operate the fuse or circuit
breaker. Failure to comply can result in death, personal injury, and/or
equipment damage.

ATTENTION: The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive

parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing,
testing, servicing, or repairing the assembly. Component damage may result
if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static
control procedures, see Publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding against Electrostatic
Discharge, or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks.

ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage

components or reduce product life. Wiring or application errors, such as
undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive
ambient temperatures, may result in malfunction of the system.

ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated

machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and
subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in
personal injury and/or equipment damage.

ATTENTION: To prevent electrical shock, open the disconnect switch before

connecting and disconnecting cables. Risk of shock – environment rating
may not be maintained with open receptacles.

Precautions for Bulletin 284E WARNING: The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to
Applications discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on a drive, verify
isolation of mains supply from line inputs (R, S, T [L1, L2, L3]). Wait three
minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may
result in personal injury or death.
Darkened display LEDs are not an indication that capacitors have discharged
to safe voltage levels. Risk of shock – environment rating may not be
maintained with open receptacles.

ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC

drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation,
startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to
be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.

280E, 281E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin

Figure 12 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E, 281E (CR Option)
351
[13.82 ]
290 189
[11.42 ] [7]

268
[10.55]
287,5
[11.32 ]

3,02
6,8 [ .12 ]
150
[.27 ] [6 ]
MOTOR CONNECTION 185 [7.3] M22 CORDSET
MOTOR CONN ECTION 243 [9.57] M35 CORDSET

373
[14.69 ] 11
[ .43 ]

195
[7.68 ]

67,9
[3]

1 in. CONDUIT OPENING

39 47
[2] [1.85 ] 0.75 in. CONDUIT OPENING

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 31

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

280E, 281E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance

Figure 13 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E, 281E (DR Option)
351
[13.82]

290 30,5
189
[11.42] [1.20]
[7]

268
[10.55]

287,5
[11.32]

3,02
[.12]
6,8
[.27] 150
[6]

MOTOR CONNECTION 185 [7.3] M22 CORDSET

MOTOR CONNECTION 243 [9.57] M35 CORDSET

NOTE: Cord grips are supplied separately 373

[14.69]
15,48
[.6]

195
[7.68]

80,32
[3.2] 67,95
[2.7]

THOMAS AND BETTS

34,5 2922NM CORD GRIP
[1.4] 5262 SEALING RING
141 LOCKNUT
61 1/2" KNOCKOUT ( 22mm)
[2.4] OR EQUIVALENT
95,5 4 PLACES (supplied separately)
[3.8]

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

284E Conduit Gland Entrance Bulletin

Figure 14 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E (CR Option)

2HP or less 420.38 [16.55]

3HP or greater 444.38 [17.50]
290
[11.42] 236
[9]

268
[10.55]
287,5
[11.32 ]

3,02
6,8 [.12 ]
[.27 ]
MOTO R CONNECTION 266.9 [10.51]

373
[14.69] 11
[.43 ]

195
[7.68 ]

67,9
[3 ]

1 in. CONDUIT OPENING

39 47
[2 ] [1.85 ] 0.75 in. CONDUIT OPENING

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 33

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

284E Daisy Chain (DR) Conduit Entrance

Figure 15 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E (DR Option)
420.38 (16.55) (1 Hp or less @ 230V AC, 2 Hp or less @ 480...575V AC)
444.38 [17.50] (3 Hp or greater @ 480...575V AC)

290 30,5
[11.42] [1.20] 236
[9]

268
[10.55]

287,5
[11.32]

6,8
[.27]
3,02
[.12]

MOTOR CONNECTION 266.9 [10.51]

NOTE: Cord grips are supplied separately

373
[14.69]
15,48
[.6]

195
[7.68

80,32
[3.2]
67,95
[2.7]

34,5 THOMAS AND BETTS

[1.4] 2922NM CORD GRIP
5262 SEALING RING
61 141 LOCKNUT
[2.4] 1/2" KNOCKOUT ( 22 mm)
95,5
[3.8] OR EQUIVALENT
4 PLACES (supplied separately)

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

280E, 281E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin

Figure 16 - Dimensions for Bulletin 280E, 281E (RR Option)

3 Hp and less @ 480V AC 10 Hp @ 480V AC

351
351 [13.82]
[13.82]
290 290
[11.42] [11.42]

268 287,5
268 287,5 [10.55 ]
[10.55] [11.32 ] [11.32]

203.2 203.2 6,8

[8] 6,8 [8] [.27 ]
CABLE [.27 ] CABLE
KEEP OUT KEEP OUT
10 A Short Circuit 25 A Short Circuit
Protection (M22) Protection (M35)

77,6 77,6
[3] [3 ]

60,6 60,6
[2 ] [2 ]
25,5 68 25,5 68
[1 ] [2.68 ] [1 ] [2.68 ]

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 35

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

284E ArmorConnect Gland Connectivity Bulletin

Figure 17 - Dimensions for Bulletin 284E (RR Option)

2 Hp or less at 480V 3 Hp or greater at 480V

419,53 444,38
[16.52] [17.50]
290 290 30,4
[11.42] [11.42] [1 ]

287,5 268 287,5

268 [10.55] [11.32 ]
[10.55] [11.32]

6,8 6,8
[.27 ] [.27 ]
10 A Short Circuit 25 A Short Circuit
Protection (M22) Protection (M35)

77,6
[3 ]
77,6
[3]
60,6
[2 ]
60,6
[2] 25,5 68
25,5 68 [1 ] [2.68 ]
[1] [2.68 ]

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

Mount Orientation The recommended mounting orientation of ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller

is the vertical configuration. This is especially important for the Bulletin 284.
This allows proper air flow over the heat sink. Improper mounting or debris build
up reduces air flow and increased internal temperatures. This may reduce the
overall life of the product. For alternate mounting contact your local sales
representative.

IMPORTANT For proper heat dissipation and product operation, mount in the vertical orientation
as shown.

Operation The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three-phase

squirrel-cage induction motors as follows:

Bulletin 280E, 281E: 0.24…16 A; 200V AC, 230V AC, 460V AC; 50/60 Hz.
Bulletin 284E: up to 5 Hp (3.0 kW) @ 480V AC

The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Distributed Motor Controller accepts a control

power input of 24V DC.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 37

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Wiring Power, Control, and Ground Wiring

Table 2 provides the power, control, and ground wire capacity and the tightening
torque requirements. The power, control, ground, and terminals accepts a
maximum of two wires per terminal.

Table 2 - Power, Control, Ground Wire Size, and Torque Specifications

Terminals Wire Size Torque Wire Strip Length

Primary Terminal:
Primary/Secondary 10.8 lb•in
Power Terminal: (1.2 N•m)
and 1.5…4.0 mm2 0.35 in. (9 mm)
Ground (#16 …#10 American Wire Secondary Terminal:
Gage (AWG)) 4.5 lb•in
(0.5 N•m)
1.0 mm2…4.0 mm2 6.2 lb•in
Control Inputs 0.35 in. (9 mm)
(#18…#10 AWG) (0.7 N•m)

Standard Conduit/Knockout Size

The following table shows conduit or cord grip size and the diameter of the
punched hole. For example, 0.5 in. conduit requires a hole punch of 0.885 in. for
proper installation.

Table 3 - Conduit and Knockout Sizes

Conduit/Cord Size Conduit/Cord Size Actual Hole Actual Hole

[mm] [in.] Diameter [mm] Diameter [in.]
16.00 0.50 22.48 0.885
21.00 0.75 28.32 1.115
27.00 1.00 34.59 1.362
35.00 1.25 43.21 1.701
41.00 1.50 49.48 1.948
53.00 2.00 61.34 2.415
63.00 2.50 73.91 2.910

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

Terminal Designations As shown in Figure 18, the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains
terminals for power, control, and ground wiring. Access can be gained by
removing the terminal access cover plate.

Figure 18 - ArmorStart Power and Control Terminal Connections

(applies to Bulletin 280E, 281E, and Bulletin 284E)

See Detail A Detail A

Table 4 - Power, Control, and Ground Terminal Designations

Terminal Designations No. of Poles Description

A1 (+) 2 Control Power Input

A2 (–) 2 Control Power Common
A3 (+) 2 Unswitched 24V Control
PE 2 Ground
1/L1 2 Line Power Phase A
3/L3 2 Line Power Phase B
5/L5 2 Line Power Phase C

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 39

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Control Power Wiring ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller uses 24V DC control power for
communications and I/O. The control power terminal connections are labeled
A1, A2, and A3. Switched power supplies the outputs. Unswitched power
supplies logic power and sensor inputs.

24V DC Control Power

• 24V DC (–15%, +10%)

• A1 = Switched +V

• A2 = Common for both switched and unswitched (–V)

• A3 = Unswitched +V

Input and Output Characteristics

• 5-pin female connectors (M12)

• 4 fixed inputs (two per connector) – software selectable sink or source

• 2 sourcing outputs DC (solid-state) – (one per connector)

Input and Output Power Connection

• Sensor Power is sourced from +24V supplied from A3(+) and A2(–).

• Output power is sourced from +24V supplied from A1(+) and A2(–).

• Max. current per output point is 0.5 A and is not to exceed 1.0 A total

IMPORTANT Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms, that can exceed 20 A. The
power supply must be capable of supporting this amount of instant power demand
when multiple ArmorStart controllers are turned ON simultaneously. For supplies
without this capacity, it is recommended to apply unswitched power (A3-A2) first and
after a 2…4 second delay, apply switched power. If control power falls below 19V DC,
there is a higher risk of communications issues or device faults.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

ArmorStart Controller with

EtherNet/IP Internal Wiring Figure 19 - ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Bulletin 280E Controller with HOA Diagram
Contactor
140M
L1
L2 Motor
L3

AS Logic F
Control
Power
Sense AS Logic
Control

140M
Off/Tripped On 7A
Class CC 24V Note: This power supply is not
A1 present in the Status Only versions.
A2 26V
Current supplied by
control power due to the
2A SC Protected 2.5A power supply voltage
Class CC being greater than A3
Port 2 Port 1
Output A voltage 140M Trip
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
140M Status
1 Ampere Input 10mA @ 24V DC
FA
Total Input 10mA @ 24V DC
2A SC Protected Reversed bias 11 -
+24V DC Status Not Used
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Output B Ethernet under normal 25V DC

Logic operation
24V DC

A3 11 -
+5V DC
25V DC

PTC 300mA Max

Short Current supplied from A3 when 5V DC

A1 control power is lost AS Logic Circuits

Detect
Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends
on sensor attached to input

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 41

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Figure 20 - ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Bulletin 281E Controller with HOA Diagram

ArmorStart Ethernet REV with HOA Diagram Reverser

140M
L1
L2 Motor
L3

AS Logic F R
Control RB
FB
Power
Sense AS Logic
Control AS Logic
Control

140M
Off/Tripped 7A
On
Class CC 24V Note: This power supply is not
A1 present in the Status Only versions.
A2 26V
Current supplied by
control power due to the
2A SC Protected 2.5A power supply voltage
Class CC being greater than A3
Output A Port 1 Port 2 voltage 140M Trip
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
140M Status
1 Ampere Input 10mA @ 24V DC
FA
Total Input 10mA @ 24V DC
2A SC Protected Reversed bias 11 -
+24V DC Status Not Used
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Output B Ethernet under normal 25V DC

Logic operation
24V DC

A3 11 -
+5V DC
25Vdc

PTC 300mA Max

Short Current supplied from A3 when 5Vdc

A1 control power is lost AS Logic Circuits

Detect
Input 1
Input 0

Input 3
Input 2

4 Inputs
50mA Max/input depends
on sensor attached to input

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

Figure 21 - ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Bulletin 284E Drive Diagram

Output Contactor
Option

Sensorless Vector Control

140M
L1 L1 T1

Option
Filter
L2 L2 T2 Motor
L3 L3 T3
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
3A RJ-45
AS Logic Class CC
BR+ BR-
Control 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Power Source Brake

Sense Option R1 R2 R3

Fan Dynamic Brake

Connector
140M Option
Off/Tripped On 7A
Class CC 24V DC
A1 Note: This switch is controlled
A2 26V
Current supplied by by the Control Power Logic
2A SC Protected
control power due to the sense. If control power is
2.5A power supply voltage present, switch is closed.
O
Class CC being greater than A3 Prevents drive from running
Output R1
when there is no power for the
Contactor PF40 voltage 140M Trip

Output A R2 fan Input 10mA @ 24V DC

B 140M Status
Input 10mA @ 24V DC
1 Ampere 2A SC Protected Source Brake Brake CNTR Status
Option Input 10mA @ 24V DC
Total +24V DC Status
Reversed bias 11 -
Output CNTR Status 1

Input 10mA @ 24V DC

25V DC
under normal 1 - Output CNTR Status not
operation available when SM option specified
Output B
24V DC

11 - +5V DC
A3 25V DC
PTC Port 1 Port 2
300mA Max
AS Logic
Current supplied by 5V DC
Circuits
A3 when A1 control
power is lost
Input 0

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Ethernet
Logic

Short
4 Inputs Detect
50mA Max/input depends
on sensor attached to input

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 43

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Recommended Cord Grips

Figure 22 - Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating

0.75 in. Lock Nut 1 in. Lock Nut

Thomas & Betts Cord Grip Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2931NM Cat. No. 2940NM
0.75 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector 1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in. Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in.
Used with Control Power Media Used with Three-Phase Power
Cordset - Example: Media Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2 Cat. No. 280-PWR22G-M1

Figure 23 - Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating

0.75 in. Lock Nut 1 in. Lock Nut

Thomas & Betts Cord Grip Thomas & Betts Cord Grip
Cat. No. 2931NM Cat. No. 2942NM
0.75 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector 1 in. Stain Relief Cord Connector
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in. Cable Range: 0.70…0.95 in.
Used with Control Power Media Used with Three-Phase Power
Cordset - Example: Media Cordset - Example:
Cat. No. 889N-M65GF-M2 Cat. No. 280-PWR35G-M1

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

AC Supply Considerations for Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems

Bulletin 284E Units
ATTENTION: The Bulletin 284E contains protective Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOVs) that are referenced to a ground. These devices should be disconnected if
the Bulletin 284E is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution
system.

ATTENTION: Do not remove this jumper, that is shown in Figure 25, if the unit
is equipped with an EMI filter installed.

Disconnecting MOVs

IMPORTANT Do not apply the EMI filter option to grounded or ungrounded Delta power source.
The EMI option requires a solidly grounded Wye (Y) power source (i.e. 480/277 or
400/230V AC 3-Phase). If applied to a grounded or ungrounded 480V AC Delta
power source, the EMI filter will not function properly and will be damaged.

To prevent drive damage, the MOVs connected to ground must be disconnected

if the drive is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system
where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the
nominal line-to-line voltage. To disconnect the MOVs, remove the jumper shown
in Figure 25, Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal.

1. Before installing the Bulletin 284E, loosen the four mounting screws.
2. Unplug the control module from the base unit by pulling it forward.

Figure 24 - Bulletin 284E Removal of Control Module

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 45

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Figure 25 - Bulletin 284E Jumper Removal

Remove Jumper

Group Motor Installations for The ArmorStart Distributed Motor controllers are listed for use with each other
in group installations per National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 79,
USA and Canada Markets Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery. When applied according to the
group motor installation requirements, two or more motors, of any rating or
controller type, are permitted on a single branch circuit. Group motor
installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada.

Note: For additional information regarding group motor installations with the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller, see Appendix A.

Wiring and Workmanship In addition to conduit and seal-tite raceway, it is acceptable to use cable that is
dual rated Tray Cable Exposed Runs (TC-ER) and Cord, STOOW, for power
Guidelines and control wiring on ArmorStart installations. In the USA and Canada
installations, the following guidance is outlined by the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and NFPA 79.

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and

supervision verify that only qualified persons service the installation, and where
the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical
damage, using mechanical protection, such as struts, angles, or channels, Type TC
tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC
(Metal Clad) cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC-ER
(Exposed Run)➊ shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization
equipment or device as open wiring. The cable shall be secured at intervals not
exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) and installed in a “good workman-like” manner.
Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an
equipment grounding conductor within the cable.
➊ Historically, cable meeting these crush and impact requirements was designated and marked “Open Wiring”. Cable so marked is
equivalent to the present Type TC-ER and can be used.

While the ArmorStart controller is intended for installation in factory floor

environments of industrial establishments, the following must be considered
when locating the ArmorStart controller in the application:

• Cables, including those for control voltage including 24V DC and

communications, are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic
on a continuous basis.

• Location of the ArmorStart controller to minimize exposure to continual

traffic is recommended. If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable,
other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be
considered.

• Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent

exposure and/or damage.

• Additionally, if conduit or other raceways are not used, it is recommended

that strain relief fittings be used when installing the cables for the control
and power wiring through the conduit openings.

The working space around the ArmorStart controller may be minimized as the
ArmorStart does not require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance
while energized. In lieu of this service, the ArmorStart controller is meant to be
unplugged and replaced after proper lockout/tag-out procedures have been
employed.

The Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) is a factory-installed option that the user may select.
The HOA keypad may require the ArmorStart controller to be selected and
installed as follows if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated
interface by the equipment operator:

1. They are not less than 0.6 m (2 ft) above the servicing level and are within
easy reach of the normal working position of the operator.
2. The operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when operating them.
3. The possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 47

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

If the operated interface is used in industrial establishments where the conditions

of maintenance and supervision verify that only qualified persons operate and
service the ArmorStart controller's operator interface, and the installation is
located so that inadvertent operation is minimized, then other installation
locations with acceptable access can be provided.

Other System Design Considerations

The user should keep 3-phase power cabling at least 150 mm (6 in.) away from
the EtherNet/IP network to avoid noise issues. EtherNet/IP is an unpowered
network therefore, if device status is important when the power distribution
disconnect is in the OFF position, the A3 terminal must have an unswitched
power source.

Electromagnetic The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance.
Compatibility (EMC)
General Notes (Bulletin 284E only)
• The motor Cable should be kept as short as possible to avoid
electromagnetic emission and also capacitive currents.

• Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee

an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements.
Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.

• Using an EMI filter, with any drive rating, may result in relatively high
ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in
installations that are solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power
distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and
should exclude any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent
disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground
connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically
checked.

• When using a shielded motor cable the drain wire should be bonded to
chassis ground at the motor. The recommended motor connection should
use a shielded concentric connector. This provides 360° shielding. A single
point connection can be used but is less effective.

Wiring
Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups: power,
control, and signal. The following recommendations for physical separation
between these groups, are provided to reduce the coupling effect:

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

• Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should
be 16 cm (6 in.).

• Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding/

armor with equivalent attenuation.

• Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits.

• Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups

should be 8 cm (3 in.).

Grounding An effectively grounded product is one that is “intentionally connected to earth

through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and
having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages that
may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons” (as defined by
the US National Electric Code NFPA70, Article 100B). Grounding is done for
two basic reasons: safety (defined above) and noise containment or reduction.
While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit may
sometimes share the same path and components, they should be considered
different circuits with different requirements.

Grounding Safety Grounds

The object of safety grounding is to verify that all metalwork is at the same
ground (or Earth) potential at power frequencies. Impedance between the drive
and the building scheme ground must conform to the requirements of national
and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. These vary based on
country, type of distribution system and other factors. Periodically check the
integrity of all ground connections.

General safety dictates that all metal parts are connected to earth with separate
copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge. Most equipment has specific
provisions to connect a safety ground or PE (protective earth) directly to it.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 49

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Grounding PE or Ground

The safety ground - PE, must be connected to earth ground. This point must be
connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod, bus bar, or
building ground grid. Grounding points must comply with national and local
industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. Some codes may require
redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity.

IMPORTANT To avoid electrolytic corrosion on the external earth terminal, avoid spraying
moisture directly on the terminal. When used in washdown environments
apply a sealant or other corrosion inhibitor on the external ground terminal to
minimize any negative effects of galvanic or electro-chemical corrosion.
Ground connections should be inspected regularly.

Shield and Grounding of The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the PE connection
with a separate ground conductor. It is recommended that each motor frame be
Motors and Motor Cables grounded to building steel at the motor.

Motor Cable Considerations

Most recommendations regarding motor cable address issues are caused by the
nature of the drive output. A PWM drive creates AC motor current by sending
DC voltage pulses to the motor in a specific pattern. These pulses affect the wire
insulation and can be a source of electrical noise. The rise time, amplitude, and
frequency of these pulses must be considered when choosing a wire/cable type.
The choice of cable must consider:

1. The effects of the drive output once the cable is installed

2. The need for the cable to contain noise that is caused by the drive output
3. The amount of cable charging current available from the drive
4. Possible voltage drop (and subsequent loss of torque) for long wire runs

Keep the motor cable lengths less than 13.7 m (45 ft) unless otherwise noted in
the device specifications.

Unshielded Cable

Properly designed multi-conductor cable can provide good performance in wet

applications, significantly reduce voltage stress on wire insulation, and reduce
cross coupling between drives.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

The use of cables without shielding is generally acceptable for installations where
electrical noise created by the drive does not interfere with the operation of other
devices such as: communications cards, photoelectric switches, weigh scales, and
others. Be certain the installation does not require shielded cable to meet specific
EMC standards for CE, C-Tick, or FCC. Cable specifications depend on the
installation type.

Figure 26 - Unshielded Multi-Conductor Cable

Shielded Cable

Shielded cable contains all general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the
added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise that
is generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should
be given for installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive
proximity switches, and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in
the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar
location, imposed EMC regulations, or a high degree of communications/
networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.

An acceptable shielded cable has four XLPE insulated conductors with a 100%
coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire)
surrounded by a PVC jacket.

Figure 27 - Shielded Cable with Four Conductors

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 51

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Shield Terminating Connectors

The cable connector that is selected must provide good, 360° contact and low
transfer impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry
plate at both the motor and the ArmorStart controller for electrical bonding.
SKINTOP® MS-SC/MS-SCL cable grounding connectors and NPT/PG
adapters from LAPPUSA are good examples of this type of shield terminating
gland.

Figure 28 - Terminating the Shield with a Connector

ATTENTION: Shielded connector or motor cable is mandatory for CE

compliant installations

ArmorConnect Power Media Description

Details of ArmorConnect Power Media are described in Publication 280PWR-

SG001, ArmorConnect Power and Control Media.

The ArmorConnect power media offers both three-phase and control power
cable cord set systems including patchcords, receptacles, tees, reducers and
accessories to be used with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. These
cable system components allow quick connection of ArmorStart Distributed
Motor Controllers, reducing installation time. They provide for repeatable,
consistent connection of the three-phase and control power to the ArmorStart
Distributed Motor Controller and motor by providing a plug-and-play
environment that also avoids system mis-wiring.

IMPORTANT ArmorConnect connections should be made hand tight. See the ArmorConnnect
instructions for recommended tightening torque. The use of a tool to help in the
tightening of the connector is not recommended.

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controllers (Bulletins 280E, 281E, and 284E), use only motor and power cables
that are listed for use with ArmorStart.

ArmorConnect power cables are UL 2237 Listed.

IMPORTANT The ArmorStart UL listing does not permit using a third party or un-listed motor and
power cable assembly. Using a cable assembly that is not permitted results in a loss of
Listing and does not comply with NFPA 79 or the NFPA 70 (NEC) (see 110.3(B) of the
NEC).
For reference, the UL White Book states the following for power media cable
assemblies meeting UL 2237 standard:
“These devices are intended for use only with the Listee’s same line of products that are
covered under this category....”

SHOCK HAZARD: Risk of electrical shock. Do not disconnect

or connect power cables under load.

ATTENTION: ArmorConnect cables are not intended to be connected or disconnected

under load. This may result physical injury or equipment damage as a result of high
make and break currents and potential fault currents.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 53

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

See publication 280PWR-SG001 for ordering details. The following shows

example configurations for power, control, and communication media.

Figure 29 - Cable System Overview

➊ CAT5e Bulkhead Connector and Receptacle – Example Cat.No. 1585A-DD4JD

➋ CAT5e Patchcord, IP67, M12 D-Code, Male Straight, Male Right Angle – Example Cat.No.
1585D-M4TBDE-*
➌ CAT5e, Patch Cable, IP20, RJ45 Male to RJ45 Male – Example Cat.No. 1585J-M4TB-*
➍ Three-Phase Power Receptacles -
Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads – Example
Cat. No. 280-M35F-M1
➎Three-Phase Power Trunk- Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end –
Example Cat. No. 280-PWR35A-M*
➏Three-Phase Drop Cable- Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end –
Example Cat. No. 280-PWR22A-M* (16AWG) or Cat. No. 280-PWR24A-M* (14AWG)
➐Three-Phase Power Tee connects to a single M35 drop line to trunk connectors –
Cat. No. 280-T35 or Tee connects to a M22 drop – Cat. No. 280-RT35
➑ Control Power Receptacles - Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads –
Cat. No. 888N-D65AF1-*
➒ Control Power Media Patchcords – Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on
each end – Example Cat. No. 889N-F65GFNM-*
➓ Control Power Tees - The E-stop In Tee (Cat. No. 898N-653ST-NKF) is used to connect to the
Bulletin 800F On-Machine™ Stop station using a control power media patchcord. The E-stop Out
tee (Cat. No. 898N-653ES-NKF) is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart
Distributed Motor Controller.
Reducer connects from M35 male connector to M22 female connector – Cat. No. 280-RA35

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

ArmorConnect Connections Control Power Overview Using 6/5 Pin Control

Figure 30 - ArmorConnect Receptacles
10 A Short Circuit Protection Rating 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating

Control Power Receptacle Control Power Receptacle

Three-Phase Power Receptacle Three-Phase Power Receptacle

Factory-installed ArmorConnect gland plate connections

Figure 31 - ArmorConnect Connections

Table 5 - ArmorConnect Gland Plate Conductor Color Code

Terminal Designations Description Color Code

A1 (+) Control Power Input Blue
A2 (–) Control Power Common Black
A3 (+) Unswitched Control Power Red
PE Ground Green/Yellow
1/L1 Line Power – Phase A Black
2/L2 Line Power – Phase B White
3/L3 Line Power – Phase C Red

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 55

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Figure 32 - On-Machine Stop Stations

Table 1 Product Selection

Illumination Contact
Enclosure Type Quick Connect Knockout Type Operator Voltage Configuration Cat. No.
Plastic 24V AC/DC 800F-1YMQ4
Mini Receptacle Metric Twist to Release 1 N.C./1 N.O.
Metal 24V AC/DC 800F-1MYMQ4

Figure 33 - Stop Circuit for EtherNet/IP Version

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

Control Power using 4-Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter

As an alternative to the unique 6/5 pin control cable the auxiliary power cabling
can be used. Auxiliary Power is based on a 4–pin connector system and is used to
provide 24V DC power to I/O modules and other devices separately from
network power. Running separate power to these devices is typically used for I/O
devices with output connections to prevent power supply interruption due to
switching of outputs.

Figure 34 - Control Power Overview using 4-Pin Auxiliary Power Tee Adapter

➒ Bulkhead pass-thru connectors are passive male to female 4-pin mini connectors within a
threaded metal housing that is used for Auxiliary Power - Cat. No. 889A-CXN4-M4

➓Auxiliary power trunk cables are four-pin mini-style patchcords. - Cat. No. 889N-F4HKNM-*
(Straight Female to Straight Male)

ArmorStart auxiliary adapter power tees allow connecting devices to the power trunk line using
an associated power drop cordset - Cat. No. 898N-543ES-NKF

12 Auxiliary power drop cable - Cat. No. 889D-R4HJDM-* (18AWG wire Right Female to
Straight Male)

13 Control Power Media Patchcords - Example Cat. No. 889N-F65GFNM-*

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 57

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Figure 35 - Interconnect Diagram

ArmorConnect Cable Ratings The ArmorConnect power media cables are rated per UL Type TC 600V 90°C
Dry 75°C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or MTW 600V 90°C or STOOW 105°C
600V - Canadian Standards Association (CSA) STOOW 600V FT2. For
additional information regarding ArmorConnect power media see publication
280PWR-SG001.

Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect

Three-Phase Power Media
When using ArmorConnect three-phase power media, fuses or circuit breakers
can be used for the motor branch circuit protective device, for the group motor
installations.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

For 32 A rated ArmorConnect cable for trunk and taps:

Circuit Breaker: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480V AC maximum when protected by a
Bulletin 140U-H or Bulletin 140G-H circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V,
100 A and a maximum interrupting of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes Short
Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). Examples include 140G-H6F3-D10 or 140U-
H6C3-D10.

Fusing: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000
RMS symmetrical amperes (SCCR) at 600V AC maximum when protected by
CC, J, and T class fuses.

For 10 A and 15 A rated ArmorConnect cable taps:

Circuit Breaker: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480Y/277V AC maximum when protected
by Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-C30 circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 30 A,
having an interrupting rating not more than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes.

WARNING: The total circuit impedance including each cable assembly's own
impedance, must be low enough to ensure any short-circuit or ground fault current that
can flow through any assembly, is large enough to operate the magnetic trip of the Cat.
No. 140U-D63-C* circuit breaker. See your local electrical code for acceptable practices
for this evaluation.

Fusing: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 65 000
RMS symmetrical amperes (SCCR) at 600V AC maximum when protected by
CC, J, and T class fuses, rated 40 A non-time delay or 20 A time delay.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 59

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Ethernet and I/O Connections ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller uses a sealed D-coded M12 (micro) style
ethernet connector.

Figure 36 - EtherNet/IP Connector

M12 Female Ethernet Connector

(view into connector)

Pin 1 - (White/Orange) TxData+
Pin 2 - (White/Green) RecV Data+
Pin 3 - (Orange) TxData-
Pin 4 - (Green) RecV Data-

Figure 37 - I/O Receptacle Input Pinout (M12)

Pin 1 - +24V (A3 pwr)

Pin 2 - Input 1
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Input 2
Pin 5 - NC (no connection)

Figure 38 - I/O Receptacle Output Pinout (M12)

Pin 1 - NC (no connection)

Pin 2 - NC (no connection)
Pin 3 - Common
Pin 4 - Output +24V DC (A1 pwr)
Pin 5 - NC (no connection)

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

Power Connections
Figure 39 - External Connections for Motor Connector – Bulletin 284E - 5 Hp and
Bulletin 280E, 281E - 3 Hp or less (M22) at 480V AC

Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - T2 (white)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)

Figure 40 - External Connections for Motor Connector – Bulletin 280E, 281E - 10 Hp (M35)
at 480V AC

Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - T2 (white)

Figure 41 - External Connections for Brake Contactor Connector (M25)

Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - L2 (white)

Figure 42 - External Connections for Dynamic Brake Connection (M22)

Pin 1 - Ground (green/yellow)

Pin 2 - BR+ (black)
Pin 3 - BR– (white)

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 61

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Figure 43 - Incoming Control Power (M22) – 24V DC Only

Pin 1 - +24V DC unswitched (A3/red)

Pin 2 - Common (A2/black)
Pin 3 - PE (green)
Pin 4 - Not used (blank)
Pin 5 - +24V DC switched (A1/blue)
Pin 6 - Not used (white)

Figure 44 - Incoming Three-Phase Power for 10 A Short Circuit Protection (M22)

Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - L2 (white)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)

Figure 45 - Incoming Three-Phase Power for 25 A Short Circuit Protection (M35)

Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - L2 (white)

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Chapter 2

Optional Locking Clip The clam shell design clips over the ArmorStart motor connector and motor
cable to limit customer access from disconnecting the motor cable on the
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller. The locking clip is an optional device
that can be used, if desired. A locking clip is not available for the M25 Source
Brake connection.

Figure 46 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Installation of Locking Clip

Figure 47 - Bulletin 284E Installation of Locking Clip

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 63

Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance

Maintenance The ArmorStart controller does not require much regular maintenance. There
are a few checks that are needed to verify continued proper operation. When
using ArmorConnect media or conductors, verify that the connections remain
tight where exposed to shock and vibration. Check that the heatsink allows good
air flow. Bulletin 284 includes an internal circulating fan to support heat
conduction in high ambient applications. This fan operates when control power
is applied and cannot be controlled by any other means. Monitor the fan speed to
receive early warning of fan failure. If the fan rpm falls below 1740, a Hardware
Fault F14 is generated. Also in parameter 61, Last Pr Fault indicates a FAN RPM
fault has occurred.

IMPORTANT The FAN RPM fault can be reset with firmware 66.022 or later. The fault reset
function is modified to allow normal operation for 24 hours before the fault
reoccurs. The replacement fan is PN 284-FAN. Refer to Hardware Fault -
Fan RPM Warning on page 235 for information regarding the monitoring of the
Fan RPM

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 3

Introduction to EtherNet/IP and

Device Level Ring Technology

Terminology See the table for the meaning of common terms.

This Term Means

Consumer A destination device in the CIP networking model. See CIP.
CSMA/CD Carrier sense multiple access/collision detection is the access method used in
Ethernet. When a device wants to gain access to the network, it checks to see if
the network is quiet (senses the carrier). If it is not, it waits a random amount of
time before retrying. If the network is quiet and two devices access the line at
exactly the same time, their signals collide. When the collision is detected, they
both back off and each waits a random amount of time before retrying.
Determinism The ability to predict when information will be delivered. Important in time-
critical applications.
DHCP The dynamic host configuration protocol is an Internet protocol, similar to BootP,
for automating the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP. DHCP can be
used to automatically assign IP addresses, to deliver IP stack configuration
parameters, such as the subnet mask and default router, and to provide other
configuration information, such as the addresses for printer, time, and news
servers.
DNS The domain name system is a hierarchical, distributed method of organizing the
name space of the Internet. The DNS administratively groups hosts into a
hierarchy of authority that allows addressing and other information to be
widely distributed and maintained. A significant advantage to the DNS is that
using it eliminates dependence on a centrally maintained file that maps host
names to addresses.
Ethernet A physical layer standard using carrier sense multiple access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD) methods.
EtherNet/IP Ethernet industrial protocol applies a common industrial protocol (CIP) over
Ethernet by encapsulating messages in TCP/UDP/IP.
Ethernet network A local area network that is designed for the high-speed exchange of
information between computers and related devices.
Explicit messaging Non-time critical messaging that is used for device configuration and data
collection, such as downloading programs or peer-to-peer messaging between
two PLC units.
Full duplex A mode of communication that allows a device to send and receive information
simultaneously, effectively doubling the bandwidth.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 65

Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology

This Term Means

Fully qualified A fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is a domain name that includes all higher
domain name level domains relevant to the entity named. If you think of the DNS as a tree-
structure with each node having its own label, a fully qualified domain name for
a specific node would be its label followed by the labels of all other nodes
between it and the root of the tree. For example, for a host, a FQDN would
include the string that identifies the particular host, plus all domains of which
the host is a part, up to and including the top-level domain (the root domain is
always null). For example, PARIS.NISC.SRI.COM is a fully qualified domain name
for the host at 192.33.33.109.
Gateway A module or set of modules that allows communications between nodes on
dissimilar networks.
Hardware address Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address (sometimes called a MAC
address) that is 48 bits. The address appears as six digits separated by colons
(such as, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx). Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 (0x00 to
0xFF). This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed. The
hardware address is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP
utility.
Host name The host name is the unique name for a computer within its domain. It's always
the first element of a full name, and, with its domain and top-level domain
suffix, creates the unique name of that computer on the Internet. For example,
let's say a trading website is www.trading.com. The host name is www, which is
not unique on the web, but is unique within the trading domain.

The host name can also see the fully qualified domain name (FQDN), or in this
example, www.trading.com. Both naming methods seem to be used
interchangeably in various documents. For the purposes of this document, the
host name sees the FQDN, or as in this example, www.trading.com.
Hub A central connecting device that joins devices together in a star configuration.
Hubs are generally not suitable for use in I/O control systems, since they are
time-critical applications that cannot tolerate lost packets.
Implicit messaging Real-time messaging of I/O data.
IP Internet protocol that provides the routing mechanism for messages. All
messages contain not only the address of the destination station, but the
address of a destination network, that allows messages to be sent to multiple
networks within an organization or around the world.
IP address A 32-bit identification number for each node on an Internet Protocol network.
These addresses are represented as four sets of 8-bit numbers (numbers from 0
to 255), with decimals between them. Each node on the network must have a
unique IP address.
Latency The time between initiating a request for data and the beginning of the actual
data transfer.
Multicast In the CIP producer/consumer model, one producer multicasts (broadcasts) the
data once to all consumers.
Producer The source of information in the CIP networking model. See CIP.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3

This Term Means

Subnet mask An extension of the IP address that allows a site to use a single net ID for
multiple networks.
Switch A network device that cross connects devices or network segments. A switch
provides each sender/receiver the full network bandwidth (2x in full duplex
mode), reduces collisions, and increases determinism.
TCP The transport control protocol is a more reliable but slower transport protocol
than UDP. It is used for explicit (not time critical) messaging in EtherNet/IP.

Introduction to EtherNet/IP Automation architectures must provide users with three primary services:

• Control services involve the exchange of time-critical data between

controlling devices and I/O devices.

• Networks must provide users configuration capabilities to set up and

maintain their automation systems.

• Automation architecture must allow for collection of data.

EtherNet/IP, provides installation flexibility and leverages commercially available

industrial infrastructure products. It is also compatible with other
communication standards, such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Simple
Networks Management Protocol (SNMP), and Dynamic Host Configuration
(DHCP).

EtherNet/IP is a CIP adaptation of TCP/IP that fully uses the IEEE standard.
The relationship between the TCP/IP and CIP to form EtherNet/IP is shown in
the ISO/OSI 7-layer model is shown in Figure 49. The OSI model is an ISO
standard for network communications that define all functions from a physical
layer to the protocol.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 67

Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology

This diagram shows how Rockwell Automation EtherNet/IP communication

modules fit into a control system.

Figure 48 - EtherNet/IP Communication Modules in a Control System

Distributed I/O

1769-L23Ex
1768-L4x
1768-ENBT 1756-EN2T
1756 I/O Modules

1769-L3xE

1794-AENT
1794 I/O Modules

1734-AENT
PowerFlex 1734 I/O Modules
Drive

Workstation

1783-ETAP 1783-ETAP
ArmorStart Workstation
Ethernet/IP 1783-ETAP
PanelView Terminal

Device Level Ring

Device-level Ring Topology

1734-AENTR 1738-AENTR
1756-EN2TR 1734 I/O Modules 1738 I/O Modules
1756 I/O Modules

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3

Figure 49 - OSI Model for ISO Standard for Network Communications

This approach provides real time technology into the Ethernet domain. With the
network extensions of CIP Safety, CIP Sync, and CIP Motion, CIP networks
allow for safety communication, time synchronization, and simple to high
performance motion all over the same EtherNet/IP network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 69

Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology

Linear Network Introduction A linear network is a collection of devices that are daisy-chained together.

Figure 50 - Linear Network Collection of Devices

In this topology a communication issue in the media or device prevents nodes

downstream from communicating.

Figure 51 - Communication Issue in the Media or Device Line

The EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology allows this topology to be

implemented at the device level. No additional switches are required.

These are the primary advantages of a linear network:

• The network simplifies installation and reduces wiring and installation
costs.
• The network requires no special software configuration.
• Embedded switch products offer improved CIP Sync application
performance on linear networks.

The primary disadvantage of a linear network is that any break of the cable
disconnects all devices downstream from the break from the rest of the network.

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to
a linear or DLR network in a single subnet.
You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two
different subnets.

Device Level Ring Introduction

A Device Level Ring (DLR) protocol defines a set of behaviors, see Figure 52. A
ring supervisor keeps packets of information from circulating infinitely around
the ring by blocking one of the ports. A beacon frame constantly is detected on
both ring supervisor ports. If a beacon frame is not detected the supervisor
detects the physical layer issue and reconfigures the network to a linear topology
without the loss of any node communication or data. Once repaired the ring
supervisor reconfigures back to ring mode.

Figure 52 - DLR Protocol

.

As shown in Figure 53, when a physical layer failure is detected the adjacent

nodes to the fault generate a link status message that the ring supervisor
acknowledges. The ring supervisor unblocks the port to allow communication.
The neighboring nodes to the fault identify the fault and reconfigure themselves
to support a linear topology. Now, both the ring supervisor and nodes are
configured to support a linear topology.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 71

Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology

Figure 53 - Physical Layer Failure is Detected

When the physical layer fault is corrected the supervisor will “hear” the beacon
frame again on both ports. Once this is detected the ring supervisor re-establishes
and configures the ring topology. All neighboring nodes detect this and
reconfigure themselves back to ring. A DLR network is a single-fault tolerant
network that is intended for the interconnection of automation devices.

At least one ring supervisor must be configured before a ring is formed.

IMPORTANT Any nodes that do not support DLR should not be directly connected to the ring.

The node should be connected to the ring through a switch that supports DLR.

The advantages of the DLR network include:

• Simple installation
• Resilience to a single point of failure on the network
• Fast recovery time when a single fault occurs on the network

The primary disadvantage of the DLR topology is the additional effort that is
required to set up and use the network as compared to a linear or star network.

IMPORTANT Products with EtherNet/IP embedded switch technology have two ports to connect to
a linear or DLR network in a single subnet.
You cannot use these ports as two Network Interface Cards (NICs) connected to two
different subnets.

IMPORTANT ArmorStart EtherNet/IP cannot be configured as a ring supervisor.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3

Number of Nodes on a Rockwell Automation recommends that you use no more than 50 nodes on a
single DLR or linear network. If your application requires more than 50 nodes, it
DLR Network is recommended that the DLR networks are segmented.

With smaller networks:

• There is better management of traffic on the network.

• The networks are easier to maintain.
• There is a lower likelihood of multiple faults.

Additionally, on a DLR network with more than 50 nodes, network recovery

times from faults are higher. For DLR networks with 50 or less nodes, ring
recovery time can be as low as 3 ms. If more than 50 nodes are required without
segmentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor. A detail review is
recommended to ensure bandwidth and response time are within application
requirements.

Ethernet Switches Ethernet managed switches are key components that provide determinism and
the required throughput to achieve automation needs. Switches are able to
manage network traffic that reduces unnecessary delays or band width needs. A
properly designed EtherNet/IP infrastructure that implement segregation via
managed switch technology achieves a more reliable and secure network.

Ethernet Media Today, unshield twisted pair (UTP) wiring is the standard in most applications
and allows for greatest flexibility and ease of installation and maintenance.
Category 5e (e-enhanced) cable is specifically designed to meet today’s
automation needs.

Standard RJ-45 connectors are not designed for industrial environments. For
outside the panel, IP67 connectors are required for EtherNet/IP.

Figure 54 - Network Media - Ethernet M12 D-Code Media

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 73

Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology

EtherNet/IP General Ethernet is found in automation equipment, panels, and components. There are a
few guidelines, that if followed, will reduce the number of issues an EtherNet/IP
Wiring Guideline application may experience.

• Many EtherNet/IP applications share the same space with power

conductors. If the Ethernet media must cross power conductors, do so at
right angles. This reduces the coupling effect and reduce the potential for
communication noise.

• Where possible, route the Ethernet/IP media five feet or more from high
voltage sources (for example, lights, ballasts, motors, …) or sources of radio
frequency, such as variable frequency drives.

• Ensure that the application or equipment follows industry acceptable

grounding practices.

• Maintain media lengths between nodes to less than 100 m (328 ft). In
today’s environment, it may be challenging to maintain these guidelines,
however these reduce potential application issues.

Requested Packet Interval The Requested Packet Interval (RPI) is the update rate that is specified for a
particular piece of data on the network. This value specifies how often to produce
the data for that device. For example, if you specify an RPI of 50 ms, it means that
every 50 ms the device should send data to the controller or the controller should
send data to the device.

Only data-producing modules require an RPI. For example, a local EtherNet/IP

communication module requires no RPI because it produces no data for the
system. Instead it functions only as a bridge.

To set an RPI, follow these steps.

1. Verify the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP module AOP is installed, started, and

connected to the controller.
2. In the Controller Organizer tree, right-click the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP
module and choose Properties.

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology Chapter 3

The Module Properties dialog box appears.

3. Click the Connection tab.

4. From the Requested Packet Interval (RPI) menu, enter the rate at which
you want data to be updated over a connection.

Only set the RPI to the rate the application requires.

IMPORTANT The RPI determines the number of packets per second that the module produces on a
connection. Each module can produce only a limited number of packets per second.
Exceeding this limit prevents the module from opening more connections.

5. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 75

Chapter 3 Introduction to EtherNet/IP and Device Level Ring Technology

Notes:

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 4

Product Commissioning

IP Address The IP address identifies each node on the IP network (or system of connected
networks). Each TCP/IP node on a network must have a unique IP address.

The IP address is 32 bits long and has a net ID part and Host ID part. Networks
are classified A, B, C, (or other). The class of the network determines how an IP
address is formatted.

Figure 55 - IP Address on the IP Network

0 78 31
Class A 0 Net ID Host ID
0 15 16 31
Class B 10 Net ID Host ID

0 23 24 31
Class C 110 Net ID Host ID

You can distinguish the class of the IP address from the first integer in its
dotted-decimal IP address as follows:

Range of first integer Class Range of first integer Class

0…127 A 192…223 C
128…191 B 224…255 other

There are reserved values that you cannot use as the first octet in the address.
These numbers are examples of values you cannot use:
• 001.xxx.xxx.xxx
• 127.xxx.xxx.xxx
• 223 to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx

The specific reserved values that cannot be used vary according to the conditions
of each application. The previous values are only examples of reserved values.

Each node on the same physical network must have an IP address of the same
class and must have the same net ID. Each node on the same network must have a
different Host ID thus giving it a unique IP address.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 77

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

Gateway Address

A gateway connects individual physical networks into a system of networks.

When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network, a gateway
transfers the data between the two networks. This field is set to 0.0.0.0 by default.

Subnet Mask

Subnet addressing is an extension of the IP address scheme that allows a site to use
a single network ID for multiple physical networks. Routing outside of the site
continues by dividing the IP address into a net ID and a host ID via the class.
Inside a site, the subnet mask is used to redivide the IP address into a custom
network ID portion and host ID portion. This field is set to 0.0.0.0 by default.

If you change the subnet mask of an already-configured module, you must cycle
power to the module for the change to take effect.

Configuring EtherNet/ Before using the ArmorStart, you may need to configure an IP address, subnet
mask, and optional Gateway address. The rotary network address switches found
IP Address on the I/O section of the ArmorStart are set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the
factory default. The ArmorStart reads these switches first to determine if the
switches are set to a valid IP address between 1…254. When switches are set to a
valid number the IP address will be 192.168.1._ _ _ [switch setting].

The IP address can also be set using DHCP.

• If DHCP is preferred, use Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility,

version 2.3 or later, that ships with RSLogix 5000 or RSLinx software.

• Or use a third party DHCP server.

This document assumes that the user has set the IP address to 192.168.1.1. The
user can change this IP address to any address either statically or dynamically.

ATTENTION: To avoid unintended operation, the adapter must be assigned a

fixed IP address. If a DHCP server is used, it must be configured to assign a fixed
IP address for your adapter.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or
loss of process control.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Manually Configure the Network Address Switches

Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches. Set the network address by
adjusting the three switches on the front of the I/O module.

Figure 56 - Switches on the I/O Module

Writable surface for IP address

Protective IP67 Caps

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 79

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

Figure 57 - Network Address Example

X100 X10 X1
This example shows the 0 0 0

IP address set to 163 8 2 8 2 8 2

for IP Address 192.168.1.163

6 4 6 4 6 4

Valid IP address switch settings range from 001 to 254. When the switches are set
to a valid number, the adapter’s IP address will be 192.168.1.xxx (where xxx
represents the number set on the switches; see Figure 57). The adapter’s subnet
mask is 255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0. A power cycle is
required for any new IP address to take effect.

Note: The upper three octets are fixed. DHCP or the embedded webserver must
be used to configure the IP address to a value other than 192.168.1.xxx.

If the switches are set to an invalid number (such as 000 or a value greater than
254), the adapter will check to see if DHCP is enabled. If DHCP is enabled, the
adapter requests an address from a DHCP server. If DHCP is not enabled, the
adapter will use the IP address (along with other TCP configurable parameters)
stored in non-volatile memory.

IMPORTANT See Figure 58. The ArmorStart is shipped with the control module rotary switches
set to a value of 99. DO NOT modify this setting. If these are changed and the
unit stops responding, the switches will need to be manually set to node address
63 and power cycled.

Figure 58 - Rotary Switch on Control Module

Factory Setting 99

DO NOT CHANGE!

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Use the Rockwell Automation The Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility is a stand alone program that
incorporates the functionality of standard BootP/DHCP software with a user-
BootP/DHCP Utility friendly graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on the
RSLogix 5000 installation CD. The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP adapter must have
DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility.

IMPORTANT ArmorStart EtherNet/IP does not support BootP.

To configure your adapter using the BootP/DHCP utility, perform the following
steps:

1. Run the BootP/DHCP software.

In the BootP/DHCP Request History panel the hardware addresses of the
devices issuing BootP/DHCP requests are shown.

Figure 59 - BootP/DHCP Request History Panel

2. Double-click the hardware address of the device that you want to

configure.
The New Entry dialog with the device’s Ethernet Address (MAC) is
shown.

Figure 60 - New Entry Dialog Box

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 81

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

3. Enter the IP Address that you want to assign to the device, and click OK.
The device is added to the Relation List, displaying the Ethernet Address
(MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Hostname, and Description (if
applicable).

Figure 61 - Relation List

When the address displays in the IP Address column in the Request

History section, it signifies that the IP address assignment has been made.

4. To assign this configuration to the device, highlight the device in the

Relation List panel, and click the Disable BOOTP/DHCP button.

When power is cycled to the device, it uses the configuration you assigned
and does not issue a DHCP request.

5. To enable DHCP for a device with DHCP disabled, highlight the device
in the Relation List, and click the Enable DHCP button.
You must have an entry for the device in the Relation List panel to
re-enable DHCP.

Figure 62 - Enable DHCP Button

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Save the Relation List

You can save the Relation List to use later. To save the Relation List perform the
following steps:

1. Select Save As... from the File menu.

Figure 63 - Save the Relation List

The Save As Dialog is shown.

Figure 64 - Save As Dialog Box

2. Select the folder that you want to Save in.

3. Enter a File name for the Relation List (for example, Control System
Configuration), and click Save.
You can leave the Save as type at the default setting: Bootp
You can then open the file containing the Relation List at a later session.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 83

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

DHCP IP Support DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) software automatically assigns
IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network.

When DHCP is enabled (factory default Enabled), the unit will request its
network configuration from a DHCP/BOOTP server. Any configuration
received from a DHCP server is stored in non-volatile memory.

ArmorStart EtherNet/IP remembers the last successful address if DHCP is

enabled. The unit tries to obtain the same IP address from the DHCP server. If
the server is not present (e.g., server fails to power up), the unit will use the IP
address it previously received from the server. The DHCP timeout = 30 s.

Be cautious about using DHCP software to configure your adapter. A DHCP

server typically assigns a finite lease time to the offered IP address. When 50% of
the leased time has expired, the ArmorStart Ethernet adapter attempts to renew
its IP address with the DHCP server. The possibility exists that the adapter will
be assigned a different IP address, that would cause the adapter to cease
communicating with the controller.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Using the Rockwell Internal Web Server

Automation Embedded
ArmorStart Ethernet/IP internal web server allows you to view information and
Web Server configure the ArmorStart via a web browser. The embedded web server is used to
access configuration and status data. Security in the form of an administrative
password can be set. The default Login is Administrator. There is no password
set by default.

IMPORTANT The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel.
If the login and password are lost you will need to reset the device to the factory
defaults, that results in losing its configuration.

To access the internal web browser, open your computers internet browser and
enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart (for example, 192.168.1.1).

Note: 192.168.1.1 is NOT the factory default IP address as DHCP is enabled by

default.

Figure 65 - Internal Web Browser

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 85

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

From here you are able to view parameter settings, device status, and diagnostics
from multiple tab views.

Figure 66 - Multiple Tab Views

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Network Configuration

To access the network configuration, log in to the Administrative Setting. The

factory default login is Administrator. The factory default password is not used.
The user should change the password to ensure unauthorized personnel do not
access and modify the device configuration.

Figure 67 - Network Configurations

From this screen you can change the Ethernet Configuration. For example, in the
above image the default IP address was changed from 192.168.1.1 to
10.10.10.101. To access the webpage after a power cycle, the new address must be
used.

It is also important to leave the Ethernet link configuration P1/P2 set to auto
negotiate to minimize network issues. But if this is not acceptable you must verify
that all devices on the network are set to the same setting or network issues may
result.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 87

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

Parameter Configuration

ArmorStart Ethernet/IP embedded web server provides the user the ability to
view and modify the device configuration without having to access
RSLogix 5000. To view the device configuration from the web server, select the
Parameters folder. For the parameter configuration, the user logs in through the
Administrative Settings, or when prompted.

Figure 68 - Starter Setup

In the figure above the Starter Setup parameters are viewed. The user can view
all parameters from this screen. To modify a parameter, the user clicks the “Edit”
button.

Figure 69 - Enter Network Password

The user is prompted to enter the default user name (Administrator). There is no
password set by default. The user is expected to change the user name (login) and
password to avoid unauthorized access to the device configuration.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Figure 70 - Overload Class Settings

The above screen shows an example of changing the Overload Class setting to 15.
Once all changes are made select Apply.

E-mail Notification Configuration

ArmorStart Ethernet/IP internal web server supports the e-mailing of warning

and trip messages via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). The configuration
parameters for the SMTP Server’s IP address, user login, and port number are
configurable through the Administrative Settings page of the internal web server.
The user configures the device name, device description, and device trip type.

Figure 71 - E-mail Notification Configuration

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 89

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

E-mail triggers when a:

• Trip occurs
• Trip is cleared
• Warning occurs
• Warning is cleared

Note: “Cleared Event” e-mails are only sent when all events have been cleared and
if a trip event e-mail has previously been sent. For example, if the device is
configured to send e-mails when a phase loss trip and an overload trip is detected,
no e-mail is sent when both the overload and the phase loss is cleared.

The following is an example trip e-mail:

Subject: ArmorStart 281E, 0.5…2.5 A, 24V DC has detected a trip.

Body:

Trip Type: Overload

Trip Info: Load has drawn excessive current that is based on the trip
class selected.

Device Name: ArmorStart 281E, 0.5…2.5 A, 24V DC

(From Identity Object)

Device Description: Lift conveyor On-Machine motor starter

(From E-mail Config web page)

Device Location: Customer Plant

(From E-mail Config web page)

Contact Info: Joe Schmo

(From E-mail Config web page)
[email protected]

Device Connections The device supports both scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 &
UCMM) CIP connections. A maximum of two Class 1 CIP connections (one
exclusive owner and one listen only) are supported, one per PLC. Six Class 3 CIP
connections are supported.

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Ownership In a Studio 5000® system, modules multicast data. Therefore, multiple modules
can receive the same data simultaneously from a single module. When choosing a
communication format, decide whether to establish an owner-controller or
listen-only relationship with the module.

Table 6 - Communication Relationship

Ownership Type Description

Owner controller The controller that creates the primary configuration and communication connection to a module. The owner controller writes
configuration data and can establish a connection to the module.

Listen-only connection An I/O connection where another controller owns/provides the configuration data for the I/O module. A controller using a listen-only
connection monitors only the module. It does not write configuration data and can only maintain a connection to the I/O module when the
owner controller is actively controlling the I/O module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 91

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

Ethernet Statistics Web Page The Ethernet Statistics web page of a scanner provides a summary of the status of
communication activity on the Ethernet network.

The most commonly monitored fields are circled in the graphic and described in
the table that follows.

This table describes the field that is most commonly used on the Ethernet
Statistics web page.

Table 7 - Ethernet Statistics Web Page

Field Specifies
Ethernet Port 1 (These definitions apply to the same fields in the Ethernet Port 2 section.)
Interface State Whether the port is turned off or on. Active or inactive indicates whether there is a cable that is connected.
Link Status Whether the port is blocked for DLR protocol frames.
Speed Whether the Ethernet port is operating at 10 or 100 MBps.
Duplex Whether the Ethernet port is operating at half duplex or full duplex.
Autonegotiate Status Whether the port speed and Duplex mode were determined via autonegotiation or whether they were manually configured.
Media Counters Port 1
Alignment Errors A frame containing bits that do not total an integral multiple of eight.
FCS Errors A frame containing eight bits, at least one of which has been corrupted.
Single Collisions The number of outgoing packets that encountered only one collision during transmission.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Product Commissioning Chapter 4

Field Specifies
Multiple Collisions The number of outgoing packets that encountered 2...15 collisions during transmission.
SQE Test Errors A test to detect the collision-present circuit between a transceiver and a network interface card (NIC).
IMPORTANT: Because most NICs now have an integrated transceiver, the SQE test is unnecessary. Ignore this media counter.
Deferred Transmissions The number of outgoing packets whose transmission is deferred because the network is busy when the first attempt is made to send them.
Late Collisions The number of times two devices transmit data simultaneously.
Excessive Collisions The number of frames that experience 16 consecutive collisions.
MAC Transmit Errors Frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
Carrier Sense Errors Times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.
Frame Too Long The number of incoming packets that exceed the maximum Ethernet packet size.
MAC Receive Errors Frames for which reception on the Ethernet interface failed due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.

Connection Manager Cmd The Connection Manager Cmd Object Info web page of a scanner provides a
summary of connection request activity on the Ethernet network.
Object Info Web Page
The most commonly used field on this page is Connections Closed due to a
Timeout. This field shows the number of CIP connection timeouts that have
occurred on the module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 93

Chapter 4 Product Commissioning

Ring Statistics Web Page

IMPORTANT The Ring Statistics web page, and the descriptions in this section, only apply to
modules you can use in a Device-level Ring (DLR) network:
• 1756-EN2TR communication module
• 1756-EN3TR communication module

The Ring Statistics web page of a scanner provides a summary of the module’s
operating state in a DLR application.

The most commonly monitored fields are circled in the graphic and described in
the table that follows.

This table describes the field that is most commonly used on the Ring Statistics
web page.

Table 8 - Ring Statistics Web Page

Field Specifies
Ring Supervisor
Ring Supervisor Mode Whether a module is configured to function as supervisor node or a ring node.
Ring Supervisor Status Whether a module that is configured to function as a supervisor node is functioning as the active ring supervisor or a
backup supervisor node.
Ring Fault Location
Last Active Node on Port 1 The IP or MAC ID address of the last active node between port 1 on the module and the faulted part of the network.
Last Active Node on Port 2 The IP or MAC ID address of the last active node between port 2 on the module and the faulted part of the network.
Active Ring Supervisor
Address The IP or MAC ID address of the active ring supervisor.
Precedence The precedence value of the module. If the active supervisor node’s operation is interrupted the backup supervisor with
the next highest precedence value becomes the active supervisor node.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 5

Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000

Software

Setup This section shows you how to add an ArmorStart AOP to RSLogix™ 5000
software. It is assumed that you have downloaded and installed the AOP so that
the RSLogix 5000 software can fully support the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP. The
AOP can be downloaded from: http://support.rockwellautomation.com/
controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp.

1. Open RSLogix 5000 software by double-clicking the icon on your

desktop.

2. Select File > New, to create a new project.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 95

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

3. Enter the name of the project and select your controller from the Type
pull-down menu. (For this example, a Cat. No. 1769-L35E and software
version 19 is used.) Click OK.

4. To add a new module to the tree, right-click Ethernet and select New
Module. This allows you to add a new ArmorStart selection to the Logix
Project.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

5. Select the ArmorStart in your application and click OK.

6. The AOP is shown below. Enter a Name for this ArmorStart selection and
an Ethernet address. For this example, the Private Network setting is used.
This should be set to match the IP address switch setting on the
ArmorStart selection. Click OK.

Note: See Configuring EtherNet/IP Address in Chapter 4 to set an IP

address on the device.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 97

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Connect and Configure This section shows the AOP tabs and how they can be used to connect, obtain
status, and configure the ArmorStart selection. Before the walkthrough is started,
ArmorStart with Add-On- the RSLogix 5000 software should be open and an AOP displayed as shown
Profile (AOP) below.

The screenshot above displays that the AOP has seven tabs that can be used to
configure and/or monitor your ArmorStart selection. The following lists the tabs
and whether they are editable or not, with the controller when OFFLINE,
ONLINE, or both:
• General – OFFLINE
• Connection – OFFLINE
• Module Info – ONLINE
• Parameters – OFFLINE/ONLINE

Internet Protocol – ONLINE

• Port Configuration – ONLINE
• Network – ONLINE

The last five tabs in the list do not display information until the ONLINE
connection has been established with the ArmorStart device. The General,
Connection, and Parameters tabs are discussed first, because they are used to
define OFFLINE settings so that connection with the ArmorStart device can be
established.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Offline Connection General Tab

Click the General tab to display the following:

This tab allows you to name your module, which should be descriptive and
representative of the module. The IP Address of the module must also be input so
that communication can be established. The IP Address should be the one
defined using the BootP/DHCP Server, the Rotary Network Address Switches
or the ArmorStart internal web server.

For most cases, the Host Name and Module Definition section of this tab do not
require any adjustment. Changes to either of these should only be made if you are
familiar with the functionality of each of these sections.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 99

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Connection Tab

Click the Connection tab to display the following:

The Request Packet Interval (RPI) indicates the maximum frequency at which
data is received. It is possible that data could come more quickly than the time
interval assigned in the RPI. In most cases, the default 20 ms should be the
optimal setting. If you check the Inhibit Module option, connection to controller
tags will be broken. The Major Fault on Controller if Connection Fails While in
Run Mode option should be checked to ensure that the controller processes the
connection fault with the ArmorStart. The Use Unicast Connection over
EtherNet/IP is checked to use the Unicast mode instead of the EtherNet/IP
mode. This appears only for modules using RSLogix 5000 software version 18 or
later that supports Unicast.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Parameters Tab

Click the Parameters tab to display the following:

The parameters are divided into groups that are based on the type of ArmorStart
device. By clicking in the Group pull-down menu, you can choose which
parameter group is displayed. When the Parameters tab is selected, the tab
defaults to the Drive Setup (Bulletin 284E) or Starter Setup (Bulletin 280E)
groups depending on the ArmorStart selection. These Setup groups are the
minimum required parameters to get the ArmorStart device running.

After this parameter group has been set, the next time that the Parameters tab is
opened, all parameters are shown and the tab is no longer default to the setup
groups.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 101

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Online Connection Now that the offline connection settings have been set, connect to the
ArmorStart device to review the last five AOP tabs.

Note: If you are using a Cat. No. 1756-ENBT Ethernet module to communicate with
the PLC, verify that you have updated the module’s firmware to Revision 6.001 or
later. The latest firmware can be found at http://support.rockwellautomation.com/
controlflash/.

1. If a controller path is not set in the field that is shown below, you must first
set a path before going online with the controller. Click the RSwho
button shown below.

2. Expand and browse the AB_ETHIP-1, Ethernet driver.

3. Select the Controller path. Then click Go Online.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

4. The following appears and for this example, click Download to connect to
the controller.

5. If a download confirmation dialog box appears, click Download again.

6. Click Yes to bring the controller back to Remote Run.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 103

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

7. The controller should now be online. If at any point you go offline and a
path is selected, you can also go online by clicking the Offline drop down
in the upper left corner of the screen. Click Go Online to connect to the
ArmorStart device, as shown below.

Note: If a yellow triangle appears next to the ArmorStart Icon in the

Controller Organizer Tree as shown below, it means that the connection is
faulted. The problem must be fixed before you can connect to the
ArmorStart device. The next steps assume that the connection was
successful.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Parameters Tab

Return to the Parameters tab again once the AOP is opened by selecting the
ArmorStart in the project tree. Notice that when clicking in the Parameters tab,
an ArmorStart Correlation pop-up window is displayed, as shown below.

This indicates that the AOP is comparing the parameter data entered offline vs.
the parameter data that is stored in the ArmorStart device. If any discrepancies are
found between the parameters in the AOP and the parameters in the ArmorStart
device, a window will pop-up, as shown below, asking you to decide which
parameters you want to keep.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 105

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

If you want to keep the parameters in the AOP, select Download. If you want to
keep the parameters in the ArmorStart device, select Upload. Otherwise, select
Cancel. Clicking Cancel locks the user out of viewing the values. If you are
connected to a new ArmorStart device and you just created the ArmorStart
object and have not made any changes in the parameters, the ArmorStart
correlation should not find any discrepancy.

Note: If you make any changes to the parameters offline, they will not be
downloaded to the ArmorStart device when the connection is made (going
Online). For the Offline changes to take effect you must go to the Parameters tab.
Once you click the Parameters tab, ArmorStart correlation takes place and then
the changes can be downloaded to the ArmorStart device.

Module Info Tab

Click the Module Info tab to display the following:

This tab displays general identification information, as well as status information

about the ArmorStart device. It is important to note that the information that is
displayed in this tab is not constantly updated. After you click the Module Info
tab, the AOP queries the ArmorStart device once for the information displayed
in this tab and does not query the ArmorStart for the values again. If after the
initial query the status of the ArmorStart device changes, for example a fault
occurs, the change in the status will not be automatically updated. The Refresh
button must be pressed to request the AOP for another ArmorStart query.

Note: A connection status (offline, online, downloading, or uploading) is

provided at the bottom left of the tab window. The connection status appears in
all tabs.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Internet Protocol Tab

Click the Internet Protocol tab to display the following:

If the IP address was set up using the Rotary Network Address Switches, default
settings for the IP would already be established and you will not be able to make
any changes in this tab. In most cases, you would not need to make any changes in
this tab and it only displays the current IP Settings Configuration.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 107

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Port Configuration Tab

Click the Port Configuration tab to display the following:

This tab is used to enable or disable a physical port in the module. The ports are
normally in Auto Negotiate mode, which in general, is the recommended setting.
Otherwise, you have to physically set the Speed or Duplex selection in this tab. It
is important to note that although there are two physical ports, they act as one.
Therefore, when you press either of the Port Diagnostic buttons, information
coming from both of the physical ports is displayed.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Network Tab

Click this tab to display the following:

This tab displays information about the network configuration, such as the type
of topology (linear or device level ring).

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 109

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Auto-Generated Tags

After you install and configure the AOP, the controller tags are generated. The
tags names are descriptive and automatically generated. This greatly simplifies
programming. The figure below shows an example of the auto-generated tags for
an ArmorStart selection.

The following tables provide more clarification regarding the Produce and
Consume assemblies and how they correlate with the auto-generated names.

Using an AOP the data in the Consumed and Produced Assemblies are
automatically created as descriptive tag names. To drive this point home we've
highlighted a few of the commands to demonstrate the AOP tag alignment to the
Consumed and Produced Assemblies in the following tables.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Table 9 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 284E

Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Out B Out A — JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 DriveInput4 DriveInput3 DriveInput2 DriveInput1 DecelCtrl_1 DecelCtrl_0 AccelCtrl_1 AccelCtrl_0
2 FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3 FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
5 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt9DeviceIn Pt8DeviceIn

Table 10 - Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly Command Tags

Controller Output/ Command Tags
Controller Name Name Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO RunForward AS_DEMO:O.RunForward
AS_DEMO RunReverse AS_DEMO:O.RunReverse
AS_DEMO ResetFault AS_DEMO:O.ResetFault
AS_DEMO JogForward AS_DEMO:O.JogForward
AS_DEMO JogReverse AS_DEMO:O.JogReverse
AS_DEMO OutA AS_DEMO:O.OutA
AS_DEMO OutB AS_DEMO:O.OutB
AS_DEMO AccelCtrl_0 AS_DEMO:O.AccelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO AccelCtrl_1 AS_DEMO:O.AccelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO DecelCtrl_0 AS_DEMO:O.DecelCtrl_0
AS_DEMO DecelCtrl_1 AS_DEMO:O.DecelCtrl_1
AS_DEMO DriveInput1 AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput1
AS_DEMO DriveInput2 AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput2
AS_DEMO DriveInput3 AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput3
AS_DEMO DriveInput4 AS_DEMO:O.DriveInput4
AS_DEMO FreqCommand AS_DEMO:O.FreqCommand
AS_DEMO Pt00DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt00DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt01DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt01DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt02DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt02DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt03DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt03DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt04DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt04DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt05DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt05DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt06DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt06DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt07DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt07DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt08DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt08DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt09DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt09DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt10DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt10DeviceIn

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 111

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Controller Output/ Command Tags

Controller Name Name Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO Pt11DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt11DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt12DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt12DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt13DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt13DeviceIn
AS_DEMO Pt14DeviceIn AS_DEMO:O.Pt14DeviceIn

Table 11 - Default Produce Assembly for Bulletin 284E

Produce Assembly - Instance 151 “Drive Status” - Bulletin284E Starters

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
1 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
2 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
3 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
Network
4 AtReference NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent
ReferenceStatus
Output Brake
5 DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In1 In0
ContactorStatus ContactorStatus
6 OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
7 OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
8 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
9 LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut P10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
10 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)" - Int00DeviceOut
11 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)" - Int00DeviceOut
12 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)" - Int01DeviceOut
13 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)" - Int01DeviceOut
14 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)" - Int02DeviceOut
15 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)" - Int02DeviceOut
16 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)" - Int03DeviceOut
17 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)" - Int03DeviceOut

➊ Identifies if a Communication Fault exists. If a communication loss is present the PLC writes four bytes of 1's to this tag. The user
should monitor this tag to ensure the data is valid.

IMPORTANT The user PLC control program should monitor the I.Fault tag to ensure the data is
accurate. When a communications fault occurs, the data in the consume and produce
tags may not accurately reflect the status.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Table 12 - Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly Status Tags

Controller Input/ Status Tags
Controller Name Name Logix Tag Name
AS_DEMO Fault AS_DEMO:I.Fault
AS_DEMO TripPresent AS_DEMO:I.TripPresent
AS_DEMO WarningPresent AS_DEMO:I.WarningPresent
AS_DEMO RunningForward AS_DEMO:I.RunningForward
AS_DEMO RunningReverse AS_DEMO:I.RunningReverse
AS_DEMO Ready AS_DEMO:I.Ready
AS_DEMO NetworkControlStatus AS_DEMO:I.NetworkControlStatus
AS_DEMO NetworkReferenceStatus AS_DEMO:I.NetworkReferenceStatus
AS_DEMO AtReference AS_DEMO:I.AtReference
AS_DEMO In0 AS_DEMO:I.In0
AS_DEMO In1 AS_DEMO:I.In1
AS_DEMO In2 AS_DEMO:I.In2
AS_DEMO In3 AS_DEMO:I.In3
AS_DEMO Hand AS_DEMO:I.Hand
AS_DEMO DisconnectClosed AS_DEMO:I.DisconnectClosed
AS_DEMO BrakeContactorStatus AS_DEMO:I.BrakeContactorStatus
AS_DEMO OutputContactorStatus AS_DEMO:I.OutputContactorStatus
AS_DEMO OutputFrequency AS_DEMO:I.OutputFrequency
AS_DEMO Pt00DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt01DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt02DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt03DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt03DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt04DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt04DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt05DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt05DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt06DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt06DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt07DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt07DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt08DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt08DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt09DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt09DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt10DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt10DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt11DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt11DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt12DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt12DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt13DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt13DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Pt14DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Pt14DeviceOut
AS_DEMO LogicEnabled AS_DEMO:I.LogicEnabled
AS_DEMO Int00DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Int00DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Int01DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Int01DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Int02DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Int02DeviceOut
AS_DEMO Int03DeviceOut AS_DEMO:I.Int03DeviceOut

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 113

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Table 13 - Bulletin 284E Consume Assembly/Command Tag Explanation

Controller Output/ Command Tags Tag Description/Use

RunForward Command VFD forward
RunReverse Command VFD reverse
ResetFault Fault reset
JogForward Command Jog forward per internal frequency
JogReverse Command Jog reverse per internal frequency
OutA Output A
OutB Output B
AccelCtrl_0 VFD acceleration ramp 1
AccelCtrl_1 VFD acceleration ramp 2
DecelCtrl_0 VFD deceleration ramp 1
DecelCtrl_1 VFD deceleration ramp 2
DriveInput1 VFD Digit Input 1
DriveInput2 VFD Digit Input 2
DriveInput3 VFD Digit Input 3
DriveInput4 VFD Digit Input 4
FreqCommand Logix commanded frequency
Pt00DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt01DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt02DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt03DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt04DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt05DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt06DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt07DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt08DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt09DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt10DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt11DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt12DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt13DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt14DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt15DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Table 14 - Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly/Status Tag Explanation

Controller Input/ Status Tags Tag Description/Use

Fault Communication Fault between PLC and Device (all 1's = Fault, all 0's = Normal)
TripPresent Fault exists with unit
WarningPresent Warning of potential fault
RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward
RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse
Ready Control Power and 3-phase present
NetworkControlStatus Start and Stop command comes from network (PLC or Connected Explicit Messaging)
NetworkReferenceStatus Speed reference comes from the network (not DeviceLogix)
AtReference At commanded speed reference
In0 Input 0
In1 Input 1
In2 Input 2
In3 Input 3
Hand HOA is in Auto mode
DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed
BrakeContactorStatus Source brake contactor status (1=close, 0=open)
OutputContactorStatus Ouput contactor status (1=close, 0=open)
OutputFrequency VFD frequency
Pt00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt01DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt02DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt03DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt04DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt05DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt06DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt07DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt08DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt09DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt10DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt11DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt12DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt13DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt14DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
LogicEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled
Int00DeviceOut Data reference by Parameter 13
Int01DeviceOut Data reference by Parameter 14
Int02DeviceOut Data reference by Parameter 15
Int03DeviceOut Data reference by Parameter 16

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 115

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Table 15 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E

Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 OutB OutA — — — ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
2 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn

Table 16 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Controller Output/Command Tags

Controller Name Name Logix Tag Name
DEMO_REV RunForward DEMO_REV:O.RunForward
DEMO_REV RunReverse DEMO_REV:O.RunReverse
DEMO_REV ResetFault DEMO_REV:O.ResetFault
DEMO_REV OutA DEMO_REV:O.OutA
DEMO_REV OutB DEMO_REV:O.OutB
DEMO_REV Pt00DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt00DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt01DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt01DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt02DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt02DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt03DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt03DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt04DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt04DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt05DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt05DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt06DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt06DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt07DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt07DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt08DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt08DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt09DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt09DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt10DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt10DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt11DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt11DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt12DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt12DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt13DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt13DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt14DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt14DeviceIn
DEMO_REV Pt15DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt15DeviceIn

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Table 17 -
Instance 150 "Starter Stat" - Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
1 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
2 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
3 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault ➊
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

4 — — — Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent

5 — — DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In1 In0
6 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
7 LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
8 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)" - ProducedWord0Param
9 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)" - ProducedWord0Param
10 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)" - ProducedWord1Param
11 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)" - ProducedWord1Param
12 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)" - ProducedWord2Param
13 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)" - ProducedWord2Param
14 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)" - ProducedWord3Param
15 Value of the parameter pointed to by "Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)" - ProducedWord3Param

➊ Identifies if a Communication Fault exists. If a communication loss is present the PLC writes four bytes of 1's to this tag. The user
should monitor this tag to ensure the data is valid.

IMPORTANT The user PLC control program should monitor the I.Fault tag to ensure the data is
accurate. When a communications fault occurs, the data in the consume and produce
tags may not accurately reflect the status.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 117

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Table 18 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Controller Input/ Status Tags

Controller Name Name Logix Tag Name
DEMO_REV Fault DEMO_REV:I.Fault
DEMO_REV TripPresent DEMO_REV:I.TripPresent
DEMO_REV WarningPresent DEMO_REV:I.WarningPresent
DEMO_REV RunningForward DEMO_REV:I.RunningForward
DEMO_REV RunningReverse DEMO_REV:I.RunningReverse
DEMO_REV Ready DEMO_REV:I.Ready
DEMO_REV In0 DEMO_REV:I.In0
DEMO_REV In1 DEMO_REV:I.In1
DEMO_REV In2 DEMO_REV:I.In2
DEMO_REV In3 DEMO_REV:I.In3
DEMO_REV Hand DEMO_REV:I.Hand
DEMO_REV DisconnectClosed DEMO_REV:I.DisconnectClosed
DEMO_REV Pt00DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt00DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt01DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt01DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt02DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt02DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt03DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt03DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt04DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt04DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt05DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt05DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt06DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt06DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt07DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt07DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt08DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt08DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt09DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt09DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt10DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt10DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt11DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt11DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt12DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt12DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt13DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt13DeviceOut
DEMO_REV Pt14DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt14DeviceOut
DEMO_REV LogicEnabled DEMO_REV:I.LogicEnabled
DEMO_REV ProducedWord0Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord0Param
DEMO_REV ProducedWord1Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord1Param
DEMO_REV ProducedWord2Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord2Param
DEMO_REV ProducedWord3Param DEMO_REV:I.ProducedWord3Param

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software Chapter 5

Table 19 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation

Controller Output/ Command Tags Tag Description/Use
RunForward Command VFD forward
RunReverse Command VFD reverse
ResetFault Fault reset
OutA OutputA
OutB OutputB
Pt00DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt01DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt02DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt03DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt04DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt05DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt06DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt07DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt08DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt09DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt10DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt11DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt12DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt13DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt14DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt15DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 119

Chapter 5 Adding an ArmorStart Selection to RSLogix 5000 Software

Table 20 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation

Controller Input/Status Tags Tag Description/Use
Fault Communication Fault between PLC and Device
(all 1's = Fault, all 0's = Normal)
TripPresent Fault exists with unit
WarningPresent Warning of potential fault
RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward
RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse
Ready Control Power and 3-phase present
In0 Input 0
In1 Input 1
In2 Input 2
In3 Input 3
Hand HOA is in Auto mode
DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed
Pt00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt01DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt02DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt03DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt04DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt05DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt06DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt07DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt08DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt09DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt10DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt11DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt12DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt13DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt14DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
LogicEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled
ProducedWord0Param Data reference by Parameter 13
ProducedWord1Param Data reference by Parameter 14
ProducedWord2Param Data reference by Parameter 15
ProducedWord3Param Data reference by Parameter 16

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 6

Optional HOA Keypad Operation

Introduction This chapter provides a basic understanding of the programming of the factory-
installed optional built-in Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad. The HOA keypad
can be programmed for maintained or momentary operation.

Figure 72 - Optional HOA Keypads

Available on Bulletin 280E Available on Bulletin 281E Available on Bulletin 284E

Keypad Description The keys that are found on the optional HOA keypads are described below:

Table 21 - HOA Keypad – Key Description

HAND The Hand key initiates starter operation

The Auto key allows for Start/Stop control via the communications
AUTO network

OFF If the starter is running, pressing the OFF key causes the starter to stop.

REV The REV key selects reverse direction of the motor

FWD The FWD key selects forward direction of the motor

DIR Arrow The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor, either forward or reverse.

When pressed, JOG will be initiated if no other control devices are sending
JOG a stop command. Releasing the key causes the drive to stop, using selected
stop mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 121

Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation

Figure 73 - Bulletin 280E/281E Hand -Off-Auto Selector Keypad

The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1=momentary.
.

HAND STOP HAND FWD AUTO

Command motor OFF and Ignore Ignore

transition to “AUTO”

Command motor ON and Ignore Ignore

transition to “HAND FWD”

Command motor OFF and Command motor OFF and

Ignore transition to “HAND STOP” transition to “HAND STOP”

The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0=maintained.
.

HAND STOP HAND FWD AUTO

Command motor OFF and
NO KEY PRESSED Ignore Ignore
transition to “HAND STOP”

Command motor OFF and Ignore Ignore

transition to “AUTO”

Command motor ON and Ignore Ignore

transition to “HAND FWD”

Command motor OFF and Command motor OFF and

Ignore transition to “HAND STOP” transition to “HAND STOP”

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Chapter 6

Figure 74 - Bulletin 281E Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with

Forward/Reverse Function

The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1=momentary.

HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV AUTO

Set FWD LED Ignore Ignore Set FWD LED

Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED

Command motor OFF and transition to Ignore Ignore Ignore

“AUTO”

If (FWD LED) transition to

“HAND FWD”
Ignore Ignore Ignore
If (REV LED)
transition to “HAND REV”

Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to
Ignore “HAND STOP” “HAND STOP” “HAND STOP”

The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0=maintained.

HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV AUTO

NO KEY Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to
Ignore Ignore
PRESSED “HAND STOP” “HAND STOP”

Set FWD LED Ignore Ignore Set FWD LED

Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED

Command motor OFF and transition to Ignore Ignore Ignore

“AUTO”

If (FWD LED) transition to

“HAND FWD”
Ignore Ignore Ignore
If (REV LED)
transition to “HAND REV”

Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to Command motor OFF and transition to
Ignore “HAND STOP” “HAND STOP” “HAND STOP”

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 123

Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation

Figure 75 - Bulletin 284E Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with JOG and

Direction Arrow Functions

The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog/HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 1 = momentary.

HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV JOG FWD JOG REV AUTO
If (FWD LED) If (FWD LED)
If (FWD LED) Set REV LED Set REV LED Set REV LED
Ignore Ignore Ignore
Else If (REV LED) Set FWD LED Else If (REV LED) Else If (REV LED)
Set FWD LED Set FWD LED

If (FWD LED) transition to JOG FWD

Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore
If (REV LED) transition to JOG REV

Command motor OFF and transition to AUTO Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore

If (FWD LED) transition to

HAND FWD
Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore
Else If (REV LED) transition to
HAND REV
Command motor Command motor
No Key Pressed Ignore Ignore Ignore OFF and transition OFF and transition Ignore
to HAND STOP to HAND STOP
Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor
Ignore OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition
to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Optional HOA Keypad Operation Chapter 6

The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog/HOA behavior when
Parameter 45 “Keypad Mode” is set to 0 = maintained.

HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV JOG FWD JOG REV AUTO
Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor
No Key Pressed Ignore OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition Ignore
to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP

If (FWD LED) Set REV LED

Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore
Else If (REV LED) Set FWD LED

If (FWD LED) transition to JOG FWD

Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore
If (REV LED) Transition to JOG REV

Command motor OFF and Transition to AUTO Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore

If (FWD LED) transition to HAND FWD

Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore
If (REV LED) transition to HAND REV

Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor
Ignore OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition OFF and transition
to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP to HAND STOP

Note: In nearly all instances, if the processor detects multiple buttons are pressed
simultaneously, the software interprets this as a “no button pressed” condition.
The only exception to this rule is if multiple buttons are pressed and one of them
is the “OFF” button. If the “OFF” button is pressed in combination with any
combination of other buttons, the processor will interpret this the same as if the
“OFF” button were pressed by itself.

Keypad and HOA Disable Parameter 46 “Keypad Disable”, disables the “HAND”, “FWD”, “REV” and “Jog”
buttons on the HOA keypad. The “OFF” and “AUTO” buttons are always
enabled, even if Parameter 46 is set to “1=Disable”. In addition for Bulletin 284
the user can disable the HAND-Reverse and Jog-Reverse operation by setting
parameter 195, Reverse Disable.

See Chapter C for an example how to dynamically disable the keypad.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 125

Chapter 6 Optional HOA Keypad Operation

Notes:

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 7

Bulletin 280E/281E/284E
Programmable Parameters

Basic Setup Parameters To configure the basic ArmorStart functionality see Table 22 below. These are the
minimum setup configurations that are required for Bulletin 280E, 281E, or
Bulletin 284E. There are additional capabilities and motor protection that are
not enabled or left at their default values.
Table 22 - Quick Parameter Setup

Bulletin 280E, 281E Bulletin 284E

106 FLA Setting 131 Motor NP Volts
107 Overload Class 132 Motor NP Hertz
108 OL Reset Level 133 Motor OL Current
134 Minimum Freq
135 Maximum Freq
137 Stop Mode
138 Speed Reference
139 Accel Time 1
140 Decel Time 1

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 127

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Parameter Groups
Bulletin 284E
Common to Bulletin 280E, 281E, and Bulletin 284E Units Units Only
Produced Assembly
Basic Status Config Group Starter Protection User I/O Config Miscellaneous Config Drive I/O Config
1 Hdw Inputs 13 Int00DeviceOut Cfg 23 Pr FltResetMode 30 Anti-bounce On Delay 8 Network Override 48 Drive Control
2 DeviceIn Data 14 Int01DeviceOut Cfg 24 Pr Fault Enable 31 Anti-bounce OFF Delay 9 Comm Override 49 DrvIn Pr FltState
3 DeviceOut Data 15 Int02DeviceOut Cfg 25 Pr Fault Reset 32 In Sink/Source 45 Keypad Mode 50 DrvIn Pr FltValue
4 Trip Status 16 Int03DeviceOut Cfg 26 Str Net FltState 33 OutA Pr FltState 46 Keypad Disable 51 DrvIn Net FltState
5 Starter Status 27 Str Net FltValue 34 OutA Pr FltValue 47 Set To Defaults 52 DrvIn Net FltValue
6 InternalLinkStat 28 Str Net IdlState 35 OutA Net FltState 53 DrvIn Net IdlState
7 Starter Command 29 Str Net IdlValue 36 OutA Net FltValue 54 DrvIn Net IdlValue
22 Breaker Type 37 OutA Net IdlState
56 Base Enclosure 38 OutA Net IdlValue
57 Base Options 39 OutB Pr FltState
58 Wiring Options 40 OutB Pr FltValue
59 Starter Enclosure 41 OutB Net FltState
60 Starter Options 42 OutB Net FltValue
61 Last Pr Fault 43 OutB Net IdlState
62 Warning Status 44 OutB Net IdlValue
63 Base Trip

Bulletin280E, 281E
Units Only Bulletin 284E Units Only
Starter Display Drive Display Drive Setup Drive Advanced Setup
101 Phase A Current 101 Output Freq 131 Motor NP Volts 151 Digital In 1 Sel 181 DC Brake Level 201 Program Lock
102 Phase B Current 102 Commanded Freq 132 Motor NP Hertz 152 Digital In 2 Sel 182 DB Resistor Sel 205 Comm Loss Action
103 Phase C Current 103 Output Current 133 Motor OL Current 153 Digital In 3 Sel 183 S Curve % 206 Comm Loss Time
104 Average Current 104 Output Voltage 134 Minimum Freq 154 Digital In 4 Sel 184 Boost Select 214 Slip Hertz @ FLA
105 Therm Utilized 105 DC Bus Voltage 135 Maximum Freq 155 Relay Out Sel 185 Start Boost 217 Bus Reg Mode
106 Drive Status 136 Start Source 156 Relay Out Level 186 Brake Voltage 218 Current Limit 2
Starter Setup 107 Fault 1 Code 137 Stop Mode 167 Accel Time 2 187 Brake Frequency 219 Skip Frequency
108 Fault 2 Code 138 Speed Reference 168 Decel Time 2 188 Maximum Voltage 220 Skip Freq Band
106 FLA Setting 109 Fault 3 Code 139 Accel Time 1 169 Internal Freq 189 Current Limit 1 221 Stall Fault Time
107 Overload Class 110 Process Display 140 Decel Time 1 170 Preset Freq 0 190 Motor OL Select 224 Var PWM Disable
108 OL Reset Level 112 Control Source 141 Reset To Defaults 171 Preset Freq 1 191 PWM Frequency 225 Torque Perf Mode
113 Contrl In Status 143 Motor OL Ret 172 Preset Freq 2 192 Auto Rstrt Tries 226 Motor NP FLA
114 Dig In Status 173 Preset Freq 3 193 Auto Rstrt Delay 227 Autotune
115 Comm Status 174 Preset Freq 4 194 Start At PowerUp 228 IR Voltage Drop
116 Control SW Ver 175 Preset Freq 5 195 Reverse Disable 229 Flux Current Ref
117 Drive Type 176 Preset Freq 6 196 Flying Start En 260 EM Brk OFF Delay
118 Elapsed Run Time 177 Preset Freq 7 197 Compensation 261 EM Brk On Delay
122 Output Power 178 Jog Frequency 198 SW Current Trip 262 MOP Reset Sel
123 Output Power Fctr 179 Jog Accel/Decel 199 Process Factor 263 DB Threshold
124 Drive Temp 180 DC Brake Time 200 Fault Clear 264 Comm Write Mode
125 Counter Status
126 Timer Status
129 Torque Current

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

ArmorStart EtherNet/IP Introduction

Parameters
This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function.

Parameter Programming
Each Distributed Motor Controller type has a common set of parameters
followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type.
Parameters 1…100 are common to all ArmorStart devices.

IMPORTANT Parameter setting changes take effect immediately unless otherwise noted in the
parameter listing. These changes maybe immediate even during the "running" status.

Bulletin 280E/281E Basic Status Group

Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 1

This parameter provides status of Access Rule GET

hardware inputs. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 15
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
3 2 1 0
— — — X In0
— — X — In1
— X — — In2
X — — — In3

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 129

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

DeviceIn Data Parameter Number 2

This parameter provides status of network Access Rule GET

device inputs. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Pt06DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Pt07DeviceIn
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Pt08DeviceIn
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Pt09DeviceIn
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Pt10DeviceIn
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Pt11DeviceIn
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt12DeviceIn
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt13DeviceIn
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt14DeviceIn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt15DeviceIn

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

DeviceOut Data Parameter Number 3

This parameter provides status of network Access Rule GET

device outputs. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Pt06DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Pt07DeviceOut
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Pt08DeviceOut
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Pt09DeviceOut
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Pt10DeviceOut
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Pt11DeviceOut
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt12DeviceOut
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt13DeviceOut
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt14DeviceOut
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 131

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Trip Status Parameter Number 4

This parameter provides trip identification. Access Rule GET

Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 16383
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Short Circuit
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Overload
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Phase Loss
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Phase Imbalance
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — A3 Power Loss
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — EEprom
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — HW Fault
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Starter Status Parameter Number 5

This parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET

starter. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 16383
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Ready
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Net Ctl Status
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — At Reference
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Keypad Hand Mode
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — HOA Status
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — DisconnectClosed
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 133

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

InternalLinkStat Parameter Number 6

Status of the internal network Access Rule GET

connections. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 31
Default Value 0

Bit
Function:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Explicit Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — I/O Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Explicit Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — I/O Idle
X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — Reserved

Starter Command Parameter Number 7

The parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET

starter command. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 255
Default Value 0

Bit
Function:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — X Run Fwd
— — — — — — X — Run Rev
— — — — — X — — Fault Reset
— — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — X — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — OutA
X — — — — — — — OutB

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Breaker Type Parameter Number 22

This parameter identifies the Bulletin Access Rule GET/SET

140M used in this product. Data Type BOOL
0 = 140M-D8N-C10
1 = 140M-D8N-C25 Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Base Enclosure Parameter Number 56

Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit Access Rule GET

enclosure rating.
Bit 0 = IP67 Data Type WORD
Bit 1 = Reserved Group Basic Status
Bit 2…15 = Reserved
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 1

Base Options Parameter Number 57

Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Access Rule GET

Base unit.
Bit 0 = Output Fuse Data Type WORD
Bit 1 = Reserved Group Basic Status
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved Units —
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base Minimum Value 0
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Maximum Value 517
Default Value 0

Wiring Options Parameter Number 58

Bit 0 = Conduit Access Rule GET

Bit 1 = Round Media
Bit 2 = 28xG Gland Data Type WORD
Bits 3…15 = Reserved Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 4
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 135

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Starter Enclosure Parameter Number 59

Bit 0 = IP67 Access Rule GET

Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Sil3/Cat4 Data Type WORD
Bit 3…15 = Reserved Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 4
Default Value 1

Starter Options Parameter Number 60

Bit 0 = Full Keypad Access Rule GET

Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Source Brake Data Type WORD
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = Reserved Group Basic Status
Bit 5 = Reserved
Bit 6 = Reserved Units —
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = Reserved Minimum Value 0
Bit 9…15 = Reserved
Maximum Value 66535
Default Value 0

Last PR Fault
Parameter Number 61
0 = None
1 = Hardware Short Circuit
2 = Software Short Circuit
3 = Motor Overload Access Rule GET
4 = Reserved
5 = Phase Loss
6…12 = Reserved
13 = Control Power Loss Data Type UINT
14 = Control Power Fuse
15 = I/O Short
16 = Output Fuse
17 = Overtemp Group Basic Status
18 = Reserved
19 = Phase Imbalance
20 = Reserved
21 = A3 Power Loss Units —
22 = Internal Comm
23…26 = Reserved
27 = MCB EEPROM
28 = Base EEPROM Minimum Value 0
29 = Reserved
30 = Wrong Base
31 = Wrong CTs
32…100 = Reserved Maximum Value 100

Default Value 0

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Warning Status Parameter Number 62

This parameter warns the user of a Access Rule GET

condition, without faulting.
Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Warnings are always enabled. The warning conditions are reported even if the
corresponding fault conditions are disabled.

Warning bits in the Warning Status parameter are cleared automatically when the
warning condition is no longer present.

Bit
Warning
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Phase Loss
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Warning
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Phase Imbalance
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — A3 Power Loss
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Hardware
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

Base Trip Parameter Number 63

The parameter determines the status of Access Rule GET

the Base Module Trip Status. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 137

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Warning
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X EEPROM Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Internal Comm
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Hardware Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Control Module
X X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — Reserved

Produced Assembly Config Group

Int00DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 13

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int00DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 108
Default Value 1

Int01DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 14

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int01DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 108
Default Value 4

Int02DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 15

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int02DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 108
Default Value 5

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Int03DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 16

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 108
Default Value 6

Starter Protection Group

Pr FltReset Mode Parameter Number 23

This parameter configures the Protection Access Rule GET/SET

Fault reset mode. Data Type BOOL
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic (Faults are cleared Group Starter Protection
automatically when the fault condition is
corrected) Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Pr Fault Enable Parameter Number 24

This parameter enables the Protection Access Rule GET/SET

Fault by setting the bit to 1. Data Type WORD
Group Starter Protection
Units —
Minimum Value 12419
Maximum Value 13287
Default Value 12419

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 139

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Function
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X Short Circuit ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — Overload ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — Phase Loss
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — Control Power
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature ➊
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — Phase Imbalance
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — A3 Power Loss
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — EEprom ➊
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — HW Fault ➊

➊ Cannot be disabled

Pr Fault Reset Parameter Number 25

This parameter resets the Protection Fault Access Rule GET/SET

on a transition of 0 > 1. Data Type BOOL
Group Starter Protection
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Str Net FltState Parameter Number 26

This parameter along with Parameter 27 Access Rule GET/SET

(Str Net FltValue), defines how the starter Data Type BOOL
responds when a fault occurs as
determined by Parameter 27. Allows Group Starter Protection
Starter to hold last state or go to FltValue
on NetFaults. Units —
0 = Goto Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Str Net FltValue Parameter Number 27

This parameter determines how the starter Access Rule GET

is commanded in the event of a fault. State Data Type BOOL
the Starter goes to on a Net Flt if
Parameter 26 (Str Net FltState) = 0 (Goto Group Starter Protection
Fault Value).
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Str Net IdlState Parameter Number 28

This parameter along with Parameter 29 Access Rule GET/SET

(Str Net IdlValue), defines how the starter Data Type BOOL
will respond when a network is idle as
determined by Parameter 29. Group Starter Protection
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Str Net IdlValue Parameter Number 29

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET

starter assumes when the network is idle Data Type BOOL
and Parameter 28 (Str Net IdlState) is set
to “0”. Group Starter Protection
0 = OFF
1 = ON Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

User I/O Configuration Group

Anti-bounce On Delay Parameter Number 30

This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET/SET

program a time duration before an input is Data Type UINT
reported “ON” (Anti-bounce).
Group User I/O Config.
Units ms
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 141

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Anti-bounce OFF Delay Parameter Number 31

This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET/SET

program a time duration before an input is Data Type UINT
reported “OFF” (Anti-bounce).
Group User I/O Config.
Units ms
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65
Default Value 0

In Sink/Source Parameter Number 32

This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET/SET

program the inputs to be sink or source. Data Type BOOL
0 = Sink
1 = Source Group User I/O Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Pr FltState Parameter Number 33

This parameter along with Parameter 34 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutA Pr FltValue), defines how Output A
will respond when a protection trip occurs. Data Type BOOL
0 = Goto Pr FltValue
1 = Ignore Pr Flt Group User I/O Config.
When set to “1”, Output A continues to Units —
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes Minimum Value 0
as determined by setting in Parameter 34.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Pr FltValue Parameter Number 34

This parameter determines the state the Access Rule GET/SET

Output A assumes when a trip occurs and Data Type BOOL
Parameter 33 (OutA Pr FltState) is set to
“0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

OutA Net FltState Parameter Number 35

This parameter along with Parameter 36 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutA Net FltValue), defines how Output A Data Type BOOL
will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Net FltValue Group User I/O Config.
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output A will hold state Units —
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output A opens or closes as determined by Minimum Value 0
setting in Parameter 36.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Net FltValue Parameter Number 36

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output A assumes when a network fault Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 35 (OutA Net
FltState) is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Net IdlState Parameter Number 37

This parameter along with Parameter 38 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutA Net IdlValue), defines how Output A Data Type BOOL
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto Net IdlValue Group User I/O Config.
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes Units —
as determined by the setting in Parameter
38. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Net IdlValue Parameter Number 38

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output A assumes when the network is Data Type BOOL
idle and Parameter 37 (OutA Net IdlState)
is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 143

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

OutB Pr FltState Parameter Number 39

This parameter along with Parameter 40 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutB Pr FltValue), defines how Output B Data Type BOOL
will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value Group User I/O Config.
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output B continues to Units —
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes Minimum Value 0
as determined by setting in Parameter 40.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Pr FltValue Parameter Number 40

This parameter determines the state the Access Rule GET/SET

Out B assumes when a protection trip Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr FltState)
is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Net FltState Parameter Number 41

This parameter along with Parameter 42 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutB Net FltValue), defines how Output B
will respond when a network fault occurs. Data Type BOOL
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State Group User I/O Config.
When set to “1”, Output B will hold state Units —
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output B opens or closes as determined by Minimum Value 0
setting in Parameter 42.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Net FltValue Parameter Number 42

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output B assumes when a network fault Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 41 (OutB Net
FltState) is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

OutB Net IdlState Parameter Number 43

This parameter along with Parameter 44 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutB Net IdlValue), defines how Output B Data Type BOOL
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value Group User I/O Config.
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes Units —
as determined by the setting in Parameter
44. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Net IdlValue Parameter Number 44

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output B assumes when the network is Data Type BOOL
idle and Parameter 43 (OutB Net IdlState)
is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Miscellaneous Configuration Group

Network Override Parameter Number 8

This parameter allows for the local logic to Access Rule GET/SET
override a Network fault. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
1 = Enable Group Misc. Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Comm Override Parameter Number 9

This parameter allows for local logic to Access Rule GET/SET

override the absence of an I/O connection. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
1 = Enable Group Misc. Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 145

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Keypad Mode Parameter Number 45

This parameter selects if the keypad Access Rule GET/SET

operation is maintained or momentary. Data Type BOOL
0 = Maintained
1 = Momentary Group Misc. Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Keypad Disable Parameter Number 46

This parameter disables all keypad Access Rule GET/SET

function except for the “OFF” and “RESET”
buttons. Data Type BOOL
0 = Not Disabled Group Misc. Config.
1 = Disabled
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Set to Defaults Parameter Number 47

This parameter if set to “1” will set the Access Rule GET/SET
device to the factory defaults (but will not Data Type BOOL
cause the ArmorStart to reboot).
0 = No Operation Group Misc. Config.
1 = Set to Defaults
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Starter Display Group (Bulletin 280E/281E only)

Phase A Current Parameter Number 101

This parameter provides the current of Access Rule GET/SET

Phase A measured n increments of Data Type INT
1/10th of an ampere.
Group Starter Display
Units xx.x Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Phase B Current Parameter Number 102

This parameter provides the current of Access Rule GET/SET

Phase B measured in increments of Data Type INT
1/10th of an ampere.
Group Starter Display
Units xx.x Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

Phase C Current Parameter Number 103

This parameter provides the current of Access Rule GET/SET

Phase C measured in increments of Data Type INT
1/10th of an ampere.
Group Starter Display
Units xx.x Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

Average Current Parameter Number 104

This parameter provides the average Access Rule GET/SET

current that is measured in increments of Data Type INT
1/10th of an ampere.
Group Starter Display
Units xx.x Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

Therm Utilized Parameter Number 105

This parameter displays the Access Rule GET/SET

% Thermal Capacity used. Data Type USINT
Group Starter Display
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 147

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Starter Setup Group (Bulletin 280E, 281E only)

FLA Setting Parameter Number 106

The motor’s full load current rating is Access Rule GET/SET

programmed in this parameter. Data Type INT
Group Starter Setup
Units xx.x Amps
Minimum Value See Table 23.
Maximum Value See Table 23.
Default Value See Table 23.

Table 23 - FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values (with indicated setting precision)
FLA Current Range (A)
Default Value
Minimum Value Maximum Value
0.24 1.2 0.24
0.5 2.5 0.5
1.1 5.5 1.1
3.2 16.0 3.2

Overload Class Parameter Number 107

This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET/SET

select the overload class.
1 = Overload Class 10 Data Type USINT
2 = Overload Class 15 Group Starter Setup
3 = Overload Class 20
Units xx.x Amps
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 3
Default Value 1

OL Reset Level Parameter Number 108

This parameter allows the installer select Access Rule GET/SET

the % Thermal Capacity that an overload
can be cleared. Data Type USINT
Group Starter Setup
Units % FLA
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 75

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Bulletin 284E Basic Status Group

Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 1

This parameter provides status of Access Rule GET

hardware inputs. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 15
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
3 2 1 0
— — — X In0
— — X — In1
— X — — In2
X — — — In3

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 149

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

DeviceIn Data Parameter Number 2

This parameter provides status of network Access Rule GET

device inputs. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Pt06DeviceIn
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Pt07DeviceIn
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Pt08DeviceIn
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Pt09DeviceIn
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Pt10DeviceIn
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Pt11DeviceIn
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt12DeviceIn
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt13DeviceIn
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt14DeviceIn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt15DeviceIn

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

DeviceOut Data Parameter Number 3

This parameter provides status of network Access Rule GET

device outputs. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Pt06DeviceOut
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Pt07DeviceOut
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Pt08DeviceOut
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Pt09DeviceOut
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Pt10DeviceOut
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Pt11DeviceOut
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt12DeviceOut
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt13DeviceOut
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Pt14DeviceOut
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 151

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Trip Status Parameter Number 4

This parameter provides trip identification. Access Rule GET

Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Short Circuit
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Overload
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Phase Short
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Ground Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Stall
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Over Current
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — A3 Power Loss
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Internal Comm ➊
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — DC Bus Fault
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — EEprom
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — HW Fault ➊
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Restart Retries
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Misc. Fault ➊

➊ See Parameter 61, Last PR Fault, for details.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Starter Status Parameter Number 5

This parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET

starter. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Ready
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Net Ctl Status
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Net Ref Status
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — At Reference
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — DrvOpto1
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — DrvOpto2
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Keypad Jog
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Keypad Hand
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — HOA Status
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Disconnect Closed
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Contactor 1 ➊
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Contactor 2 ➋

➊ Refers to source brake contactor status

➋ Refers to output contactor status

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 153

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

InternalLinkStat Parameter Number 6

This parameter provides status of the Access Rule GET

internal network connections. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 31
Default Value 0

Bit
Function:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Explicit Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — I/O Connection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Explicit Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — I/O Idle
X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — Reserved

Starter Command Parameter Number 7

The parameter provides the status of the Access Rule GET

starter command. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 255
Default Value 0

Bit
Function:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — X Run Fwd
— — — — — — X — Run Rev
— — — — — X — — Fault Reset
— — — — X — — — Jog Fwd
— — — X — — — — Jog Rev
— — X — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — OutA
X — — — — — — — OutB

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Breaker Type Parameter Number 22

This parameter identifies the Bulletin Access Rule GET

140M used in this product. Data Type BOOL
0 = 140M-D8N-C10
1 = 140M-D8N-C25 Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value —

Base Enclosure Parameter Number 56

Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit Access Rule GET

enclosure rating.
Bit 0 = IP67 Data Type WORD
Bits 1 …15 = Reserved Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value —
Default Value 0

Base Options Parameter Number 57

Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Access Rule GET

Base unit.
Data Type WORD
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 1 = Reserved Group Basic Status
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved Units —
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base Minimum Value 0
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Maximum Value —
Default Value 0

Wiring Options Parameter Number 58

Bit 0 = Conduit Access Rule GET

Bit 1 = Round Media
Bits 2 …15 = Reserved Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value —
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 155

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Starter Enclosure Parameter Number 59

Bit 0 = IP67 Access Rule GET

Bits 1…15 = Reserved
Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value —
Default Value 0

Starter Options Parameter Number 60

Bit 0 = Full Keypad Access Rule GET

Bit 1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = Source Brake Data Type WORD
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = Dynamic Brake Group Basic Status
Bit 5 = Output Contactor
Bit 6 = EMI Filter Units —
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = Fused DynBrake Minimum Value 0
Bit 9…15 = Reserved
Maximum Value 66535
Default Value 0

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Last PR Fault

1 = Hdw Short Ckt

2 = Reserved Parameter Number 61
3 = Motor Overload (PF Fault Code 7)
4 = Drive Overload (PF Fault Code 64)
5 = Phase U to Gnd (PF Fault Code 38)
6 = Phase V to Gnd (PF Fault Code 39)
7 = Phase W to Gnd (PF Fault Code 40)
8 = Phase UV Short (PF4 Fault Code 41) Access Rule GET
9 = Phase UW Short (PF Fault Code 42)
10 = Phase VW Short (PF Fault Code 43)
11 = Ground Fault (PF Fault Code 13)
12 = Stall (PF Fault Code 6)
13 = Control Pwr Loss
14 = Control Pwr Fuse
15 = Input Short Data Type UINT
16 = Output Fuse
17 = Over Temp
18 = Heatsink OvrTmp (PF Fault Code 8)
19 = HW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 12)
20 = SW OverCurrent (PF Fault Code 63)
21 = A3 Power Loss
22 = Internal Comm Group Basic Status
23 = Drive Comm Loss (PF Fault Code 81)
24 = Power Loss (PF Fault Code 3)
25 = Under Voltage (PF Fault Code 4)
26 = Over Voltage (PF Fault Code 5)
27 = MCB EEPROM
28 = Base EEPROM
29 = Drive EEPROM (PF Fault Code 100) Units —
30 = Wrong Base
31 = Fan RPM
32 = Power Unit (PF Fault Code 70)
33 = Drive I/O Brd (PF Fault Code 122)
34 = Restart Retries (PF Fault Code 33)
35 = Drive Aux In Flt (PF Fault Code 2)
36 = Analog Input (PF Fault Code 29) Minimum Value 0
37 = Drv Param Reset (PF Fault Code 48)
38 = SCV Autotune (PF Fault Code 80)
39 = Source Brake
40 = Reserved
41 = DB1 Comm
42 = DB1 Fault Maximum Value 43
43 = DB Switch Short
45 = Incompatible Drive Firmware

Default Value 0

Warning Status Parameter Number 62

This parameter warns the user of a Access Rule GET

condition, without faulting.
Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 157

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Warning ➊
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Phase Loss
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Warning
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Phase Imbalance
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — A3 Power Loss
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Hardware
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Miscellaneous ➋

➊ The warning is triggered simultaneously, the fault is generated. If the fault is disabled a warning will still occur.
➋ Includes DB1 Thermal Warning

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Base Trip Parameter Number 63

The parameter provides the Base Module Access Rule GET

Trip Status. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Bit
Warning
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X EEPROM Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Internal Comm
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Hardware Fault
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Control Module
X X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — Reserved

Produced Assembly Config Group

Int00DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 13

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int00DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 263
Default Value 1

Int01DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 14

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int01DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 263
Default Value 4

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 159

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Int02DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 15

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int02DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 263
Default Value 5

Int03DeviceOut Cfg Parameter Number 16

This parameter is used to specify Access Rule GET/SET

Int03DeviceOut of produced assembly 150 Data Type USINT
or 151.
Group Produced Assembly Config
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 263
Default Value 6

Starter Protection Group

Pr FltResetMode ➊ Parameter Number 23

This parameter is the Protection Fault reset Access Rule GET/SET

mode. Data Type BOOL
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic (Faults are cleared Group Starter Protection
automatically when the fault condition is
corrected.) Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

➊ When “Pr FltReset Mode” is set to 0=manual mode, and Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to allow the drive faults to auto-
reset, the “Pr FltReset Mode” takes precedence. In this case, the ArmorStart will remain faulted until the fault is manually cleared.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Pr Fault Enable Parameter Number 24

This parameter enables the Protection Access Rule GET/SET

Fault by setting the bit to 1.
Data Type WORD
Group Starter Protection
Units —
Minimum Value 64927
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 64927

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Short Circuit ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Overload ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Phase Loss ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Ground Fault ➊
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Stall ➊
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Control Power
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — I/O Fault
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Over Temperature ➊
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Over Current ➊
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — A3 Power Loss
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Internal Comm ➊
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — DC Bus Fault ➊
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — EEprom ➊
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — HW Fault ➊
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Restart Retries ➊
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Misc. Fault ➊

➊ Cannot be disabled

Pr Fault Reset Parameter Number 25

This parameter resets the Protection Fault Access Rule GET/SET

on a transition of 0 > 1. Data Type BOOL
Group Starter Protection
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 161

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Str Net FltState Parameter Number 26

This parameter along with Parameter 27 Access Rule GET/SET

(Str Net FltValue), defines how the starter Data Type BOOL
will respond when a fault occurs as
determined by Parameter 27. Group Starter Protection
0 = Goto Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State Units —
Allows Starter to hold last state or go to
FltValue on NetFaults. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Str Net FltValue Parameter Number 27

This parameter determines how the starter Access Rule GET

will be commanded in the event of a fault. Data Type BOOL
State the Starter
will go to on a Net Flt if Parameter Group Starter Protection
26 (Str Net FltState) = 0 (Goto Fault
Value). Units —
0 = OFF
1 = ON Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Str Net IdlState Parameter Number 28

This parameter along with Parameter 29 Access Rule GET/SET

(Str Net IdlValue), defines how the starter Data Type BOOL
will respond when a network is idle as
determined by Parameter 29. Group Starter Protection
0 = Goto Idle Value
1 = Hold Last State Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Str Net IdlValue Parameter Number 29

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET

starter assumes when the network is idle Data Type BOOL
and Parameter 28 (Str Net IdlState) is set
to “0”. Group Starter Protection
0 = OFF
1 = ON Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

User I/O Configuration Group

Anti-bounce On Delay Parameter Number 30

This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET/SET

program a time duration before being Data Type UINT
reported “ON” (Anti-bouce).
Group User I/O Config.
Units ms
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65
Default Value 0

Anti-bounce OFF Delay Parameter Number 31

This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET/SET

program a time duration before being Data Type UINT
reported “OFF” (Anti-bouce).
Group User I/O Config.
Units ms
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65
Default Value 0

In Sink/Source Parameter Number 32

This parameter allows the installer to Access Rule GET/SET

program the inputs to be sink or source. Data Type BOOL
0 = Sink
1 = Source Group User I/O Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Pr FltState Parameter Number 33

This parameter along with Parameter 34 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutA Pr FltValue), defines how Output A Data Type BOOL
will respond when a trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value Group User I/O Config.
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output A continues to Units —
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes Minimum Value 0
as determined by the setting in Parameter
34. Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 163

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

OutA Pr FltValue Parameter Number 34

This parameter determines the state the Access Rule GET/SET

Output A assumes when a trip occurs and Data Type BOOL
Parameter 33 (OutA Pr FltState) is set to
“0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Net FltState Parameter Number 35

This parameter along with Parameter 36 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutA Net FltValue), defines how Output A Data Type BOOL
will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Net FltValue Group User I/O Config.
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output A will hold state Units —
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output A opens or closes as determined by Minimum Value 0
the setting in Parameter 36.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Net FltValue Parameter Number 36

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output A assumes when a network fault Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 35 (OutA Net
FltState) is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutA Net IdlState Parameter Number 37

This parameter along with Parameter 38 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutA Net IdlValue), defines how Output A Data Type BOOL
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto Net IdlValue Group User I/O Config.
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “0”, Output A opens or closes Units —
as determined by the setting in Parameter
38. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

OutA Net IdlValue Parameter Number 38

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output A assumes when the network is Data Type BOOL
idle and Parameter 37 (OutA Net IdlState)
is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Pr FltState Parameter Number 39

This parameter along with Parameter 40 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutB Pr FltValue), defines how Output B Data Type BOOL
will respond when a protection trip occurs.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value Group User I/O Config.
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “1”, Output B continues to Units —
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes Minimum Value 0
as determined by setting in Parameter 40.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Pr FltValue Parameter Number 40

This parameter determines the state the Access Rule GET/SET

Out B assumes when a protection trip Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr FltState)
is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Net FltState Parameter Number 41

This parameter along with Parameter 42 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutB Net FltValue), defines how Output B Data Type BOOL
will respond when a network fault occurs.
0 = Goto Idle Value Group User I/O Config.
1 = Hold Last State
When set to “1”, Output B will hold state Units —
before trip occurrence. When set to “0”,
Output B opens or closes as determined by Minimum Value 0
setting in Parameter 42.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 165

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

OutB Net FltValue Parameter Number 42

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output B assumes when a network fault Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 41 (OutB Net
FltState) is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Net IdlState Parameter Number 43

This parameter along with Parameter 44 Access Rule GET/SET

(OutB Net IdlValue), defines how Output B Data Type BOOL
will respond when the network is idle.
0 = Goto PrFlt Value Group User I/O Config.
1 = Ignore PrFlt
When set to “0”, Output B opens or closes Units —
as determined by the setting in Parameter
44. Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutB Net IdlValue Parameter Number 44

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Output B assumes when the network is Data Type BOOL
idle and Parameter 43 (OutB Net IdlState)
is set to “0”. Group User I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Miscellaneous Configuration Group

Network Override Parameter Number 8

This parameter allows for the local logic to Access Rule GET/SET
override a Network fault. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
1 = Enable Group Misc. Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Comm Override Parameter Number 9

This parameter allows for local logic to Access Rule GET/SET

override the absence of an I/O connection. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
1 = Enable Group Misc. Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Keypad Mode Parameter Number 45

This parameter selects if the keypad Access Rule GET/SET

operation is maintained or momentary. Data Type BOOL
0 = Maintained
1 = Momentary Group Misc. Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Keypad Disable Parameter Number 46

This parameter disables all keypad Access Rule GET/SET

function except for the “OFF” and “RESET”
buttons. Data Type BOOL
0 = Not Disabled Group Misc. Config.
1 = Disabled
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Set to Defaults Parameter Number 47

This parameter if set to “1” will set the Access Rule GET/SET
device to the factory defaults (but will not Data Type BOOL
cause the ArmorStart to reboot).
0 = No Operation Group Misc. Config.
1 = Set to Defaults
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 167

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Drive I/O Configuration Group (Bulletin 284E only)

Drive Control Parameter Number 48

This parameter provides the status of drive Access Rule GET

parameters. Data Type WORD
Group Drive I/O Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 4095
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — X Accel 1 En
— — — — — — — — — — X — Accel 2 En
— — — — — — — — — X — — Decel 1 En
— — — — — — — — X — — — Decel 2 En
— — — — — — — X — — — — Freq Sel 0
— — — — — — X — — — — — Freq Sel 1
— — — — — X — — — — — — Freq Sel 2
— — — — X — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — X — — — — — — — — Drv In 1
— — X — — — — — — — — — Drv In 2
— X — — — — — — — — — — Drv In 3
X — — — — — — — — — — — Drv In 4

DrvIn Pr FltState Parameter Number 49

This parameter, along with Parameter 50 Access Rule GET/SET

(DrvIn Pr FltValue),, defines how the Drive
Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond when a Data Type BOOL
protection trip occurs. When set to “1”,
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 continue to Group Drive I/O Config.
operate as command via the network.
When set to “0”, Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 Units —
will open or close as determined by setting
in Parameter 50. Minimum Value 0
0 = Go to PrFlt Value
1 = Ignore PrFlt Maximum Value 1

Default Value 0

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

DrvIn Pr FltValue Parameter Number 50

This parameter determines the state of Access Rule GET/SET

Drive Digital Inputs 1…4, assumes when Data Type BOOL
a trip occurs and Parameter 49 (DrvIn Pr
FltState) is set to “0”. Group Drive I/O Config.
0 = Open
1 = Close Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

DrvIn Net FltState Parameter Number 51

This parameter, along with Parameter 52 Access Rule GET/SET

(DrvIn Net FItValue),, defines how the Data Type BOOL
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond
when a network fault occurs. When set to Group Drive I/O Config.
“1”, Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 hold to last
state occurs. When set to “0”, will go to Units —
DrvIn Net FltValue as determined by
Parameter 52. Minimum Value 0
0 = Go to Fault Value
1 = Hold Last State Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

DrvIn Net FItValue Parameter Number 52

This parameter determines the state of Access Rule GET/SET

Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 when a network Data Type BOOL
fault occurs and Parameter 51 (DrvIn Net
FltState) is set to “0”. Group Drive I/O Config.
0 = OFF
1 = ON Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

DrvIn Net IdlState Parameter Number 53

This parameter, along with Parameter 54 Access Rule GET/SET

(DrvIn Net IdlValue),, defines how the Data Type BOOL
Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond
when a network is idle. When set to “1”, Group Drive I/O Config.
hold to last state occurs. When set to “0”,
will go to DrvIn Net IdlState as determined Units —
by Parameter 54.
0 = Go to Fault Value Minimum Value 0
1 = Hold Last State Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 169

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

DrvIn Net IdlValue Parameter Number 54

This parameter determines the state that Access Rule GET/SET

Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 assume when Data Type BOOL
the network is idle and Parameter 53
(DrvIn Net IdlState) is set to “0”. Group Drive I/O Config.
0 = OFF
1 = ON Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Drive Display Group (Bulletin 284E only)

Output Freq Parameter Number 101

Output frequency present at T1, T2, T3. Related Parameters 102, 110, 134, 135, 138
Access Rule GET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0 Hz
Default Value Read Only

Commanded Freq Parameter Number 102

Value of the active frequency command. Related Parameters 101, 113, 134, 135, 138
Displays the commanded frequency even Access Rule GET
if the drive is not running.
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0 Hz
Default Value Read Only

Output Current Parameter Number 103

Output Current present at T1, T2, T3. Access Rule GET

Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 0.01
Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value Read Only

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Output Voltage Parameter Number 104

Output Voltage present at T1, T2, T3. Related Parameters 131, 184, 188
Access Rule GET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 1V AC
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 480V
Default Value Read Only

DC Bus Voltage Parameter Number 105

Present DC Bus voltage level Access Rule GET

Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 1V DC
Minimum Value
Based on Drive Rating
Maximum Value
Default Value Read Only

Drive Status Parameter Number 106

Present operating condition of the drive Related Parameter 195

Bit 0 = Running Access Rule GET
Bit 1 = Forward
Bit 2 = Accelerating Data Type Byte
Bit 3 = Decelerating
Group Drive Display
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value Read Only

Fault 1 Code Parameter Number 107

A code that represents the drive fault. The Access Rule GET
code appears in this parameter as the Data Type UINT
most recent fault that has occurred. (See
Internal Drive Faults in Chapter 10 for Group Drive Display
more information).
Units —
Minimum Value F2
Maximum Value F122
Default Value Read Only

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 171

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Fault 2 Code Parameter Number 108

A code that represents a drive fault. The Access Rule GET

code appears in this parameter as the Data Type UINT
second most recent fault that has
occurred. Group Drive Display
Units —
Minimum Value F2
Maximum Value F122
Default Value Read Only

Fault 3 Code Parameter Number 109

A code that represents a drive fault. The Access Rule GET

code appears in this parameter as the third Data Type UINT
most recent fault that has occurred.
Group Drive Display
Units —
Minimum Value F2
Maximum Value F122
Default Value Read Only

Process Display Parameter Number 110

The output frequency that is scaled by the Related Parameter 101. 199
process factor (Parameter 199). Access Rule GET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units —
Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value Read Only

Control Source Parameter Number 112

Displays the source of the Start Command 136, 138, 151…154 (Digital In x
and Speed Reference. Sel) must be set to Option 4, 169,
Related Parameters
1 = Internal Frequency 170…177 (Preset Freq x),
4 = Preset Freq x 240…247 (StpLogic x)
5 = Network Control Access Rule GET
9 = Jog Freq
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 1
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9
Default Value Read Only

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Contrl In Status Parameter Number 113

Status of control inputs. These can be used Related Parameter 102, 134, 135
in DeviceLogix. Access Rule GET
Bit 0 = Start/Run FWD Input
Bit 1 = Direction/Run REV Input Data Type UINT
Bit 2 = Stop Input
Bit 3 = Dynamic Brake Transistor On Group Drive Display
Units 1
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value Read Only

Dig In Status Parameter Number 114

Status of the control terminal block digital Related Parameter 151…154

inputs: Access Rule GET
Bit 0 = Digital In 1 Sel
Bit 1 = Digital In 2 Sel Data Type UINT
Bit 2 = Digital In 3 Sel
Bit 3 = Digital In 4 Sel Group Drive Display
Units 1
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value Read Only

Comm Status Parameter Number 115

Status of communications ports: Related Parameter 205, 206

Bit 0 = Receiving Data Access Rule GET
Bit 1 = Transmitting Data
Bit 2 = Internal Communications Data Type UINT
Bit 3 = Communication Error
Group Drive Display
Units 1
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value Read Only

Elapsed Run Time Parameter Number 118

Accumulated time drive is outputting Access Rule GET

power. Time is displayed in 10 hour Data Type UINT
increments.
Group Drive Display
Units 1 = 10 hrs
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value Read Only

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 173

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Output Power Parameter Number 122

The output power present at T1, T2, and Access Rule GET
T3. Data Type UINT
Group
Drive Display
Units
Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value Drive rated power X 2
Default Value Read Only

Output Power Fctr Parameter Number 123

The angle in electrical degrees between Access Rule GET

motor voltage and current. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 0.1°
Minimum Value 0.0°
Maximum Value 180.0°
Default Value Read Only

Drive Temp Parameter Number 124

Present operating temperature of the Access Rule GET

drive power section. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 1 °C
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 120
Default Value Read Only

Counter Status Parameter Number 125

The current value of the counter when Access Rule GET

counter is enabled. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 1
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value Read Only

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Timer Status Parameter Number 126

The current value of the timer when timer Access Rule GET
is enabled. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 0.1 sec
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value Read Only

Torque Current Parameter Number 129

The current value of the motor torque Access Rule GET

current. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Display
Units 0.01
Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value Drive Rated Amps x 2
Default Value Read Only

Drive Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only)

Motor NP Volts Parameter Number 131

Related Parameters 104, 184, 185…187
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter. Access Rule GET/SET
Set to the motor nameplate rated volts. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Setup
Units 1V AC
Minimum Value 20
Maximum Value 480V
Default Value Based on Drive Rating

Motor NP Hertz Parameter Number 132

Related Parameters 184, 185…187, and 190
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter. Access Rule GET/SET
Set to the motor nameplate rated Data Type UINT
frequency.
Group Drive Setup
Units 1 Hz
Minimum Value 15
Maximum Value 400
Default Value 60 Hz

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 175

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Motor OL Current Parameter Number 133

Set to the maximum allowable current. 155, 189, 190, 198, 214, 218,
Related Parameter
The drive fault on an F7 260…261
Motor Over load if the value of this Access Rule GET/SET
parameter is exceeded by 150%
for 60 s. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Setup
Units 0.1 A
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value Based on Drive Rating

Minimum Freq Parameter Number 134

Sets the lowest frequency that the drive 101, 102, 113, 135, 185…187,
Related Parameter
will output continuously. 260, 261
Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400
Default Value 0.0

Maximum Freq Parameter Number 135

101, 102, 113, 134, 135, 178,
Related Parameter
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter.
185…187
Access Rule GET/SET
Sets the highest frequency that the drive
will output continuously. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400
Default Value 60.0

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Stop Mode
Parameter Number 137
Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart are the following:
0 = Ramp, CF Ramp to Stop. Stop command clears active fault. Related Parameters 136, 180…182, 205, 260, 261 ➊
1 = Coast, CF Coast to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
2 = DC Brake,CF DC Injection Braking Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
3 = DCBrkAuto, CF DC injection Braking with Auto Shutoff. Access Rule GET/SET
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time) or
Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped. Stop command clears
active fault. Data Type UINT
4 = Ramp, Ramp to Stop
5 = Coast, Coast to Stop Group Drive Setup
6 = DC Brake, DC Injection Braking Stop
7 = DC BrakeAuto, DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 (DC Brake Time) Units —
or
Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded.
8 = Ramp + EM B, CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop command clears Minimum Value 0
active fault. ➊
9 = Ramp + EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. ➊
Maximum Value 9

Default Value 9

➊ See Parameter 155 to set the EM brake actuation condition.

Speed Reference Parameter Number 138

Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 101, 102, 112, 139, 140,
284E ArmorStart are the following: Related Parameters 151…154, 169, 170…177, 232,
1 = Internal Freq 240…247, and 250…257
4 = Preset Freq Access Rule GET/SET
5 = Comm Port
9 = Jog Freq Data Type UINT
Group Drive Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 7
Default Value 5

Accel Time 1 Parameter Number 139

Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed 138, 140, 151…154, 167,
Related Parameters
increases. 170…177, and 240…247
Maximum Freq- = Accel Rate
-------------------------------------
Access Rule GET/SET
Accel Time Data Type UINT
Group Drive Setup
Units 0.1 sec
Minimum Value 0.0 sec
Maximum Value 600.0 sec
Default Value 10.0 sec

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 177

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Decel Time 1 Parameter Number 140

Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed 138, 139, 151…154, 168,
Related Parameters
decreases. 170…177, and 240…247
Maximum Freq- = Decel Rate
-------------------------------------
Access Rule GET/SET
Decel Time Data Type UINT
Group Drive Setup
Units 0.1 sec
Minimum Value 0.1 sec
Maximum Value 600.0 sec
Default Value 10.0 sec

Reset To Defaults Parameter Number 141

Access Rule GET/SET
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter. Data Type BOOL
Resets all parameter values to factory Group Drive Setup
defaults.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default) Units —
1 = Factory Rset Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Motor OL Ret Parameter Number 143

Enables/disables the Motor overload Access Rule GET/SET

Retention function. When Enabled, the Data Type BOOL
value that is held in the motor overload
counter is saved at power-down and Group Drive Setup
restored at power-up. A change to this
parameter setting resets the counter. Units —
0 = Disabled (Default)
1 = Enabled Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Drive Advanced Setup Group (Bulletin 284E only)

Digital In 1 SEL (151) Parameter Number 151…154
Digital In 2 SEL (152)
112, 114, 138…140, 167, 168,
Digital In 3 SEL (153) Related Parameters 170…179, 240…247
Digital In 4 SEL (154)
Access Rule GET/SET

O Stop drive before changing this

parameter.
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Selects the function for the digital inputs.
Units
Minimum Value
See Table 24 for details.
Maximum Value
Default Value

Table 24 - Digital Input Options

Option Name Description
• When active, Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2) and Parameter 168 (Decel Time 2) are used for all ramp rates except Jog.
1 Acc2 & Dec2
• Can only be tied to one input.
• When input is present, drive accelerates according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to the value set in
Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency).
2 Jog • When the input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel).
• A valid Start command will override this input.
Preset Freq
4 (Parameters 151 and See Parameters 170…173 and 174…177.
152 Default)
6 Comm Port This option is the default setting.
7 Clear Fault When active, clears active fault.
8 RampStop,CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
9 CoastStop,CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
10 DCInjStop,CF Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set.
Jog Forward Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes
11 (Parameter 154 inactive. A valid start will override this command.
Default)
Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 (Jog Frequency) according to Parameter 179 (Jog Accel/Decel) and ramps to stop when input becomes
12 Jog Reverse inactive. A valid start will override this command.
16 MOP Up Increases the value of Parameter 169 (Internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.
17 MOP Down Decreases the value of Parameter 169 (Internal Freq) at a rate 2 Hz per second. Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz.
27 ➊ Em Brk Rls If EM Brake function enabled, this input releases the brake. See parameter 155 and set to EM Brk Cntrol (22).
➊ Provides programmable control of Em Brk via digital input (1...4)

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 179

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Relay Out Sel Parameter Number 155

Sets the condition that changes the state Related Parameters 133, 156, 192, 240…247,
of the output relay contacts. 250…257, 260, 261
Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 22
Default Value 22

Table 25 - Options for the Output Relay Contacts

Options Name Description
Relay changes state when power is applied. This indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to shelf state when
0 Ready/Fault (Default) power is removed or a fault occurs.
1 At Frequency Drive reached commanded frequency.
6 Above Freq Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
7 Above Cur Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) Use Parameter 156 to set threshold.
20 ParamControl Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 156 (Relay Out Level) (0 = OFF, 1 = ON).
22 EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized. Program Parameter 260 (EM Brk OFF Delay) and Parameter 261 (EM Brk On Delay) for desired action. ➊

➊ The customer is responsible to make sure the brake release function operates properly and safely.

Relay Out Level Parameter Number 156

Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 155
(Relay Out Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20. Related Parameters 155

Parameters 155 Setting Parameter 156 Min./Max. Access Rule GET/SET

6 0/400 Hz
Data Type UINT
7 0/180%
8 0/815V Group Drive Advanced Setup
10 0/100%
Units 0.1
16 0.1/9999 sec
17 1/9999 counts Minimum Value 0.0

18 1/180°
Maximum Value 9999
20 0/1
Default Value 0.0

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Accel Time 2 Parameter Number 167

When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog. 139, 151…154, 170…177,
Related Parameters 240…247
Maximum Freq- = Accel Rate
-------------------------------------
Accel Time Access Rule GET/SET

Parameter 135
Data Type UINT
(Maximum Freq) Group Drive Advanced Setup

Dec
n
atio

eler
Units 0.1 sec
eler

atio
Speed
Acc

n
Minimum Value 0.0
0
Param. Time Param. Maximum Value 600.0
0 139 or 140 or
167 168
(Accel (Decel Default Value 20.0
Time x) Time x)

Decel Time 2 Parameter Number 168

When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog. 140, 151…154, 170…177,
Related Parameters 240…247
Maximum Freq- = Decel Rate
-------------------------------------
Decel Time Access Rule GET/SET

Parameter 135 Data Type UINT

(Maximum Freq)
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Dec
n
atio

eler

Units 0.1 sec

eler

atio

Speed
Acc

Minimum Value 0.0

0
Param. Time Param.
0 139 or
Maximum Value 600.0
140 or
167 168
(Accel (Decel Default Value 20.0
Time x) Time x)

Internal Freq Parameter Number 169

Provide the frequency command to drive Related Parameters 138

when Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) is Access Rule GET/SET
set to “1” (Internal Freq). When enabled,
this parameter will change the frequency Data Type UINT
command in real time.
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0
Default Value 60.0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 181

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

170 (Preset Freq 0) Parameter Number 170…173, 174…177

171 (Preset Freq 1)
138…140, 151…154, 167, 168,
172 (Preset Freq 2) Related Parameters 240…247, 250…257
173 (Preset Freq 3)
174 (Preset Freq 4) Access Rule GET/SET
175 (Preset Freq 5) Data Type UINT
176 (Preset Freq 6)
177 (Preset Freq 7) Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Provides a fixed frequency command value
when Parameters 151...154 (Digital In x Minimum Value 0.0
Sel) is set to Option 4 (Preset Frequencies).
Maximum Value 400.0
Default Value See Table 26
.

Table 26 - Parameters 170…177 Preset Freq Options

170 Default 0.0 Hz
171 Default 5.0 Hz
172 Default 10.0 Hz
173 Default 20.0 Hz
174 Default 30.0 Hz
175 Default 40.0 Hz
176 Default 50.0 Hz
177 Default 60.0 Hz
Min./Max. 0.0/400.0 Hz
Display 0.1 Hz

Input State of Digital In 1 (I/ Input State of Digital In 2 (I/ Input State of Digital In 3 (I/ Accel/Decel
O Terminal 05 when O Terminal 06 when O Terminal 07 when Frequency Parameter
Parameter 151 = 4) Parameter 152 = 4) Parameter 153 = 4) Source Used ➊
0 0 0 170 (Preset Freq 0) (Accel Time 1)/(Decel Time 1)
1 0 0 171 (Preset Freq 1) (Accel Time 1)/(Decel Time 1)
0 1 0 172 (Preset Freq 2) (Accel Time 2)/(Decel Time 2)
1 1 0 173 (Preset Freq 3) (Accel Time 2)/(Decel Time 2)
0 0 1 174 (Preset Freq 4) (Accel Time 3)/(Decel Time 3)
Input State of Digital In 1 (I/ Input State of Digital In 2 (I/ Input State of Digital In 3 (I/ Accel/Decel
O Terminal 05 when O Terminal 06 when O Terminal 07 when Frequency Parameter
Parameter 151 = 4) Parameter 152 = 4) Parameter 153 = 4) Source Used ➋
1 0 1 175 (Preset Freq 5) (Accel Time 3)/(Decel Time 3)
0 1 1 176 (Preset Freq 6) (Accel Time 4)/(Decel Time 4)
1 1 1 177 (Preset Freq 7) (Accel Time 4)/(Decel Time 4)

➊ When a Digital Input is set to "Accel 2 & Decel 2", and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table.

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Jog Frequency Parameter Number 178

Sets the output frequency when the jog Related Parameters 135, 151…154, 179
command is issued. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0
Default Value 10.0

Jog Accel/Decel Parameter Number 179

Sets the acceleration and deceleration Related Parameters 151…154, 178

time when a jog command is issued. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 sec
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 600.0
Default Value 10.0

DC Brake Time Parameter Number 180

Sets the length of time that DC brake Related Parameters 137, 181
current is injected into the motor. See Access Rule GET/SET
Parameter 181 (DC Brake Level).
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 sec
Minimum Value 0.0
99.9
Maximum Value (Setting of 99.9 = Continuous)
Default Value 0.0

DC Brake Level Parameter Number 181

Defines the maximum DC brake current, in Related Parameters 137, 180

amps, applied to the motor when Access Rule GET/SET
Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to either
"Ramp" or "DC Brake". Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 A
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1.8
Default Value Drive rated amps X 0.05

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 183

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

ATTENTION:
Ramp-to-Stop Mode DC Injection Braking Mode
Voltage

Volts Speed

Volts Speed
Vo [DC Brake Time]
lta Speed

}
ge [DC Brake Time]
Spe

}
ed

} [DC Brake Level]

[DC Brake Level]

Time Time
Stop Command Stop Command

• If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary

mechanical braking device must be used.
• This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors.
Motors may be demagnetized during braking.

DB Resistor Sel Parameter Number 182

Stop drive before changing this parameter. Related Parameters 137

Enables/disables external dynamic braking. Access Rule GET/SET
Setting Min./Max. Data Type UINT
0 Disabled Group Drive Advanced Setup
1 Normal RA Res (5% Duty Cycle) Units 1
2 No Protection (100% Duty Cycle) Minimum Value 0
3…99 x% Duty Cycle Limited (3…99% of Duty Cycle) Maximum Value 99
Default Value 0

S Curve % Parameter Number 183

Sets the percentage of acceleration or Access Rule GET/SET

deceleration time that is applied to ramp Data Type UINT
as S Curve. Time is added, half at the
beginning and half at the end of the ramp. Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 1%
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 0% disabled

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Figure 76 - S Curve

Example: 50% S Curve

Accel Time = 10 Seconds
Target
S Curve Setting = 50%
S Curve Time = 10 x 0.5 = 5 Seconds
Total Time = 10 + 5 = 15 Seconds
Target 2

1/2 S Curve Time Accel Time 1/2 S Curve Time

2.5 Seconds 10 Seconds 2.5 Seconds
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S Curve Time

Boost Select Parameter Number 184

Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter Related Parameters 104, 131, 132, 185…187, 225
131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the Access Rule GET/SET
Volts per Hz curve. Active when Parameter
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz). Drive Data Type UINT
may add additional voltage unless Option
5 is selected. Group Drive Advanced Setup

See Table 27 for details. Units —

Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 14
Default Value 8

Table 27 - Boost Select Options

Options Description
0 Custom V/Hz
1 30.0, VT
Variable Torque
2 35.0, VT (Typical fan/pump curves)
3 40.0, VT
4 45.0, VT
5 0.0 no IR
6 0.0
7 2.5, CT (default for 5 Hp/4.0 kW Drive)
8 5.0, CT (default)
9 7.5, CT
Constant Torque
10 10.0, CT
11 12.5, CT
12 15.0, CT
13 17.5, CT
14 20.0, CT

➊To activate 170 (Preset Freq 0) set 138 (Speed Reference) to "4" (Preset Freq).
➋When a Digital Input is set to "Accel 2 & Decel 2", and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 185

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Figure 77 - Boost Select

100

% P131 [Motor NP Volts]

1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
50
4
3
2
1

[Motor NP Hertz]
1/2
Settings
5-14

0 50 100
% P132 [Motor NP Hertz]

Start Boost Parameter Number 185

Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131, 132, 134, 135, 184,
Related Parameters
131 (Motor NP Volts)) and redefines the 186…188, 225
Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 Access Rule GET/SET
(Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and
Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/ Data Type UINT
Hz)
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 1.1%
Minimum Value 0.0%
Maximum Value 25.0%
Default Value 2.5%

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Figure 78 - Start Boost

Parameter 188 (Maximum Voltage)

Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts)

Voltage
Parameter 186 (Break Voltage)

Parameter 186
(Start Boost)
Parameter 187 (Break Frequency) Parameter 132 (Motor NP Hertz)
Parameter 134 (Minimum Freq) Frequency Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq)

Brake Voltage Parameter Number 186

Sets the frequency where brake voltage is 131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185, 187,
Related Parameters
applied when Parameter 184 (Boost 188, 225
Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter Access Rule GET/SET
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 1.1%
Minimum Value 0.0%
Maximum Value 100.0%
Default Value 25.0%

Brake Frequency Parameter Number 187

Sets the frequency where brake frequency 131, 132, 134, 135, 184, 185, 186,
Related Parameters
is applied when Parameter 184 (Boost 188, 225
Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter Access Rule GET/SET
225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0 Hz
Maximum Value 400.0 Hz
Default Value 15.0 Hz

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 187

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Maximum Voltage Parameter Number 188

Sets the highest voltage that the drive will Related Parameters 104, 185, 186, 187
output. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 1V AC
Minimum Value 20V AC
Maximum Value Drive Rated Volts
Default Value Drive Rated Volts

Current Limit 1 Parameter Number 189

Maximum output current that is allowed Related Parameters 133, 218

before current limiting occurs Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 A
Minimum Value 0.1 A
Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1.8
Default Value Drive rated amps X 1.5

Motor OL Select Parameter Number 190

Drive provides Class 10 motor overload Related Parameters 132, 133

protection. Settings 0…2, select the Access Rule GET/SET
derating factor for I2t overload function.
0 = No Derate Data Type UINT
1 = Min. Derate
2 = Max. Derate Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 1
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 2
Default Value 0

Figure 79 - Overload Trip Curves

No Derate Min Derate Max Derate

100 100 100
% of P133 Motor OL Current

% of P133 Motor OL Current

% of P133 Motor OL Current

80 80 80
60 60 60
40 40 40
20 20 20
0 0 0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz] % of P132 [Motor NP Hertz] % of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]

188 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

PWM Frequency Parameter Number 191

Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM Related Parameters 224
output waveform. The Figure 80 provides Access Rule GET/SET
derating guidelines that are based on the
PWM frequency setting. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.l Hz
Minimum Value 2.0 Hz
Maximum Value 16.0 Hz
Default Value 4.0 Hz

Figure 80 - Derating Guidelines that are Based on the PWM Frequency Setting
100
96
92
88
% Output Current (A)

84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Carrier Frequency (kHz)

Auto Rstrt Tries Parameter Number 192

Set the maximum number of times the Related Parameter 155, 193
drive attempts to reset a fault and restart. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 1
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9
Default Value 0

Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive

1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.

2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 189

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault

without Restarting the Drive
1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.
2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to 0.

ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is
used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering
applicable local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry
guidelines.

Auto Rstrt Delay Parameter Number 193

Sets time between restart attempts when Related Parameters 192

Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to a Access Rule GET/SET
value other than zero.
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 sec
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 300.0 sec
Default Value 1.0 sec

Start at PowerUp Parameter Number 194

Stop drive before changing this parameter. Related Parameters 192

Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to
resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored. Requires a digital input
configured Run or Start and a valid start contact. Access Rule GET/SET
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled Data Type UINT

ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result Group Drive Advanced Setup
if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use
this function without considering applicable local, national, and Units —
international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.
Minimum Value 0

Maximum Value 1

Default Value 0

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Reverse Disable Parameter Number 195

Related Parameters 106
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables the function that allows Access Rule GET/SET
the direction of the motor rotation to be
changed. The reverse command may come Data Type UINT
from a digital command or serial
command. All reverse inputs including Group Drive Advanced Setup
two-wire Run Reverse will be ignored with
reverse disabled. Units —
0 = Disabled Minimum Value 0
1 = Enabled
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Flying Start En Parameter Number 196

Sets the condition that allows the drive to Access Rule GET/SET
reconnect to a spinning motor at actual Data Type UINT
RPM.
0 = Disabled Group Drive Advanced Setup
1 = Enabled
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Compensation
Parameter Number 197
Enables/disables correction options that
may improve problems with motor Access Rule GET/SET
instability,
0 = Disabled
1 = Electrical (Default) Data Type UINT
Some drive/motor combinations have
inherent instabilities that are exhibited as
non-sinusoidal motor currents. This Group Drive Advanced Setup
setting attempts to correct this condition
2 = Mechanical Units —
Some motor/load combinations have
mechanical resonances that can be excited
by the drive current regulator. This setting Minimum Value 0
slows down the current regulator response
and attempts to correct this condition.
3 = Both Maximum Value 3

Default Value 1

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 191

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

SW Current Trip Parameter Number 198

Enables/disables a software instantaneous Related Parameters 133

(within 100 ms) current trip. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 A
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value 0.0 (Disabled)

Process Factor Parameter Number 199

Scales the output frequency value that is Related Parameters 110

displayed by Parameter 110 (Process Access Rule GET/SET
Display).
Output Freq x Process Factor = Process Data Type UINT
Display
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 999.9
Default Value 30.0

Fault Clear Parameter Number 200

Access Rule GET/SET
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue. Data Type UINT
Used primarily to clear a fault over
network communications. Group Drive Advanced Setup
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Reset Fault Units —
2 = Clear Buffer (Parameters 107…109 Minimum Value 0
(Fault x Code))
Maximum Value 2
Default Value 0

Program Lock Parameter Number 201

Protects parameters against change by Access Rule GET/SET

unauthorized personnel. Data Type UINT
0 = Unlocked
1 = Locked Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

192 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Comm Loss Action Parameter Number 205

Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the Related Parameters 115, 137, 206
communication connection or excessive
communication errors.
0 = Fault (Default) Access Rule GET/SET
Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and
coast to stop Data Type UINT
1 = Coast Stop
Stops drive via coast to stop
2 = Stop Group Advanced Program Group
Stops via Parameter 137 (Stop Mode)
setting Units —
3 = Continue Last
Drive continues operating at Minimum Value 0
communication commanded speed that is
saved in RAM.
Maximum Value 3

Default Value 0

Comm Loss Time Parameter Number 206

Sets the time that the drive remains in Related Parameters 115, 205
communication loss before implanting the Access Rule GET/SET
option selected in Parameter 205 (Comm
Loss Action). Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Program Group
Units 0.1 sec
Minimum Value 0.1 sec
Maximum Value 60.0 sec
Default Value 15.0 sec

Slip Hertz @ FLA Parameter Number 214

Compensates for the inherent slip in an Related Parameters 133

induction motor. This frequency is added Access Rule GET/SET
to the commanded output frequency
based on motor current. Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0 Hz
Maximum Value 10.0 Hz
Default Value 2.0 Hz

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 193

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Process Time Lo Parameter Number 215

Scales the time value when the drive is Related Parameters 110, 134
running at Parameter 134 (Minimum Access Rule GET/SET
Freq). When set to a value other than zero,
Parameter 110 (Process Display) indicates Data Type UINT
the duration of the process.
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value 99.99
Default Value 0.00

Process Time Hi Parameter Number 216

Scales the time value when the drive is Related Parameters 110, 135
running at Parameter 135 (Maximum Access Rule GET/SET
Freq). When set to a value other than zero,
Parameter 110 (Process Display) indicates Data Type UINT
the duration of the process.
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 99.99
Default Value 0.00

Bus Reg Mode Parameter Number 217

Enables the bus regulator. Related Parameters —

0 = Disable Access Rule GET/SET
1 = Enabled
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 1

Current Limit 2 Parameter Number 218

Maximum output current that is allowed Related Parameters 133, 151…154, 189
before current limiting occurs. This Access Rule GET/SET
parameter is only active if Parameters
151…154 (Digital In x Sel) is set to Option Data Type UINT
25 (Current Lmt2) and is active.
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 A
Minimum Value 0.0 A
Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 1.8
Default Value Drive rated amps x 1.5

194 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Skip Frequency Parameter Number 219

Sets the frequency at which the drive will Related Parameters 220
not operate. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0 Hz
Default Value 0.0 Hz

Skip Freq Band Parameter Number 220

Determines the band width around Related Parameters 219

Parameter 219 (Skip Frequency). Access Rule GET/SET
Parameter 220 (Skip Freq Band) is split
applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the Data Type UINT
actual skip frequency. A setting of 0.0
disables this parameter. Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 Hz
Minimum Value 0.0 Hz
Maximum Value 30.0 Hz
Default Value 0.0 Hz

Figure 81 - Skip Frequency Band

Frequency Command
Frequency

Drive Output
Frequency

2x Skip
Skip Frequency Frequency Band

Time

Stall Fault Time Parameter Number 221

Sets for the fault time that the drive will Access Rule GET/SET
remain in stall mode before a fault is Data Type UINT
issued.
0 = 60 sec (Default) Group Drive Advanced Setup
1 = 120 sec
2 = 240 sec Units —
3 = 360 sec
4 = 480 sec Minimum Value 0
5 = Flt Disabled Maximum Value 5
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 195

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Var PWM Disable Parameter Number 224

Related Parameters 191
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables a feature that varies the Access Rule GET/SET
carrier frequency for the PWM output
waveform that is defined by Parameter Data Type UINT
191 (PWM Frequency).
0 = Enabled Group Drive Advanced Setup
1 = Disabled
Disabling this feature when low frequency Units —
condition exists may result in IGBT stress Minimum Value 0
and nuisance tripping.
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Torque Perf Mode Parameter Number 225

Related Parameters 184…187, 227
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables sensorless vector control Access Rule GET/SET
operation.
0 = V/Hz Data Type UINT
1 = Sensrls Vect
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 1

196 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Motor NP FLA Parameter Number 226

Set to the motor nameplate full load Related Parameters

amps. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1 A
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2
Default Value Drive rated amps

Autotune
Parameter Number 227
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 (IR Voltage Drop) and Parameter 229 (Flux Related Parameters 225, 226, 228, 229
Current Ref), that affect sensorless vector performance. Parameter 226 (Motor NP FLA) must be set to
the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure.
0 = Ready/Idle (Default)
1 = Static Tune Access Rule GET/SET
2 = Rotate Tune
Ready (0) – Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune.
Static Tune (1) – A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test Data Type UINT
for the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 228 (IR Voltage Drop). A start command is
required within 30 seconds of setting this parameter following initiation of this setting. The
parameter returns to Ready (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to Group Drive Advanced Setup
operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot be uncoupled from the load.
Rotate Tune (2) – A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for
the best possible automatic setting of Parameter 229 (Flux Current Ref). A start command is required Units —
following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to Ready (0) following the test, at which
time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode.
Minimum Value 0

Maximum Value 3

Default Value 0

IMPORTANT Used when motor is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is
coupled to the motor during this procedure. Applies to rotate tune only.

ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this
procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is
recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.

If the Autotune routine fails, an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 197

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

IR Voltage Drop Parameter Number 228

Value of volts dropped across the Related Parameters 227

resistance of the motor stator. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.1V AC
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 230
Default Value Based on Drive Rating

Flux Current Ref Parameter Number 229

Value of amps for full motor flux. Related Parameter 227

Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.01 A
Minimum Value 0.00
Maximum Value Motor NP Volts
Default Value Based on Drive Rating

EM Brk OFF Delay Parameter Number 260

Sets the time that the drive will remain at Related Parameters 134, 137
minimum frequency before ramping to Access Rule GET/SET
the commanded frequency and energizing
the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 Data Type UNIT
(Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.01 sec
Minimum Value 0.01 sec
Maximum Value 10 sec
Default Value 0.0 sec

198 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Figure 82 - EM Brk OFF Delay

Frequency

260 [EM Brk Off Delay] Ram 261 [EM Brk On Delay]

l
cce
pD

pA
ece
l

Ram
Minimum Freq

Time
Start EM Brk Stop EM Brk Drive Stops
Commanded Energized (Off) Commanded De-Energized (On)

EM Brk On Delay Parameter Number 261

Sets the time that the drive will remain at Related Parameters 134, 137
minimum frequency before stopping and Access Rule GET/SET
de-energizing the brake coil relay when
Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to Data Type UNIT
Option 8 or 9.
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.01 sec
Minimum Value 0.01 sec
Maximum Value 10.00 sec
Default Value 0.0 sec

MOP Reset Sel Parameter Number 262

Sets the drive to save the current MOP Related Parameters 169
Reference command. Access Rule Get/Set
0 = Zero MOP Ref
This option clamps Parameter 169 Data Type UINT
(Internal Freq) at 0.0 Hz when drive is not
running. Group Drive Advanced Setup
1 = Save MOP Ref (Default)
Reference is saved in Parameter 169 Units —
(Internal Freq). Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 1

DB Threshold Parameter Number 263

Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Access Rule GET/SET

Dynamic Brake operation. If the DC bus Data Type UINT
voltage falls below the value set in this
parameter, the Dynamic Brake will not Group Drive Advanced Setup
turn on. Lower values will make the
Dynamic Braking function more Units —
responsive, but may result in nuisance
Dynamic Brake activation. Minimum Value 0.0%
Maximum Value 110.0%
Default Value 100%

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 199

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set to a value that
causes the dynamic braking resistor to dissipate excessive power. Parameter settings
less than 100% should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the dynamic brake
resistor’s wattage rating is not exceeded. In general, values less than 90% are not
needed. This parameter’s setting is especially important if Parameter 182 (DB Resistor
Sel) is set to “2” (No Protection).

Comm Write Mode Parameter Number 264

Determines whether parameter changes Access Rule GET/SET

made over communication port are saved Data Type BOOL
and stored in Non-Volatile Storage (NVS)
or RAM only. If they are stored in RAM, the Group Drive Advanced Setup
values will be lost at power-down.
0 = Save (Default) Units —
1 = RAM Only
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. If a controller is programmed to write

parameter data to Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) frequently, the NVS will quickly exceed its
life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Do not create a program that frequently
uses configurable outputs to write parameter data to NVS unless Parameter 264 (Comm
Write Mode) is set to Option 1.

200 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Linear List of Parameters for

Bulletins 280E, 281E, and
284E
Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters
Parameter
Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Controller
1 Hdw Inputs This parameter provides status of hardware inputs. 0 Basic Status Common
2 Network Inputs This parameter provides status of network inputs. 0 Basic Status Common
3 Network Outputs This parameter provides status of network outputs. 0 Basic Status Common
4 Trip Status This parameter provides trip identification. 0 Basic Status Common
5 Starter Status This parameter provides the status of the starter. 0 Basic Status Common
6 InternalLinkStat Status of the internal network connections. 0 Basic Status Common
7 Starter Command The parameter provides the status of the starter command. 0 Basic Status Common
This parameter allows for the local logic to override a
8 Network Override 0 Misc. Configuration Common
Network fault.
This parameter allows for local logic to override an absence of
9 Comm Override 0 Misc. Configuration Common
an I/O connection.
This parameter is used to build bytes 0…1 for produced
13 Prod Assy Word 0 0 Network Configuration Common
assembly 150 or 151.
This parameter is used to build bytes 2…3 for produced
14 Prod Assy Word 1 0 Network Configuration Common
assembly 150 or 151.
This parameter is used to build bytes 4…5 for produced
15 Prod Assy Word 2 0 Network Configuration Common
assembly 150 or 151.
This parameter is used to build bytes 6…7 for produced
16 Prod Assy Word 3 0 Network Configuration Common
assembly 150 or 151.
This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this 0=
22 Breaker Type Basic Status Common
product. 140M-D8N-C10
23 Pr FltReset Mode This parameter configures the Protection Fault reset mode. 0 = Manual Starter Protection Common
This parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit
24 Pr Fault Enable 12419 Starter Protection Common
to 1.
This parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition 0 >
25 Pr Fault Reset 0 Starter Protection Common
1.
This parameter along with Parameter 27 (Str Net FltValue), 0=
26 Str Net FltState defines how the starter will respond when a fault occurs as Starter Protection Common
determined by Parameter 27. Goto Fault Value

This parameter determines how the starter will be

27 Str Net FltValue 0 = OFF Starter Protection Common
commanded in the event of a fault.
0=
28 Str Net IdlState This parameter determines response when Idle fault occurs. Starter Protection Common
Goto Fault Value
This parameter determines the state that starter assumes
29 Str Net IdlValue when the network is idle and Parameter 28 (Str Net IdlState) 0 = OFF Starter Protection Common
is set to “Goto Fault Value”.
This parameter allows the installer to program a time
30 Off-to-On Delay 0 User I/O Configuration Common
duration before being reported ON.
This parameter allows the installer to program a time
31 On-to-Off Delay 0 User I/O Configuration Common
duration before being reported OFF.
This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to
32 In Sink/Source 0 = Sink User I/O Configuration Common
be sink or source.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 201

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters

Parameter
Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Controller
This parameter along with Parameter 34 (OutA Pr FltValue), 0=
33 OutA Pr FltState User I/O Configuration Common
defines how Output A will respond when a trip occurs. Goto PrFlt Value
34 OutA Pr FltValue This parameter determines the state the Output A. 0 = Open User I/O Configuration Common
This parameter along with Parameter 36 (OutA Net FltValue), 0=
35 OutA Net FltState User I/O Configuration Common
defines how Output A will respond. Goto Fault Value
36 OutA Net FltValue This parameter determines the state that Output. 0 = Open User I/O Configuration Common
This parameter along with Parameter 38 (OutA Net IdlValue), 0=
37 OutA Net IdlState User I/O Configuration Common
defines how Output A will respond when the network is idle. Goto Idle Value
This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes
38 OutA Net IdlValue when the network is idle and Parameter 37 (OutA Net 0 = Open User I/O Configuration Common
IdlState) is set to “0”.
This parameter along with Parameter 40 (OutB Pr FltValue), 0=
39 OutB Pr FltState defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip User I/O Configuration Common
Goto PrFlt Value
occurs.
This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when
40 OutB Pr FltValue a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 (OutB Pr FltState) is 0 = Open User I/O Configuration Common
set to “0”.
This parameter along with Parameter 42 (OutB Net FltValue), 0=
41 OutB Net FltState defines how Output B will respond when a network fault User I/O Configuration Common
Goto Idle Value
occurs.
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes
42 OutB Net FltValue when a network fault occurs and Parameter 41 (OutB Net 0 = Open User I/O Configuration Common
FltState) is set to “0”.
This parameter along with Parameter 44 (OutB Net IdlValue), 0=
43 OutB Net IdlState User I/O Configuration Common
defines how Output B will respond when the network is idle. Goto PrFlt Value
This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes
44 OutB Net IdlValue when the network is idle and Parameter 43 (OutB Net 0 = Open User I/O Configuration Common
IdlState) is set to “0”.
This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained
45 Keypad Mode 0 = Maintained Misc. Configuration Common
or momentary.
This parameter disables all keypad function except for the
46 Keypad Disable 0 = Not Disabled Misc. Configuration Common
OFF and RESET buttons.
This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory
47 Set To Defaults 0 = No Operation Misc. Configuration Common
defaults.
48 Drive Control This parameter provides the status of drive parameters. 0 Drive I/O Configuration 284E
This parameter, along with Parameter 50 (DrvIn Pr FltValue), 0=
49 DrvIn Pr FltState defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will respond when Drive I/O Configuration 284E
Go to PrFlt Value
a protection trip occurs.
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs
50 DrvIn Pr FltValue 0 = Open Drive I/O Configuration 284E
1…4, assumes when a trip occurs.
This parameter, along with Parameter 52 (DrvIn Net 0=
51 DrvIn Net FltState FltValue), defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will Drive I/O Configuration 284E
Go to Fault Value
respond when a network fault occurs.
This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs
52 DrvIn Net FltValue 1…4 when a network fault occurs and Parameter 51 (DrvIn 0 = OFF Drive I/O Configuration 284E
Net FltState) is set to “0”.
This parameter, along with Parameter 54 (DrvIn Net 0=
53 DrvIn Net FItState FItValue), defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1…4 will Drive I/O Configuration 284E
Go to Fault Value
respond when a DeviceNet™ network is idle.

202 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters

Parameter
Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Controller
This parameter determines the state that Drive Digital Inputs
54 DrvIn Net FItValue 1…4 assume when the network is idle and Parameter 53 0 = OFF Drive I/O Configuration 284E
(DrvIn Net FItState) is set to “0”.
56 Base Enclosure Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating. 1 Basic Status Common
57 Base Options Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit. 0 Basic Status Common
58 Wiring Options This parameter provides the Wiring Options. 0 Basic Status Common
59 Starter Enclosure This parameter provides the Starter Enclosure. 1 Basic Status Common
60 Starter Options This parameter provides the Starter Options. 0 Basic Status Common
61 Last PR Fault This parameter provides the Last PR Fault. 0 = None Basic Status Common
62 Warning Status This parameter provides the Warning Status. 0 Basic Status Common
63 Base Trip This parameter provides the Base Module Trip Status. 0 Basic Status Common
101 Phase A Current This parameter provides the current of Phase A. 0 Starter Display DOL
102 Phase B Current This parameter provides the current of Phase B. 0 Starter Display DOL
103 Phase C Current This parameter provides the current of Phase C. 0 Starter Display DOL
104 Average Current This parameter provides the average current. 0 Starter Display DOL
105 Therm Utilized This parameter displays the % Thermal Capacity used. 0 Starter Display DOL
106 FLA Setting The motor’s full load current rating See Table 23. Starter Setup DOL
1=
107 Overload Class Selects the overload class. Starter Setup DOL
Overload Class 10
Selects the % Thermal Capacity that an overload can be
108 OL Reset Level 75 Starter Setup DOL
cleared.
101 Output Freq Output frequency present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W) Read Only Drive Display 284E
102 Commanded Freq Value of the active frequency command Read Only Drive Display 284E
103 Output Current Output current present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W) Read Only Drive Display 284E
104 Output Voltage Output voltage present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W) Read Only Drive Display 284E
105 DC Bus Voltage Present DC bus voltage level Read Only Drive Display 284E
106 Drive Status Present operating condition of the drive. Read Only Drive Display 284E
107…109 Fault x Code A code that represents a drive fault. Read Only Drive Display 284E

110 Process Display The output frequency that is scaled by Parameter 199 Read Only Drive Display 284E
(Process Factor).
Displays the source of the Start Command and Speed 5=
112 Control Source Drive Display 284E
Reference. RS485 (DSI) Port
113 Control In Status of control inputs. These can be used in DeviceLogix Read Only Drive Display 284E
114 Dig In Status Status of the control terminal block digital inputs. 0 Drive Display 284E
115 Comm Status Status of the communications ports 0 Drive Display 284E
116 Control SW Ver Main Control Board software version for AC Drive. Read Only Drive Display 284E
118 Elapsed Run Time Accumulated time drive is outputting power. Read Only Drive Display 284E
122 Output Power Output power present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Read Only Drive Display 284E
The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and
123 Output Power Fctr Read Only Drive Display 284E
motor current.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 203

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Table 28 - ArmorStart Parameters

Parameter
Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group Controller
124 Drive Temp Present operating temperature of the drive power section. Read Only Drive Display 284E
125 Counter Status The current value of the counter when counter is enabled. Read Only Drive Display 284E
126 Timer Status The current value of the timer when timer is enabled. Read Only Drive Display 284E
Displays the current value of the motor torque current as
129 Torque Current Read Only Drive Display 284E
measured by the drive.
131 Motor NP Volts Set to the motor name plate rated volts. Based on Drive Rating Drive Setup 284E
132 Motor NP Hertz Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency. 60 Hz Drive Setup 284E
133 Motor OL Current Set to the maximum allowable current. Based on Drive Rating Drive Setup 284E
Sets the lowest frequency that the drive will output
134 Minimum Freq 0.0 Hz Drive Setup 284E
continuously.
Sets the highest frequency that the drive will output
135 Maximum Freq 60 Hz Drive Setup 284E
continuously.
Sets the control scheme that is used to start the Bulletin 284E 5 = Comm Port
136 Start Source Drive Setup 284E
ArmorStart. (RS485 (DSI))
9=
137 Stop Mode Sets the Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart. Drive Setup 284E
Ramp + EM Brk
Sets the Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284E
138 Speed Reference 5 = Comm Port Drive Setup 284E
ArmorStart.
139 Accel Time 1 Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases. 10.0 Secs Drive Setup 284E
140 Decel Time 1 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases. 10.0 Secs Drive Setup 284E
141 Reset To Defaults Used to reset drive to factory default settings 0 = Ready/Idle Drive Setup 284E
143 Motor OL Ret Enables/Disables the Motor Overload Retention function. 0 = Disabled Drive Setup 284E

Table 29 - Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group
Number
Digital In 1 Sel
Digital In 2 Sel
151…154 Selects the function for the digital inputs. See Table 24. Drive Advanced Setup
Digital In 3 Sel
Digital In 4 Sel
0 = Ready/Fault
155 Relay Out Sel Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts. Drive Advanced Setup
See Table 25.
Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter
156 Relay Out Level 0.0 Drive Advanced Setup
155 (Relay Out Sel) is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18, or 20.
Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 (Speed
169 Internal Freq 60.0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup
Reference) is set to “1” (Internal Freq).
Preset Freq 0
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3 Provides a fixed frequency command value when Parameters 151…154
170…177 See Table 26. Drive Advanced Setup
Preset Freq 4 (Digital In x Sel) is set to Option 4 (Preset Frequencies).
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
178 Jog Frequency Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued. 10.0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup

204 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters Chapter 7

Table 29 - Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group
Number
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is
179 Jog Accel/Decel 10.0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup
issued.
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor.
180 DC Brake Time 0.0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup
See Parameter 181 (DC Brake Level).
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor Drive Rated Amps x
181 DC Brake Level Drive Advanced Setup
when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to either Ramp or DC Brake. 0.05
182 DB Resistor Sel Used to set percent duty cycle for external dynamic braking. 0 = Disabled Drive Advanced Setup
Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to
183 S Curve % ramp as S Curve. Time is added, half at the beginning and half at the end 0% (Disabled) Drive Advanced Setup
of the ramp.
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts))
and redefines the Volts per Hz curve. Active when Parameter 225 (Torque 8 = 5.0 (2.5 for 5 Hp
184 Boost Select Drive Advanced Setup
Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz). Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 drives)
is selected.
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 131 (Motor NP Volts))
185 Start Boost and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 (Boost Select) 2.5% Drive Advanced Setup
= 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
Sets the frequency where brake voltage is applied when Parameter 184
186 Brake Voltage (Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) 25.0% Drive Advanced Setup
= 0 (V/Hz).
Sets the frequency where brake frequency is applied when Parameter
187 Brake Frequency 184 (Boost Select) = 0 (Custom V/Hz) and Parameter 225 (Torque Perf 15.0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup
Mode) = 0 (V/Hz).
188 Maximum Voltage Sets the highest voltage that the drive will output. Drive Rated Volts Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Rated Amps x
189 Current Limit 1 Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs. Drive Advanced Setup
1.5
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Setting 0…2 select
190 Motor OL Select 0 = No Derate Drive Advanced Setup
the derating factor for I2t overload function.
Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform.
191 PWM Frequency Figure 80 provides derating guidelines that are based on the PWM 4.0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup
frequency setting.
Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault
192 Auto Rstrt Tries 0 Drive Advanced Setup
and restart.
Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt
193 Auto Rstrt Delay 1.0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup
Tries) is set to a value other than zero.
Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to
194 Start At PowerUp automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed 0 = Disabled Drive Advanced Setup
after the drive input is restored.
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of the motor
195 Reverse Disable 0 = Disabled Drive Advanced Setup
rotation to be changed.
Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor
196 Flying Start En 0 = Disabled Drive Advanced Setup
at actual RPM.
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with
197 Compensation 1 = Electrical Drive Advanced Setup
motor instability.
198 SW Current Trip Enables/disables a software instantaneous (within 100 ms) current trip. 0.0 (Disabled) Drive Advanced Setup
Scales the output frequency value that is displayed by Parameter 110
199 Process Factor 30.0 Drive Advanced Setup
(Process Display).
200 Fault Clear Resets a fault and clears the fault queue. 0 = Ready/Idle Drive Advanced Setup
201 Program Lock Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel. 0 = Unlocked Drive Advanced Setup

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 205

Chapter 7 Bulletin 280E/281E/284E Programmable Parameters

Table 29 - Bulletin 284E Advance Setup Parameter Descriptions

Parameter Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group
Number
Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the communication connection or
205 Comm Loss Action 0 = Fault Drive Advanced Setup
excessive communication errors.
Sets the time that the drive remains in communication loss before
206 Comm Loss Time 15.0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup
implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).
Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency
214 Slip Hertz @ FLA 2.0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup
is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current.
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134
215 Process Time Lo (Minimum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110 0.00 Drive Advanced Setup
(Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135
216 Process Time Hi (Maximum Freq). When set to a value other than zero, Parameter 110 0.00 Drive Advanced Setup
(Process Display) indicates the duration of the process.
217 Bus Reg Mode Enables the bus regulator. 1 = Enabled Drive Advanced Setup
Drive Rated
218 Current Limit 2 Maximum output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs. Drive Advanced Setup
Amps x 1.5
219 Skip Frequency Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate. 0.0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup
Determines the brand width around Parameter 219 (Skip Frequency).
220 Skip Freq Band Parameter 220 (Skip Freq Band) is split applying 1/2 above and 1/2 0.0 Hz Drive Advanced Setup
below the actual skip frequency.
Sets for the fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a
221 Stall Fault Time 0 = 60 Seconds Drive Advanced Setup
fault is issued.
Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM
224 Var PWM Disable 0 = Enabled Drive Advanced Setup
output waveform that is defined by Parameter 191 (PWM Frequency).
225 Torque Perf Mode Enables/disables sensorless vector control operation. 1 = Sensrls Vect Drive Advanced Setup
226 Motor NP FLA Set to the motor nameplate full load amps. Drive Rated Amps Drive Advanced Setup
Provides an automatic method for setting Parameter 228 (IR Voltage
227 Autotune Drop) and Parameter 229 (Flux Current Ref), that affect sensorless vector 0 = Ready/Idle Drive Advanced Setup
performance.
Based on Drive
228 IR Voltage Drop Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator. Drive Advanced Setup
Rating
Based on Drive
229 Flux Current Ref Value of amps for full motor flux. Drive Advanced Setup
Rating
Sets the time that the drive will remain at minimum frequency before
260 EM Brk OFF Delay ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil 0.0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup
relay when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
Sets the time that the drive will remain at minimum frequency before
261 EM Brk On Delay stopping and de-energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 0.0 Secs Drive Advanced Setup
(Stop Mode) is set to Option 8 or 9.
262 MOP Reset Sel Sets the drive to save the current MOP Reference command. 1 = Save MOP Ref Drive Advanced Setup
263 DB Threshold Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation. 100% Drive Advanced Setup
Determines whether parameter changes made over the communication
264 Comm Write Mode 0 = Save Drive Advanced Setup
port are saved and stored in Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) or RAM only.

206 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Chapter 8

How to Configure an Explicit Message

Programming ControlLogix Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix

Explicit Message
In the ControlLogix® platform, explicit messaging can be done easily from within
a logic program. The request and response is configured within the MSG
function. The MSG function can be found in the Input/Output tab of
RSLogix 5000.

Setting Up the MSG Instruction

A tag name must be given to the MSG function before the rest of the information
can be defined. In this example, a tag was created with the name explicit_mess.
After the instruction has been named, click the gray box to define the rest of
the instruction.

Figure 83 - MSG Function Found in the Input/Output Tab

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 207

Chapter 8 How to Configure an Explicit Message

Formatting an Explicit ControlLogix scanners and bridges accommodate both downloading Explicit
Message Requests and uploading Explicit Message Responses. The message
Message format is shown in Figure 84.

Figure 84 - ControlLogix Message Format in RSLogix 5000

Box Description
➊ Message Type
The message type is usually CIP Generic.
➋ Service Type
The service type indicates the service (for example, Get Attribute Single or Set Attribute Single) that you
want to perform.
➌ Service Code
The service code is the code for the requested EtherNet/IP service. This value changes based on the Service
Type that has been selected. In most cases, this is a read-only box.
If you select “Custom” in the Service Type box, then you need to specify a service code in this box (for
example, 4B for a Get Attributes Scattered service or 4C for a Set Attributes Scattered service).
➍ Class
The class is an EtherNet/IP class.
➎ Instance
The instance is an instance (or object) of an EtherNet/IP class.
➏ Attribute
The attribute is a class or instance attribute.
➐ Source Element
This box contains the name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the
module and drive.

208 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 How to Configure an Explicit Message Chapter 8

Box Description
➑ Source Length
This box contains the number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message.
➒ Destination
This box contains the name of the tag that receives service response data from the module and drive.
➓ Path
The path is the route that the message follow.s
Note: Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of a module that you previously mapped.
Name
The name for the message.

Performing Explicit
Messages IMPORTANT There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process that is defined below. The
details of each step vary depending on the controller. See the documentation for your
controller.

Figure 85 - Explicit Message Process

Box Description
➊ Format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message Request to the
scanner or bridge module (download).
➋ The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the
EtherNet/IP network.
➌ The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner. The data is stored in the
scanner buffer.
➍ The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner’s buffer (upload).

➎ The Explicit Message is complete.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 209

Chapter 8 How to Configure an Explicit Message

The MSG (message) instruction handles all explicit messaging that is initiated by
a Logix Controller program.

It automatically creates and manages TCP connections and CIP encapsulation

sessions. The user has no direct influence on this process.

Figure 86 - Example — Message Configuration Tab

The Class, Instance, and Attribute define the actual information being requested.
Additional configurations of these parameters can be found in Chapter B.

210 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 9

Diagnostics

Overview This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur.

Protection Programming
Many of the protective features available with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor
Controller can be enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters
provided. For further details on programming, see Chapter 7, Bulletin 280E/
281E/284E Programmable Parameters.

Fault Display The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller comes equipped with a built-in
LED status indication that provides four status LEDs and a Reset button.

Figure 87 - LED Status Indication and Reset

Clear Fault You may clear a fault using the following methods:

• Remotely via network communications

A remote reset is attempted upon detection of a rising edge (0 to 1

transition) of the “Fault Reset” bit in the various I/O assemblies. A remote
reset is also attempted upon detection of the rising edge of the “Fault
Reset” parameter.

• Locally via the “Reset” button on the LED Status indication keypad.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 211

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

Fault Codes Table 30 provides a reference of the Fault LED indications for Bulletin 280E,
281E, and Bulletin 284E Distributed Motor Controllers.

Table 30 - Fault Indication

Fault Types
Blink Pattern
Bulletin 280E/281E Bulletin 284E
1 Short Circuit Short Circuit
2 Overload Trip Overload Trip
3 Phase Loss Phase Short
4 Reserved Ground Fault
5 Reserved Stall
6 Control Power Control Power
7 I/O Fault I/O Fault
8 Over Temperature Over Temperature
9 Phase Imbalance Over Current
10 A3 Power Loss A3 Power Loss
11 Reserved Internal Communications
12 Reserved DC Bus Fault
13 EEPROM Fault EEPROM Fault
14 Hardware Fault Hardware Fault
15 Reserved Restart Retries
16 Reserved Misc. Fault

Fault Definitions Short Circuit

Short Circuit indicates that the Bulletin 140M motor protector has tripped, or
that the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current
surge. This fault cannot be disabled.

Overload Trip

The load has drawn excessive current and based on the overload trip class that is
selected, the device has tripped. This fault cannot be disabled.

When using Bulletin 280, 281 with a mechanical motor brake actuator
connected to motor out leads, care must be taken with 1 Hp (0.73 kW) or smaller
loads as the current is elevated in those legs that influence the electronic overload
and may cause nuisance phase imbalance or overload faults. An adjustment to the
full load amps (FLA) setting to offset this additional current may be necessary.

212 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

Phase Loss

Indicates a missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by
default.

Phase Short

Indicates the drive has detected a phase short. This fault cannot be disabled.

Ground Fault

Indicates the drive has detected a ground fault. This fault cannot be disabled.

Stall

Indicates the drive has detected a stall condition, indicating the motor has not
reached full speed. This fault cannot be disabled.

Control Power

Indicates a loss of control power voltage or a blown control power circuit. This
fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.

I/O Fault

This error can indicate a shorted sensor, shorted input device, or input wiring
mistakes. It can also indicate a blown output fuse. This fault can be disabled and is
disabled by default.

Over Temperature

Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded. This fault cannot be
disabled.

Phase Imbalance

Indicates an imbalance supply voltage. This fault can be disabled and is disabled
by default.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 213

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

Over Current

Indicates the drive has detected an over current fault. This fault cannot be
disabled.

A3 Power Loss

Power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold. This fault can be
disabled and is disabled by default.

Internal Communication Fault

Indicates an internal communication fault has been detected. This fault cannot
be disabled.

DC Bus Fault
Indicates the drive has detected a DC Bus Fault. This fault cannot be disabled.

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EEPROM Fault

This is a major fault, that renders the ArmorStart inoperable. This fault cannot be
disabled.

Hardware Fault

This indicates an Internal FAN RPM is low, Internal temperature monitor

failure, Internal Brake fuse opened, or incorrect base or control module. This
fault cannot be disabled.

Restart Retries

This fault is generated when the drive detects that the auto retries count has been
exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled.

214 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

Miscellaneous Faults

For Bulletin 284E units, this fault is actually the logical of several drive faults not
specifically enumerated. This includes DB1 Brake fault, Heatsink Over
Temperature (fault code F8), Params Defaulted fault (fault code F48), and SVC
Autotune fault (fault code F80).

This fault cannot be disabled.

EtherNet/IP LED Status EtherNet/IP LED status and diagnostics consists of four LEDs.
Indication • Link Activity/Status LEDS
Figure 88 - EtherNet/IP LED
– Link1 Activity/Status (Port 1) – LED Color: Bicolor (Green/Yellow).
see Table 31

– Link2 Activity/Status (Port 2) – LED Color: Bicolor (Green/Yellow).

see Table 31

• “MOD” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Module

status, see Table 32

• “NET” LED – Bicolor Red/Green represents the Ethernet Network

status, see Table 34

Table 31 - Link 1 or Link 2 Port Activity/Status

Link 1 or 2 Status LED Description Recommended Action
OFF No link established Verify network cabling, and correct, as needed.
Green Link established at 100 Mbps None
Flashing green Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps None
Yellow Link established at 10 Mbps None
Flashing yellow Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps None

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 215

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

Table 32 - Module Status Indicator

MOD Status LED Summary Requirement
Steady OFF No power If no power is supplied to the device, the module status indicator shall be steady OFF.
Steady Green Device operational If the device is operating correctly and the PLC is in Run mode, the module status
indicator shall be steady green.
Flashing Green Standby If the device has not been configured or the PLC is not in Run mode, the module status
indicator shall be flashing green.
Flashing Red Minor fault If the device has detected a recoverable minor fault, the module status indicator shall
be flashing red.
Note: An incorrect or inconsistent configuration would be considered a minor fault.
Steady Red Major fault If the device has detected a non-recoverable major fault, see Table 33.
Flashing Green/Red Self-test While the device is performing its power up testing, the module status indicator shall
be flashing green/red.

See Parameter 63 “Base Trip” for the Base Module Trip Status.

Table 33 - “Steady Red” MOD LED Status (See Table 32.)

Fault Type Description
0 EEPROM Fault Non-volatile memory value out of range for a local parameter, or a write failure is detected. This fault is also reflected
by a solid red MOD status LED.
1 Internal Comm2 The Internal communication connection has timed out. This fault is also reflected by a flashing red MOD status LED.
2 Hardware Fault Internal diagnostics checks failed. This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED.
3 Control Module An illegal or unsupported Control Module product code or revision has been detected. Also reported if no Control
Module is detected on power up. This fault is also reflected by a solid red MOD status LED.
4…15 Reserved Reserved

Table 34 - Network Status Indicator

Indicator State Summary Requirement
Steady OFF Not powered, no IP address If the device does not have an IP address (or is powered OFF), the network status
indicator shall be steady OFF.
Flashing Green No connections If the device has no established connections, but has obtained an IP address, the
network status indicator shall be flashing green.
Steady Green Connected If the device has at least one established connection (even to the Message Router),
the network status indicator shall be steady green.
Flashing Red Connection timeout If one or more of the connections in which this device is the target has timed out,
the network status indicator shall be flashing red. This shall be left if only all timed
out connections are re-established or if the device is reset.
Steady Red Duplicate IP If the device has detected that the IP address is already in use, the network status
indicator shall be steady red.
Flashing Red/Green Self-test While the device is performing its power up testing, the network status indicator
shall be flashing green/red.

216 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

Control Module LED The Control Module LED status and diagnostics consists of four status LEDs
and a Reset button. The following is a brief explanation of the operation of each
Status and Reset LED found on the Control Module.
Figure 89 - LED Status
Indication and Reset Table 35 - Control Module LED Status Indication
LED Definition Recommended Action
Power This LED is illuminated solid green when switched Verify 24V DC is present on A1 and A2. Check if the
control power is present and with the proper local disconnect is in the OFF position.
polarity.
Run This LED is illuminated solid green when a start Verify 24V DC is present on A1 and A3. Check if the
command and control power is present. user is properly commanding to RUN via Instance
162 or 166.
Network This bicolor LED is used to indicate the status of the See Table 34, Network Status Indicator table above
internal network connection. for additional information.
Fault This LED is used to indicate the fault status of the See Table 36 and Table 37 below for additional
ArmorStart. When the unit is faulted, the unit information.
responds with a specific blink pattern to identify
the fault.

The “Reset Button” is a local trip reset.

Control Module Fault The PrFlt Reset Mode (Parameter 23) determines how a fault is reset. When this
parameter is set to the value 0 = manual mode, a local or remote fault reset is
LED Indications needed to reset the fault. When this parameter is set to the value 1 = auto reset,
faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away. Referring to
Table 37 for the 284, in addition to the “Pr FltReset Mode” the Auto Rstrt Tries
(Parameter 192) must be set greater than 0.

NOTE: The “Pr FltReset Mode” parameter takes precedence. Therefore if P23 is
set to manual, changing P192 to a value greater than 0 has no effect.

Table 36 - Fault LED Indicators for Bulletin 280E/281E

Blink Auto- Bulletin 280E/281E Trip
Pattern Resettable Status Description Action
1 No Short Circuit The circuit breaker (140M) has tripped. Determine cause of trip. Try to reset the circuit breaker
using the disconnect handle. If the conditions continue,
check power wiring or replace based module. This cannot
be disabled.
2 Yes Overload The load has drawn excessive current and based on the Verify that the load is operating correctly and the
trip class that is selected, the device has tripped. ArmorStart is properly set-up. The fault cannot be
disabled. If there is an EM brake on the motor check if the
brake current is a significant percentage compare to the
FLA. Adjust FLA to compensate for the brake current.
3 Yes Phase Loss The ArmorStart has detected a missing phase. Verify that 3-phase voltage is present at the line side
connections. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by
default.
4 — Reserved Not Used —
5 — Reserved Not Used —

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 217

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

Table 36 - Fault LED Indicators for Bulletin 280E/281E

Blink Auto- Bulletin 280E/281E Trip
Pattern Resettable Status Description Action
6 Yes Control Pwr Loss (Switched The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/A2
Power) voltage. terminal). Also, check and replace the control voltage
fuse, if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is
disabled by default.
7 Yes Input Fault This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input Correct, isolate, or remove wiring error before restarting
device, wiring input mistakes, or a blown output fuse. the system. This fault can be disabled and is disabled by
default.
8 Yes Over Temperature This fault is generated when the operating temperature Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that
has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled. ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F). 1.
Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
9 Yes Phase Imbalance The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance. Check the power system and correct if necessary. This
fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
10 Yes Control Power (24V DC) Lost The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold. Check the state of the network power supply (A3/A1
(Unswitched Power) terminal) and look for media problems. This fault can be
disabled and is disabled by default.
11 — Reserved Not Used —
12 — Reserved Not Used —
13 No EEprom This is a major fault, that renders the ArmorStart If the fault was initiated by a transient, power cycling
inoperable. Possible causes of this fault are transients should clear the problem, otherwise replacement of the
that are induced during EEprom storage routines. ArmorStart may be required. This fault cannot be
disabled.
14 No Hdw Flt This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem Check for a base/starter module mismatch. If no
exists. mismatch exists, refer to parameter 61 for additional
fault detail. The ArmorStart may need to be replaced if
the fault persists.(Hdw Flt is the factory-enabled default
setting.) This fault cannot be disabled.
15 — Reserved Not Used —
16 — Reserved Not Used —

Table 37 - Fault LED Indicators for 284E

Bit/Blink Auto-
Pattern Resettable ➊ 284E Trip Status Description Action
1 No Short Circuit The circuit breaker (140M) has tripped. Determine cause of trip. Try to reset the circuit breaker
using the disconnect handle. If the conditions continue,
check power wiring or replace based module. This cannot
be disabled.
2 Drive Controlled Overload An excessive motor load exists 1. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed
(Drive Codes 7 and 64) the current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current).
2. Verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting.
3. Drive rating of 150% for 1 minute.
4. Reduce load or extend Accel Time two hundred
percent or when 3 seconds has been exceeded.
3 Drive Controlled Phase Short 1. Phase U, V, or W to Gnd. A phase to ground fault has Check the wiring between the drive and motor. Check
(Drive Codes 38…43) been detected between the drive and motor in this motor for grounded phase. Check the motor and drive
phase. output terminal wiring for a shorted condition. Replace
2. Phase UV, UW, or VW Short. Excessive current has been drive if fault cannot be cleared.
detected between these two output terminals.
4 Drive Controlled Ground Fault A current path to earth ground has been detected at one Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output
(Drive Code 13) or more of the drive output terminals. terminals for a grounded condition.
5 Drive Controlled Stall Drive is unable to accelerate motor. Increase Parameters 139…167 (Accel Time x) or reduce
(Drive Code 6) load so drive output current does not exceed the current
set by Parameter 189 (Current Limit 1).

218 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

Table 37 - Fault LED Indicators for 284E

Bit/Blink Auto-
Pattern Resettable ➊ 284E Trip Status Description Action
6 Parameter 23 Control Pwr Loss The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/A2
(PrFlt Reset (Switched Power) voltage. terminal). Also, check and replace the control voltage
Mode) fuse, if necessary. This fault can be disabled and is
disabled by default.
7 Parameter 23 Input Fault This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input If this fault occurs, the offending problem should be
(PrFlt Reset device, wiring input mistakes, or a blown output fuse. isolated or removed before restarting the system. This
Mode) fault can be disabled and is disabled by default.
8 Parameter 23 Over Temperature This fault is generated when the operating temperature Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that
(PrFlt Reset has been exceeded. This fault cannot be disabled. ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F).
Mode) 1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
9 Drive Controlled Over Current The drive output current has exceeded the hardware Check programming. Check for excess load, improper
(Drive Codes 12 and 63) current limit. Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting. DC brake volts set
too high or other causes of excess current. Parameter 198
(SW Current Trip) has been exceeded, check load
requirements and Parameter 198 setting.
10 Parameter 23 Control Power (24V DC) The 24V DC power supply is below tolerance threshold. Check the state of the network power supply (A3/A1
(PrFlt Reset Lost (Unswitched Power) terminal) and look for media problems. This fault can be
Mode) disabled and is disabled by default.
11 No Internal Comm Communication with either the control module (VFD) or See section Fault 11 Detail. If the problem persists
(See Parameter 61 for Control module has stopped. replace the unit.
details on this fault. F81 is
a VFD fault. This could also
happen if control power is
lost.)
12 Drive Controlled DC Bus Fault Power Loss - DC bus voltage remained below 85% of Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line
(Drive Codes Reference 3, nominal. UnderVoltage - DC but voltage fell below the power interruption. Check the input fuses. Monitor the
4 and 5) minimum value. OverVoltage - DC bus voltage exceeded AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus
maximum value. overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration.
Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option.
13 No EEprom The checksum read from the board does not match the Set Parameter 141 (Reset to Defaults) to Option 1 “Reset
(PF Drive Code Reference checksum that is calculated. Defaults”.
100)
14 No Hdw Flt (PF Drive Codes Failure has been detected in the drive power section or 1. Cycle power.
Reference 70 and 122) drive control and I/O section. See Last Protection Fault 2. If Fan RPM fault, replace the fan.
parameter 61 for details. 3. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared.
15 Drive Controlled Restart Retries (PF Drive Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
Code Reference 33) resume running for the programmed number of
Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries).
16 Drive Controlled Misc. Fault (PF Drive Code Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value. The Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that
Reference 2, 8, 29, 48 and drive was commanded to write default values to EEprom. ambient temperature has not exceeded 40 °C (104 °F)
80) The autotune function was either cancelled by the user or and mounted properly.
failed. If DB1 option is installed see P61 for additional 1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
diagnostics. 2. Program the drive parameters as needed. Restart
procedure.
3. Check for DB1 fault and see DB1 diagnostics.

➊ When "Drive Controlled", see Internal Drive Faults see Table 39 for details regarding which drive faults can be auto reset.

Fault 11 Detail Parameter 61 provides a more granular description of the faults that occur.
• An F11 protection fault indicates that the internal communication has
stopped
• There is a 10 second delay before an F11 Internal Comm. fault is present

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 219

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

• Common causes of an Internal Comm. fault:

– The local ArmorStart Disconnect switch is in the OFF position.
– 3-Phase line power feeding the ArmorStart is not connected or is
turned OFF.
– Switched Control Power is not connected or is turned OFF.
– Poor power quality (Brown Out)
• First things to check:
– Verify that the local disconnect is in the ON position.
– Verify that the unit has 3-Phase Line Voltage present and it is within
specified tolerances.
– Verify that the ArmorStart unit has Control Voltage present and it is
within specified tolerances.
– Attempt to clear the fault by pressing the local reset or sending the
ArmorStart a network reset.
– Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit and try to clear the fault again.
• If an Internal Comm. fault persists, see Parameter 61 – LastPR Fault for
additional details on the last protection fault. See the following table for
troubleshooting information that is based on what Parameter 61 returns.
Also see Parameters 107…109 to get the VFD fault code that can be
referenced below.

Parameter 61 Fault Code Description Recommended Action

13 = Control Power Loss Control power was lost or dipped below the lower • Check that control power is turned on and within specified tolerances.
threshold long enough to cause the Internal Comm. fault. • Check the Control Power fuse, replace if necessary.
• Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once control power
is restored.
14 = Control Power Fuse The control power fuse has blown and the control power • Additional investigation as to why the fuse blew is needed. Take
circuit no longer is a closed circuit. corrective action accordingly.
• Replace the fuse and reset the ArmorStart either locally or over the
network.
21 = A3 Power Loss Unswitched (A3/A2) control power was lost or dipped • Check that the A3 or DNet power terminal does not have any loose
below the lower threshold long enough to cause the connections.
Internal Comm. fault. • Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset once the
• DeviceNet power loss unswitched control power is restored
22 = Internal Comm • The ArmorStart's MCB lost communications with the • Check that the local disconnect is in the ON position.
24 = Power Loss (3-Phase) VFD. This is most likely due to a loss of 3-phase power. • Check for a power quality issue, take appropriate corrective actions.
25 = Under Voltage (3-Phase) • PF Fault Code 3 or 4 • Check that 3-phase power is present.
• Press the local reset or send the unit anetwork reset
23 = Drive Comm Loss (PF Fault Code 81) The PowerFlex VFD lost communications with the MCB. • Check that control power and the network power are both present.
This is most likely due to a loss of control power or • Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset.
network power.
28 = Base EEPROM The MCB can't read the base module's EEPROM or isn't • Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit.
communicating correctly with the base module. In the • Verify that the control module is seated correctly in the base module
EtherNet/IP units, Parameter 63 – Base Trip provides • Check the connector on the control module for bent or broken pins
more detail as to why the base module may not be
communicating properly with the control module
41 = DB1 Comm The MCB has lost communications with the Dynamic • Press the local reset or send the unit a network reset
Brake (DB1) board or the EEPROM on the DB1 board may • Cycle power to the ArmorStart unit.
be corrupt.

220 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

Resetting Device to To factory reset the base and control module see parameter 47 “Set to Defaults”.
To reset only the VFD in the control module for Bulletin 284 see Parameter 141
Factory Defaults “Reset To Defaults”. Both these resets are limited and do not put the product
completely in the “out of box” configuration. The Type 1 Reset performs a full
product reset to the “out of box” status.
SERVICE CODE 0X05
Class Code 0x0001
INSTANCE 1
Data (USINT) 1

You need to perform a Type 1 Reset if the login and password for the product is
lost and forgotten.

WARNING: A Type 1 Reset causes all parameters and web page login to revert to their
factory defaults. No user date is saved.

WARNING: A Type 1 Reset should only be executed when necessary or when the login
and password must be cleared and set to the factory default setting.

In the following example, Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 PLC

programming software is used to create a Type 1 Reset. Other tools can be used,
provided the class, instance, and attribute values can be sent to the product’s
identify object.

1. Within RSLogix 5000, from the File menu, choose New to create a new
project. Make sure that the project is offline.
2. If an Add-On-Profile (AOP) window is open, click Cancel to close it at the
bottom of the AOP screen.
3. Close any internet browser windows, including Internet Explorer, that are
being used to view the ArmorStart web browser.

IMPORTANT For those using an Internet Browser with multiple tabs open, you need to close the
entire browser window, not just the tab within the ArmorStart browser.

4. Unplug any inputs and outputs that are connected to the ArmorStart unit.

WARNING: A Type 1 Reset cannot be done if there is an I/O device plugged into the
product port. This may cause an unsafe state to occur in the ArmorStart or the
environment around the ArmorStart.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 221

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

5. Create a new Controller Tag of data type DINT and enter a value of 1.
a. Double click Controller Tags in the Controller Organizer.

b. Select Edit Tags at the bottom of the tag list screen.

c. Create another new tag, the example that is used below is named
Data1.

d. To assign Data1 a value of 1, click Monitor Tags tab and enter a 1 in the
Value field.

e. Create a tag for reset input.

1. Double click Program Tags in the Controller Organizer

2. Select Edit Tags at the bottom of the screen and create a tag
named Reset of the type BOOL (Boolean).

6. Create a rung in ladder logic for executing the Type 1 Reset.

a. Add an XIC Input and assign it the BOOL tag Reset.

222 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

b. Add a Message (MSG) instruction that will be used to execute the reset.
The message instruction can be found in the Input/Output instruction
set tab.

c. The completed rung should look like the one below.

7. Configure the message instruction:

a. Begin by double-clicking the tag name field and entering AS_Reset.

b. Right click AS_Reset and select New “AS_Reset”.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 223

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

c. Check the tag data type and options with the figure below and click
OK.

d. Click the box next to AS_Reset to open Configuration Dialog.

e. From the Message Type pull-down menu, choose CIP Generic.

f. From the Service Type pull-down menu, choose Custom.

224 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

g. From the Source Element pull-down menu, choose Data1 tag that was
created earlier and press Enter.

h. Type 5 for the Service Code, 1 for the Class, and 1 for the Instance.
Leave the Attribute value at 0. Once you have added these values, the
Service Type should automatically change to Device Reset.

i. Click Communication at the top of the window. Click Browse, select

the ArmorStart that is in your project, and click OK. This selects the
ArmorStart as the device you are going to send the reset message to.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 225

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

j. You do not need to configure anything in Tag. Click Apply and then
OK.
8. Save your project. Download the project to the PLC and go Online.
9. Inhibit the ArmorStart using the AOP:
a. Once online, open the ArmorStart's AOP and click Connection. Select
Inhibit Module from the options.

b. Click Apply. The following screen should pop-up. Click Yes. Click OK
to close out the AOP.

226 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Diagnostics Chapter 9

c. You should see the yellow inhibit symbol next to the ArmorStart in the
I/O Configuration tree showing that the module is inhibited.

10. Execute the instruction by toggling the Reset input that was created earlier.
a. To energize the bit, left mouse click the input and press CTRL+T. To
de-energize the bit, press CTRL+T again.
b. You should see the status LEDs on the ArmorStart display the Reset
and Power Cycle sequence. You should also see the Done (DN) bit of
the message turn green indicating that the reset was successful.

11. Check if the reset works by bringing the ArmorStart's web browser back up
and checking that the User Name is Administrator and that there is no set
password.

12. Uninhibit the ArmorStart module through the AOP and plug any I/O
connections back into the ArmorStart.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 227

Chapter 9 Diagnostics

Notes:

228 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 10

Troubleshooting

Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to help with troubleshooting the ArmorStart
Distributed Motor Controller by using the LED status display and diagnostic
parameters.

ATTENTION: Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous.

Electrical shock, burns, or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment
may cause death or serious injury. For safety of maintenance personnel and others who
might be exposed to electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities, follow
the local safety related work practices (for example, the NFPA70E, Part II in the United
States). Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and
requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments.

ATTENTION: Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits. The cause of the fault
indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation. Failure to
correct a control system of mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and /
or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation.

ATTENTION: The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to discharge
after removal of mains supply. Before working on the drive, verify the isolation of mains
supply from line inputs (R, S, T, [L1, L2, L3]). Wait three minutes for capacitors to
discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death.
Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe
voltage levels.

ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and
associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and
subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury
and/or equipment damage.

ATTENTION: This drive contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) – sensitive parts and
assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or
repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are
not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, see Allen-Bradley
Publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding against Electrostatic Damage, or any other applicable
ESD protection handbook.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 229

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage

or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as undersizing of the
motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result
in malfunction of the system.

Bulletin 280E/281E The following flowchart for Bulletin 280E, 281E units is provided to aid in quick
troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting
Figure 90 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Control Module LED Status

Faulted Display
Yes

No

Fault Network Motor does

LED LED not Start

See See See

Table 30 Table 34 Table 40

Bulletin 284E Fault Definitions

Troubleshooting
Some of the Bulletin 284E ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller faults are
detected by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart controller, while others are
detected by the internal drive. For internal drive faults, the internal hardware of
the ArmorStart controller simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and
reports the fault state. No fault latching is done by the internal hardware of the
ArmorStart controller for these faults. The PrFlt ResetMode parameter
(Parameter 23) determines the Auto Resettability of only the faults that are
detected on the main control board. The Auto Resettability of the faults that are
detected in the internal drive is controlled by internal drive parameters, see
Table 38. The following flowchart for Bulletin 284E units is provided to aid in
quick troubleshooting.

230 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Figure 91 - Bulletin 284E Control Module LED Status

Faulted Display
Yes

No

Define Nature of
the Problem
Fault Network
LED LED

Motor does
not start
See See
Table 37 Table 34

See
Table 40
Actions

IP67 Dynamic The IP67 operation is different from most other DB resistors. The ArmorStart
controller includes specialized function that protects the DB from current faults.
Brake Diagnostic (DB1) This capability is found on an optional monitoring board that is located in the
control module of the 284 that is included when the DB1 option is selection.

A DB1 fault is not annunciated until the DB switch in the drive is activated and
conducting current.

The following conditions are monitored:

• DB Overcurrent resistor value too small (current is too high)
• DB Undercurrent resistor value is too high (current is too low)
• DB Open drive bus voltage is above DB level, but no resistor current was
measured

The following conditions cause a fault anytime the DB1 active:

• DB Shorted Switch - detected current when Drive bus voltage is below the
DB threshold
• DB Overtemp - DB resistor is too hot
• DB Bus Voltage Link Open - Bus voltage from the drive is not measured
for two seconds. Occurs if the internal connection between the main
control and the DB1 module has an issue

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 231

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

DB1 Faults Operation and Troubleshooting of the DB1 - Dynamic Brake

Eight types of DB1 faults are detected and reported in Parameter 61 as either a
“DB1 Flt”, “DB1 Comm Fault” or DB1 Switch Short”. DB1 faults are also
reported in Attribute 158 “DB1 Fault” of the Control Supervisor Object (Class
Code: 29 Hex). See Appendix B for Control Supervisor information.

If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 11x's check parameter 61. If value is 41,
check the following:
• DB1 Comm Fault - Communication loss exists between the Dynamic
Brake board and the main control board.

This is also enunciated in the Trip Status parameter 4 bit 10 called Internal
Comm fault.

If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x's check parameter 61. If value is 42 (DB1
Fault), check the following:
• DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault
• DB1 Overcurrent Fault
• DB1 Undercurrent Fault
• DB1 Open Fault
• DB1 VBus Link Fault

This is also enunciated in the Trip Status parameter 4-bit 15 called Miscellaneous
Fault.

If the ArmorStart Fault LED blinks 16x's check parameter 61. If value is 43,
check the following:
• DB1 Switch Fault

The DB1 option provides the following warning:

• DB1 Thermal Warning - occurs once the resistor reaches 75% of maximum
thermocapacity. Once at 100% a DB1 over temperature occurs resulting in
a DB1 over temperature fault.

DB1 Resistor Overtemperature Fault

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 0.
The DB1 measures current continuously, and models resistor body temperature
that is based on measured current and resistor model parameters. The DB1 not
only calculates the present resistor body temperature, but also predicts the future
resistor body temperature. The resistor overtemperature level is based on the
predicted future resistor body temperature, not on the present resistor body
temperature. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor Sel) is
“Disabled”.

Troubleshooting – DB1 Resistor body temperature is too hot. Allow the resistor
to cool.

232 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

DB1 Overcurrent Fault

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 1.

The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Max Current Level. If
5 consecutive samples are above the Max Current Level, then a fault is recorded.
This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is lower than
expected. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor Sel) is
“Disabled”.

Troubleshooting – DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current higher than

expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to
discharge.

BURN HAZARD: DB1 resistor may still be hot.

Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module. Measure DB1

resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. See the specification for
minimum DB1 resistor values. If DB1 resistance value is within limits, replace
control module. If not, replace DB1 resistor.

DB1 Undercurrent Fault

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 2.

The DB1 compares each current measurement against the Min Current Level.
The Min Current Level = Min DB1 Voltage Level/Max DB1 Resistance. If 5
consecutive samples are below the Min Current Level and the DB1 is ON, then a
fault is recorded. This fault is intended to notify the user if the DB1 resistance is
higher than expected. This fault is disabled when Parameter 182 (DB1 Resistor
Sel) is “Disabled”.

Troubleshooting – DB1 monitor has measured a DB1 current lower than

expected. Turn off all power to unit. Allow at least 3 minutes for capacitors to
discharge.

BURN HAZARD: DB1 resistor may still be hot.

Disconnect DB1 resistor from ArmorStart control module. Measure DB1

resistor value at the connector with an ohmmeter. See the specification for
minimum DB1 resistor values. If DB1 resistance value is within limits, replace
control module. If not, replace DB1 resistor.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 233

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

DB1 Switch Fault

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 3.

A DB1 Switch fault is issued when continuous DB1 resistor current is detected
when the Drive Bus Voltage level is less than the DB1 Voltage Level. If 5
consecutive samples of Drive Bus Voltage less than DB1 Level is detected along
with continuous DB1 resistor current flow, then a shorted DB1 IGBT fault
(DB1 Switch) is recorded.

It is the user’s responsibility to provide an input power contactor to each

ArmorStart with a drive. The user must write logic to control (open) the input
contactor to the ArmorStart in the event of a DB1 Switch Fault. The Instruction
Literature provides information on how to connect the input contactor, and how
to implement the logic.

Troubleshooting – Attempt to reset the fault by removing all power to the unit
and restarting. If the fault persists, replace control module.

DB1 Open Fault

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 4.

A DB1 Open fault is issued when Bus Voltage is greater than the DB1 Voltage
Level, and no DB1 resistor current has been detected. If 5 consecutive samples of
Drive Bus Voltage greater than the DB1 Level is detected along with no DB1
resistor current flow, then an open DB1 fault is recorded. This fault is intended to
notify the customer of an open DB1 resistor, or open wire. The fault is disabled
when the DB1 Resistor Sel, Parameter (182) is “Disabled”.

Troubleshooting – DB1 monitor expected to see current flow and measured

none. Likely cause is an open DB1 resistor, loose DB1 resistor connector, or open
wire in DB1 cable. Check DB1 cable connector for tightness. If problem persists,
remove DB1 resistor cable connector from unit and check DB1 resistance. If
DB1 resistor is open, replace DB1 resistor. Otherwise replace control module.

DB1 VBus Link Fault

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 6.
For proper operation, the DB1 monitors parameters from the Drive internally
inside the ArmorStart. If the internal communications to the drive is lost, then
this fault is issued. Since the DB1 can no longer provide resistor protection, the
user must implement logic to open the input contactor.

Troubleshooting – Verify that 3-phase line power and control power is applied
to unit. Attempt to reset fault. If fault persists, replace control module.

234 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

DB1 Comm Fault

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Fault” Attribute Bit 8.

The communications link is monitored continuously. If the DB1 stops

responding, then the MCB issues this fault. Since the DB1 can no longer provide
resistor protection, the user must implement logic to open the input contactor.

Troubleshooting – Replace control module.

DB1 Thermal Warning

Control Supervisor Object “DB1 Status” Attribute Bit 1.

A DB1 Thermal Warning is issued if the predicted future resistor body

temperature is greater than the Max DB1 resistor temperature x DB1 Thermal
Warning Percent.

Troubleshooting – None. DB1 resistor thermal value has exceeded the preset
threshold of 90% of thermal value.

Reading the Control Supervisor Object

If a DB1 fault occurs the Control Supervisor Object provides the detailed
information specific to the fault. Create an Explicit Message Instruction such as
Class = 0029hex, Instance = 0001hex, Attribute = 158. A bit enumerated
WORD of information is returned. See the CIP section for details.

Hardware Fault - FAN Fault Handling with Firmware 66.21 of 284

Fan RPM Warning
The Fan Fault handler was modified in firmware 66.21 of the 284.

Operation

If the RPM of the internal fan drops below the minimum threshold a Warning bit
in Stater Status, Parameter 5 will be set and the Warning Status, Parameter 62 Bit
13 hardware warning will be set. A 24 hour count down timer begins. If the
warning flag is set continuously for the 24 hr period and time expires a F14 (LED
Flashes 14 times) Hardware fault occurs. Also Last Pr Fault, Parameter 61 shows
Fan RPM fault. If within the 24 hr period the fan rpm climbs above the minimum
threshold the warning flags will be removed and timer reset and turned off.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 235

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Starter Status, Warning Bit 5:

When set to "1" indicates a Warning if a Fan RPM issue occurs. The warning bit
can also be triggered by other warning type faults that are found in parameter 62.

Warning Status, Parameter 62:

Bit 13 turns to a "1" indicating a Hardware warning. Hardware warning is an OR

of two warnings.

Annunciation using PLC Logic

To determine when only a Fan RPM warning occurs, logic must be written that
triggers a CIP message. The DPI Alarm Object Class Code 0x0098 provides a
structure of data that includes the fault code of Fan RPM (31). Create a program
that monitors the Starter Status Warning bit and Warning Status Hardware bit.
When they are both set to "1" the PLC code should generate a Get Single explicit
message of Class 0x0098, Instance 1, and Attribute 1.

236 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

This message returns a structure of the following data:

— —Alarm Code UINT <-----------
— —Alarm Source Struct of:
— — — DPI Port Number USINT
— — — Device Object Instance USINT
— —Alarm Time Stamp Struct of:
— — — Timer Value ULINT
— — — Timer Descriptor WORD

When Alarm Code UINT = 31 (decimal) this is a FAN RPM warning. For a full
list of fault code references see parameter 61.

When the fault occurs the following Trip bits are activated:
• Parameter 4, Trip Status, bit 13 turns to a "1" indicating a hardware trip has
occurred
• Parameter 5, Starter Status, bit 0 turns to a "1" indicating a TripPresent
• Parameter 61 displays "Fan RPM" Fault 31 as the last protection fault.

Internal Drive Faults

A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types.
Table 38 - Internal Drive Faults
Type Name Description
1 Auto-Reset/Run When this type of fault occurs, Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) and related
Parameter(s): 155 (Relay Out Sel), 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) are set to a value greater than
0, a user-configurable timer, Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) and related Parameter:
192 (Auto Rstrt Tries), begins. When the timer reaches zero, the drive attempts to
automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present,
the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted
2 Non-Resettable This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programing
errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.

Automatically Clearing Faults (Option/Step)

Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive:

1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.

2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to a value other than 0.

Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without

Restarting the Drive:

1. Set Parameter 192 (Auto Rstrt Tries) to a value other than 0.

2. Set Parameter 193 (Auto Rstrt Delay) to 0.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 237

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Auto Restart (Reset/Run)

The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically
perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application
intervention. This allows remote or unattended operation. Only certain faults are
allowed to be reset. Certain faults (Type 2) that indicate possible drive
component malfunction cannot be reset. Caution should be used when enabling
this feature, since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command that is
based on user selected programming.

The following table describes Bulletin 284E Faults as seen in Parameters 107,
108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2, or 3).

Table 39 - Bulletin 284E Faults – Parameters 107, 108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2 or 3)
No. Fault Type ➊ Description Action
F2 Auxiliary Input 1 Auxiliary input interlock is open. 1. Check remote wiring.
2. Check communications.
F3 Power Loss 2 DC bus voltage remained below 85% of 1. Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
nominal. 2. Check input fuses.
F4 UnderVoltage 1 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum 1. Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
value.
F5 OverVoltage 1 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum 1. Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can
value. also be caused by motor regeneration. Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake
option.
F6 Motor Stalled 1 Drive is unable to accelerate motor. 1. Increase Parameters 139 or 167 (Accel Time x) or reduce load so drive output current
does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 (Current Limit 1).
F7 Motor Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip 1. An excessive motor load exists. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the
current set by Parameter 133 (Motor OL Current).
2. Verify Parameter 184 (Boost Select) setting
F8 Heatsink OvrTmp 1 Heatsink temperature exceeds a 1. Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not
predefined value. exceeded 40°C.
2. Replace internal fan.
F12 HW OverCurrent 2 The drive output current has exceeded 1. Check programming. Check for excess load, improper programming of Parameter 184
the hardware current limit. (Boost Select), DC brake volts set too high, or other causes of excess current.
F13 Ground Fault 2 A current path to earth ground has been 1. Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded
detected at one or more of the drive condition.
output terminals.
F33 Auto Rstrt Tries Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a 1. Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
fault and resume running for the
programmed number of Parameter 192
(Auto Rstrt Tries).
F38 Phase U to Gnd 2 A phase to ground fault has been 1. Check the wiring between the drive and motor.
F39 Phase V to Gnd detected between the drive and motor in 2. Check motor for grounded phase.
F40 Phase W to Gnd this phase. 3. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.

F41 Phase UV Short 2 Excessive current has been detected 1. Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition.
F42 Phase UW Short between these two output terminals. 2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
F43 Phase VW Short
F48 Params Defaulted 2 The drive was commanded to write 1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
default values to EEPROM. 2. Program the drive parameters as needed.
F63 SW OverCurrent 2 Programmed Parameter 198 (SW Current 1. Check load requirements and Parameter 198 (SW Current Trip) setting.
Trip) has been exceeded.

238 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Table 39 - Bulletin 284E Faults – Parameters 107, 108, and 109 (Fault 1, 2 or 3)
No. Fault Type ➊ Description Action
F64 Drive Overload 2 Drive rating of 150% for 1 min or 200% 1. Reduce load or extend Accel Time.
for 3 s has been exceeded.
F70 Power Unit 2 Failure has been detected in the drive 1. Cycle power.
power section. 2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
F80 SVC Autotune The autotune function was either 1. Restart procedure.
cancelled by the user or failed.
F81 Comm Loss 2 RS485 (DSI) port stopped 1. Turn off using Parameter 205 (Comm Loss Action).
communicating. 2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
F100 Parameter 2 The checksum read from the board does 1. Set Parameter 141 (Reset To Defaults) to Option 1 (Reset Defaults).
Checksum not match the checksum calculated.
F122 I/O Board Fail 2 Failure has been detected in the drive 1. Cycle power.
control and I/O section. 2. Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared.
➊ See Table 38 for Type description.

Table 40 - Motor Does Not Start

Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
No output voltage to the motor. None Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects
Check the motor.
• Check that the motor is connected properly.
• Check that I/O Terminal 01 is active.
• Check that Parameter 136 (Start Source) matches your configuration.
• Check that Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable) is not prohibiting movement.
• Run Autotune parameter 227
Drive is Faulted Flashing red status light Clear fault.
• Press Stop
• Cycle power
• Set Parameter 200 (Fault Clear) to Option 1 (Clear Faults).
• Cycle digital input is Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel) is set to Option 7, (Clear
Faults).

Table 41 - Drive Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command

Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action

No value is coming form the The drive Run indicator is lit • Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.
source of the command. and output is 0 Hz. • If the source is an analog input, check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of
signal.
• Check Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq) to verify correct command.
Incorrect reference source is None • Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for correct source.
being selected via remote device • Check Parameter 114 (Dig In Status) to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source. Verify
or digital inputs. settings for Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel).
• Check Parameter 138 (Speed Reference) for the source of the speed reference. Reprogram
as necessary.
Some applications create an None • Disable parameter 217 Bus Regulation. The drive will react faster to changes in speed.
intermittent voltage • This could also cause DC bus voltage faults if an external resistor is not attached.
regeneration condition and the
bus regulator tries to
compensate.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 239

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Table 42 - Motor and/or Drive Does Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed

Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Acceleration time is excessive. None • Reprogram Parameter 139 (Accel Time 1) or Parameter 167 (Accel Time 2).
• Try changing parameter 184 Boost selection to a value of 5 to 14, starting with 5.
Excess load or short acceleration None • Compare Parameter 103 (Output Current) with Parameter 189 (Current Limit1).
times force the drive into current • Remove excess load or reprogram Parameter 139 (Accel Time 1) or Parameter 167 (Accel
limit, slowing, or stopping Time 2).
acceleration. • Check for improper setting of Parameter 184 (Boost Select).
Speed command source or value None • Verify Parameter 102 (Commanded Freq).
is not as expected. • Check Parameter 112 (Control Source) for the proper Speed Command.
Programming is preventing the None Check Parameter 135 (Maximum Freq) to insure that speed is not limited by programming.
drive output from exceeding
limiting values.
Torque performance does not None • Set motor nameplate full load amps in Parameter 226 (Motor NP FLA).
match motor characteristics. • Use Parameter 227 (Autotune) to perform Static Tune or Rotate Tune procedure.
• Set Parameter 225 (Torque Perf Mode) to Option 0 (V/Hz).

Table 43 - Motor Operation is Unstable

Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Motor data was incorrectly None 1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data into Parameters 131, 132, and 133.
entered. 2. Enable Parameter 197 (Compensation).
3. Use Parameter 184 (Boost Select) to reduce boost level.

Table 44 - Drive Does Not Reverse Motor Direction

Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Digital input is not selected for None Check Parameters 151…154 (Digital In x Sel). Choose correct input and program for reversing
reversing control. mode.
Motor wiring is improperly None Switch two motor leads.
phased for reverse.
Reverse is disabled. None Check Parameter 195 (Reverse Disable).

Table 45 - Drive Does Not Power Up

Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
No input power to drive. None Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects.
Jumper between I/O Terminals P2 None Install jumper or connect DC Bus Inductor.
and P1 not installed and/or DC
Bus Inductor not connected.

240 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Ethernet Statistics The EtherNet/IP communication module may experience intermittent network
connectivity due to these conditions:
• Duplex mismatch
• Electrical noise that is induced into a cable or resulting from a Logix/
switch ground potential difference
• Bad hardware, such as a cable or switch part

Troubleshoot and General Before attempting to correct specific faults on the linear or DLR network, it is
recommended to first take the following actions when a fault appears.
Solutions for Linear or DLR
• For a DLR network check that:
Networks – At least one node is configured as a supervisor on the network and that
Network Topology = Ring.
– All cables on the network are securely connected to each device.
– All devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly.
– The Network Status field on the active supervisor node’s status page to
determine the fault type.
• For a linear network check that:
– None of the nodes are configured as a supervisor on the network and
that Network Topology = Linear.
If any nodes on a linear network are configured as a supervisor, it may
impact communication to other devices connected to the network.

– All cables on the network are securely connected to each device.

– All devices that require an IP address have one assigned correctly.

If the fault is not cleared after completing the actions listed above, use the tables
in the rest of this chapter to troubleshoot issues specific to a DLR network or a
linear network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 241

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Specific Issues on Your DLR or Linear Network

Use the following table to troubleshoot possible specific issues on your DLR or
linear network that are not solved by the actions that are described above.

Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network

Issue Description Solution

A link on the DLR network may be broken: Determine where the fault condition exists and
• Intentionally, for example, because you are adding or deleting nodes but have not made all physical correct it.
connections to restore the set up of the network with/without the node. It may be necessary to click the Refresh
Communication link to update the Ring Fault
• Unintentionally, for example, because a cable is broken or a device malfunctions. information to determine where the fault
When this fault occurs, the adjacent nodes to the faulted part of the network are displayed in the Ring condition exists.
Fault group and the Network Status field = Ring Fault.
The screen shot below shows the Ring Fault section with IP addresses appearing for the last active
nodes. The faulted node is between nodes 10.88.80.115 and 10.88.80.208. If the IP address of either
node is not available, the software will display the node’s MAC ID.

Figure 92 - Ring Fault Section

Supervisor Reports Once the fault is corrected, the ring is automatically restored, and the Network Status field returns to
a Ring Fault Normal.

242 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network

Issue Description Solution

When a Rapid Ring Fault occurs, the following events occur: Multiple possible solutions exist.
• The active supervisor blocks traffic on port 2, resulting in possible network segmentation, that is, • For the disconnections and reconnections
some nodes may become unreachable. issue, no solution is required.
• The Link 2 status indicator on the active supervisor is off. Clear the fault when you have reconnected the
device to the network permanently.
• As soon as the fault occurs, for both RSLogix 5000 programming software and RSLinx communication
software, the Status field = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycles. • For the duplex mismatch issue, reconfigure the
duplex parameters to verify that they match
Figure 93 - Rapid Fault/Restore Cycles Status between the devices.
• For the electromagnetic noise issue, determine
where the noise exists and eliminate it or use a
protective shield in that location.
• For the unstable connections issue, determine
where they exist on the network and correct
them.
• Check the media counters for all devices on the
network. The device with the highest media
counter count is most likely causing the Rapid
Ring Fault.
• Remove devices from the network one by one.
When you see the Rapid Ring Fault disappear
after a device is removed, that device is
causing the fault.
• Finally, your Beacon Interval or Timeout
configuration may not be appropriate for your
Any of the following may cause a Rapid Ring Fault: network.
• Five intentional disconnections/reconnections of a node from the network within 30 s However, if you think it is necessary to change
• A duplex mismatch between two connected devices these values, we recommend that you call
Rockwell Automation technical support.
• Electromagnetic noise on the network Once the fault is fixed, click Clear Fault.
• Unstable physical connections, such as intermittent connectors
Given the nature of a Rapid Ring Fault, the Last Active Node information may not be accurate when a
Rapid Ring Fault Rapid Ring Fault condition is present
A partial network fault occurs when traffic is lost in only one direction on the network because a ring Determine where the fault condition exists and
member is not forwarding beacons in both directions for some reason, such as because of a component correct it.
failure.
The active ring supervisor detects a partial fault by monitoring the loss of Beacon frames on one port
and the fault location appears in the Ring Fault section of the Network tab.
When a partial fault is detected, the active ring supervisor blocks traffic on one port. At this point, the
ring is segmented due to the partial fault condition. The nodes adjacent to the faulted part of the
network are displayed in the Ring Fault group with either IP addresses or MAC ID’s for each node
displayed.
Partial Fault When this fault occurs the Network Status field = Partial Fault Condition.
Condition Once the fault is corrected, it automatically clears, and the Network Status field returns to Normal.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 243

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Table 46 - Troubleshoot DLR or Linear Network

Issue Description Solution

The media counters screen displays the number of physical layer errors or collisions. The screen below Some example solutions include:
indicates where to check for errors that are encountered. Error levels are displayed depending on what • Check for a mismatch of speed and/or duplex
caused the error. For example, an Alignment Error is displayed in the Alignment Error field. between two linked nodes.
Figure 94 - Media Counter Screen • Check that all cables on the network are
securely connected to each device.
• Check for electromagnetic noise on the
network. If you find it, eliminate it or use a
protective shield in that location.

On a DLR network, it is not uncommon to see low levels of media counter errors. For example, if the
network breaks, a low level of media counter errors appear. With a low level of media counter errors, the
value typically does not continuously increase and often clears.
A high level of media counter errors typically continues to increase and does not clear. For example,
there is a mismatch of speed between two linked nodes, a high level of media counter errors appears,
steadily increasing and not clearing.
Media Counter To access the RSLinx screen above, browse the network, right-click the device, select Module Properties
Errors or Collisions and click Port Diagnostics.

Table 47 - Media Counter Errors

Media Counter Definition

Alignment Errors A frame containing bits that do not total an integral multiple of eight.
Alignment errors often result from:
• Starting or stopping of a module.
• MAC-layer packet formation problems.
• Cabling problems that corrupt or eliminate data.
• Packets passing through more than two cascaded multi-port transceivers.
FCS Errors A frame containing 8 bits, at least one of which has been corrupted.
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) errors often result from:
• Starting or stopping of a module.
• Cabling problems that corrupt or eliminate data.
Important: Even though the acceptable Ethernet bit-error rate is 1 in 108, the typical rate is 1 in 1012 or better.
Single Collisions The number of outgoing packets that encountered only one collision during transmission.
Multiple Collisions The number of outgoing packets that encountered 2...15 collisions during transmission.
SQE Test Errors A test to detect the collision-present circuit between a transceiver and a network interface card (NIC).
Important: Because most NICs now have an integrated transceiver, the SQE test is unnecessary. Ignore this media counter.
Deferred Transmissions The number of outgoing packets whose transmission is deferred because the network is busy when the first attempt is made to send them.
Important: The module only defers the first attempt to transmit a packet. After the first attempt, the module transmits the packet without checking.
However, if the network is still busy, a collision will be recorded.

244 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Media Counter Definition

Late Collisions The number of times two devices transmit data simultaneously.
Neither device detects a collision because the time it takes to send the signal from one end of the network to the other exceeds the time that is needed
to put the entire packet on the network. Consequently, neither device senses the other’s transmission until the entire packet is out on the network.
Late collisions often result from these conditions:
• Excessive network segment length
• Repeaters between devices
Important: Large and small packets can be affected by late collisions. However, the transmitter cannot detect late collisions between small packets.
Consequently, a network that experiences measurable late collisions between large packets also loses small packets.
Excessive Collisions The number of frames that experience 16 consecutive collisions.
MAC Transmit Errors The number of frames for which transmission via a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub-layer transmission error.
Important: MAC transmit errors are only counted if either late collisions, excessive collisions, or carrier sense errors are not counted.
MAC Receive Errors The number of frames for which reception via a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub-layer transmission error.
Important: MAC receive errors are only counted if the frame too long count, alignment errors, or FCS errors are not counted.
Carrier Sense Errors Carrier sense errors fall into these categories:
• No Carrier Sense Present - The number of times the carrier is not present when a transmission starts.
• Carrier Sense Lost - The number of times the carrier is lost during a transmission.
Carrier sense errors usually indicate a problem with a cable on the Ethernet infrastructure.
Frame Too Long The number of incoming packets that exceed the maximum Ethernet packet size.

Troubleshoot Intermittent To troubleshoot intermittent ethernet connectivity, follow these steps.

Ethernet Connectivity 1. From the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP and/or the ControlLogix EtherNet/IP
bridge, click Ethernet Statistics.

Figure 95 - Ethernet Statistics

2. Review the values in the Media Counters table.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 245

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

If Then
Any media counters are greater than zero You need to investigate further.
These errors are counted: A duplex mismatch exists between your EtherNet/IP communication module and the switch port.
• Alignment To clear the duplex mismatch:
• FCS 1. Configure the EtherNet/IP communication module and the corresponding Ethernet switch port for a forced operation, not auto-
• Carrier Sense negotiation.
2. Verify that the firmware revision of your Logix controller and switch, or converter are identical.
3. If the revisions are not identical, replace the controller, switch, or converter so that they match.
Single Collisions or Multiple Collisions are No action is required.
greater than zero Important: If two stations attempt to transmit data simultaneously, the packets collide with each other. However, collisions are not
errors and do not indicate a network problem. The number of network collisions can vary greatly due to traffic patterns or CPU
utilization. Consequently, there is no set range of acceptable collisions for each outgoing packet. Collisions are a normal aspect of
Ethernet networking.
Late Collisions are greater than zero 1. Check to see if a network segment is too long.
2. Remove repeaters from between devices.
Excessive Collisions are greater than zero Calculate your network’s typical rate of excessive collisions and decide whether the rate of packet loss will affect your network’s
performance.
Important: Excessive collisions indicate that your network has become congested. For each collision after the sixteenth, your
network drops a packet.
MAC Transit Errors are greater than zero No action is required.
Frame Too Long is greater than zero Limit the size of your tags to ≤ 500 bytes.

246 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Ethernet Statistics

The Ethernet Statistics web page presents the current configuration of an

EtherNet/IP communication module and any errors that have occurred on the
module.

1. Review the values in the Ethernet Port 1 table.

If And you Then

Link Status is Active Do not want to change the status No action is required
Inactive Want to establish communication on the network Reconfigure the module, or port, that is inactive.
Speed is 100 or 1000 Mbps Do not want to change your port speed No action is required.
Important: 100 Mbps is the default port speed.
Want to reduce your port speed to 10 Mbps You must manually configure your module and reset your module.
10 Mbps Want to increase your port speed to 100 Mbps Reset your module
Do not want to change your port speed No action is required.
Duplex is Full Are sending large amounts of data No action is required.
Important: Full Duplex is the default port setting.
Full-duplex ports eliminate collisions because each device has separate
channels for the transmission and receipt of large amounts of data.
Half Are not sending large amounts of data No action is required.
Important: Delays due to collisions or switch traffic are usually negligible,
but can become a problem if you need to send much data.
Are sending large amounts of data Change your module’s Duplex setting to Full.
Autonegotiate Status➊ Speed and/or Are using a fiber converter Change your module’s Autonegotiate status to None.
is Duplex Important: Fiber links do not support autonegotiation.
Are not using a fiber converter No action is required.
Important: Speed and/or Duplex is the default setting.
Autonegotation enables devices to select the best way to communicate
without you having to do any configuring. All devices with an Ethernet
speed rating of 100 Mbps are required to support autonegotiation.
None Are not using a fiber converter Change your module’s Autonegotiate status to Speed and/or Duplex.

➊ When you use an EtherNet/IP communication module with multiple ports, make sure that you use the same Autonegotiate Status
configuration for both ports.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 247

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

2. Review the values in the Media Counters Port 1 table.

If Then
Any media counters are greater than zero You need to investigate further.
These errors are counted: A duplex mismatch exists between your EtherNet/IP communication module and the switch port.
• Alignment To clear the duplex mismatch:
• FCS 1. Configure the EtherNet/IP communication module and the corresponding Ethernet switch port for a forced operation, not
• Carrier Sense autonegotiation.
2. Verify that the firmware revision of your Logix controller and switch, or converter are identical.
3. If the revisions are not identical, replace the controller, switch, or converter so that they match.
Single Collisions or Multiple Collisions are greater No action is required.
than zero Important: If two stations attempt to transmit data simultaneously, the packets collide with each other. However, collisions are
not errors and do not indicate a network problem. The number of network collisions can vary greatly due to traffic patterns or
CPU utilization. Consequently, there is no set range of acceptable collisions for each outgoing packet. Collisions are a normal
aspect of Ethernet networking.
Late Collisions are greater than zero 1. Check to see if a network segment is too long.
2. Remove repeaters from between devices.
Excessive Collisions are greater than zero Calculate your network’s typical rate of excessive collisions and decide whether the rate of packet loss will affect your network’s
performance.
Important: Excessive collisions indicate that your network has become congested. For each collision after the sixteenth, your
network drops a packet.
MAC Transit Errors are greater than zero No action is required.
Frame Too Long is greater than zero Limit the size of your tags to ≤ 500 bytes.

248 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Ethernet Managed Switch To help troubleshoot the EtherNet/IP network, a managed switch must be used.
Considerations These are important features in a managed switch:
• Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) snooping
• Support for Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN)
• Port mirroring

IMPORTANT Use a switch equipped with wire-speed switching fabric. The switch fabric is a measure
of the maximum traffic that a switch can handle without dropping a packet and
without storing a packet in memory. Wire-speed switching fabric refers to a switch
that can handle the maximum data rate of the network on each of its ports.
Switches are typically rated in Gbps. For a 10-port switch connected to EtherNet/IP
products, the maximum data rate that is needed, is typically 100...200 MB/s. Therefore,
a 10-port-switch rated at least 1 GB/s should be adequate for an EtherNet/IP
application.

Internet Group Multicast Protocol

EtherNet/IP implicit (I/O) messaging mostly uses IP multicasting to distribute
I/O control data, that is consistent with the CIP produced/consumer model.
Most switches retransmit multicast packets and broadcast packets to all ports.

IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically

configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports
associated with a particular IP multicast group. This also helps minimize the
CPU utilization rate.

Switches that support IGMP snooping learn which ports have devices that are
part of a particular multicast group and only forward the multicast packets to the
ports that are part of the multicast group.

IMPORTANT Not all switches support the IGMP snooping querier function, that is, snooping. Those
that do not support IGMP snooping querier require a router. For switches that do
support IGMP snooping, you can configure them to conduct the polling.

IGMP snooping cannot control unicast or broadcast traffic. To learn how to

control unicast or broadcast traffic, see Virtual Local Area Networks on
page 250.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 249

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

This example assumes that the switch does not support IGMP snooping querier
function, so a router is required.

Figure 96 - IGMP Snooping Example

Virtual Local Area Networks

With a managed switch, virtual local area networks (VLAN) can be established
to segregate various kinds of network traffic and also increase security between
the networks. Multiple isolated networks could be created so that the traffic from
one network does not burden the other network.

As with IGMP snooping, VLAN can control multicast traffic. However, unlike
IGMP snooping, VLAN can also control and block this traffic:
• Unicast traffic
• Broadcast traffic

Figure 97 - Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN)

250 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Port Mirroring

Select a managed switch that supports port mirroring. With port mirroring,
frames being transmitted on one port to another port, can be directed for analysis
by a traffic analyzer. Besides monitoring the ethernet media counters, port
mirroring allows anomalies in traffic flow to be spotted immediately. A traffic
analyzer can monitor the traffic on a given port and troubleshoot a problem.
Without port mirroring, frames on other ports cannot be seen. The effective
support and maintenance of ethernet networks often depends on reliable traffic
analysis.

These are some benefits of port mirroring:

• Monitoring explicit messages between controllers
• Monitoring implicit or I/O traffic

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 251

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Control Module Removal and Removal of Control Module

Installation
ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main power before working on the
controller, motor, or control devices.

1. Disconnect power by going to the control module and turning OFF the
At-Motor disconnect and performing lockout-tagout per your company
policy.
2. Remove motor cable.
3. Loosen the four mounting screws.
4. Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward.

Installation of Control Module

5. Install control module.
6. Tighten four mounting screws.
7. Install motor cable.

Figure 98 - Control Module Replacement

Motor Cable 2

7
3.39 N•m (30 lb•in.)

Note: DeviceNet™ base module is shown. 6

252 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Troubleshooting Chapter 10

Fuse Replacement .

ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main power before working on

the controller, motor, or control devices.

Table 48 - Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement

Specification Output Fuse Control Power Fuse

Cat. No. 25176-155-03 25172-260-17
Fast-acting, high interrupting capacity tubular UL Listed Class CC,CSA HRC-1,Interupting,
Description fuse Rejection Feature
Current 2.5 A 7A
Interrupting 1500 A 200 ka
Capacity
Voltage Rating 250V 600V (Maximum)
Littlefuse PN 021602.5 Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-7 or
Manufacturer Littlefuse PN KLKR007.T
Dimension mm 20 (0.8) x 5 (0.2) 38.1 (1.5) x 10.2 (0.4)
(in.):

Figure 99 - Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement

Output Fuse Control Voltage Fuse

Cat. No. 25176-155-03 Cat. No. 25172-260-17

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 253

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Table 49 - Source Brake Fuse Replacement (Bulletin 284E only)

Specification Source Control Brake Fuse

Cat. No. W25172-260-12
Description 3.0A UL Listed Class CC,CSA HRC-1, Rejection Feature
Current 3.0A
Interrupting Capacity 200ka
Voltage Rating 600V (Maximum)
Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-3 or
Manufacturer Littlefuse PN KLKR003.T
Dimension mm (in.): 38.1 (1.5) x 10.2 (0.4)

Figure 100 - Source Brake Fuse Replacement (Bulletin 284E only)

Source Control Brake Fuses

Cat. No. W25172-260-12

Resetting Source Brake Fuse Faults

Replace the fuse and cycled unswitched power to reset the fault.

254 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 11

Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with

EtherNet/IP

Bulletin 280E, 281E

Electrical Ratings UL/NEMA IEC
Rated Operation Voltage 200…575V 200…575V
Rate Insulation Voltage 600V 600V
Rated Impulsed Voltage 6 kV 6 kV
Dielectric Withstand 2200V AC 2500V AC
Operating Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Power Circuit Utilization Category N/A AC-3
Protection Against Shock N/A IP2X
280E_-____-10A-* ➊ 1.2 A
280E_-____-10B-* ➊ 2.5 A
Rated Operating Current Max. ➊
280E_-____-10C-* 5.5 A
280E_-____-25D-* ➊ 16 A
Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC (+10%, –15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)
Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V
Rated Impulsed Voltage — 4kV
Control Circuit
Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC
Overvoltage Category — III
Operating Frequency 50/60 Hz —
Gland Current Short Circuit
Type Rating Protection 480Y/277V 480V
0.24…1.2 A Sym. Amps rms 65 kA 65 kA
0.5…2.5 A 10A, 10B, 10C Max. Circuit Breaker ➎ 100 A 60 A
Any CR 1.1…5.5 A Max. Fuse 100 A 60 A
or DR Sym. Amps rms 30 kA 30 kA
3.2…16 A 25D Max. Circuit Breaker ➎ 100 A 60 A
Short Circuit Protection Device (SCPD) Max. Fuse 100 A 60 A
Short Circuit Performance Type 1
Protection 0.24…1.2 A Sym. Amps rms 45 kA 65 kA 65 kA
0.5…2.5 A Max. Circuit Breaker ➏ 30 A ➌ N/A N/A
10A, 10B, 10C Max. Fuse
1.1…5.5 A - Non-time Delay ➋ 40 A 40 A 40 A
Any RR - Time Delay ➋ 20 A 20 A 20 A
Sym. Amps rms N/A 30 kA 30 kA
3.2…16 A 25D Max. Circuit Breaker ➏ N/A 100 A ➍ 60 A ➍
Max. Fuse ➋ N/A 100 A 60 A
SCPD List Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
➊ See Contactor Life Load Curves on page 260
➋ Type J, CC, and T fuses only.
➌ Only when used with Bulletin 140U-H frame.
➍ Only when used with Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx frame or smaller.
➎ Bulletin 140U-H or 140G-H circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 100 A and a maximum interrupt of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
➏ When protected by Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx circuit breaker, not rated more than 480/277V, 30 A, having an interrupt rating not less than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes .

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 255

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

UL/NEMA IEC
Operating Temperature Range –20…40 °C (–4…104 °F)
Storage and Transportation –25….85 °C (–13…185 °F)
Temperature Range
Altitude ➊ 2000 m
Environmental
Humidity 5…95% (on-condensing)
Pollution Degree 3
Enclosure Ratings NEMA 4/12 IP67
Approximate Shipping Weight 10.4 kg (23 lbs)
Resistance to Shock
Operational 15 G
Non-Operational 30 G
Resistance to Vibration
Operational 1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Displacement
Non-Operational 2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Displacement
Power and Ground Terminals
Wire Size Primary/Secondary Terminal: #16…#10 AWG Primary/Secondary Terminal: 1.0…4.0 mm2
Mechanical Primary Terminal: 10.8 lb·in. Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m
Tightening Torque Secondary Terminal: 4.5 lb·in. Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m
Wire Strip Length 0.35 in. (9 mm)
Control Terminals
Wire Size #18…#10 AWG 1.0…4.0 mm2
Tightening Torque 6.2 lb·in. 0.7 N·m
Wire Strip Length 0.35 in. (9 mm)
Recommend 8 mm (5/16 in.) lock shackle or hasp.
Disconnect Lock Out The hasp should not exceed 8 mm (5/16 in.) when closed.
CatNo 100- Ops C12 (AC3) C23 (AC3)
Contactor Mechanical Life 280/1_-_12* Mil 13 —
280/1_-_23* Mil — 13
EMC Emission Levels
10V rms Communications Cables
Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions 10V rms (PE)
150 kHz…80 MHz
Radiated Emissions Class A, Group 1, Equivalent to C2 emissions
EMC Immunity Levels
Electrostatic Discharge 4 kV contact and 8 kV Air
10V/m, 80 MHz…1 GHz
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 3V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
1V/m, 2.0 GHz …2.7 GHz
Other Rating 2 kV (Power)
Fast Transient 2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communications and Control)
Surge Transient 1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (Earth)
280_-____-10A-* 0.24…1.2 A
280_-____-10B-* 0.5…2.5 A
Overload Current Range
280_-____-10C-* 1.1…5.5 A
280_-____-25D-* 3.2…16 A
Trip Classes ➋ 10, 15, 20
Trip Rating 120% of Full Load current (FLC) Setting
Number of poles 3
➊ Refer to Altitude Derating on page 269 for derating guide
➋ Refer to Motor Overload Trip Curves on page 259

256 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP Chapter 11

UL/NEMA IEC
UL 508
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN/IEC 60947-4
EN/IEC 60947-4-1
Standards Compliance
CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006/95/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
CCC
ODVA for EtherNet/IP
Certifications cULus (File No. E3125, Guides NLDX, NLDX7)

EtherNet/IP Version – Control and I/O Power Requirements

A1/A2 ➊ A3/A2 ➋ A1/A2 ➊ A3/A2 ➋ A3/A2 ➌
Units W/O HOA W/ HOA
Control Voltage Volts 24V DC
Module Inrush ➍ Amps 0.92 0.30 1.09 0.125 0.295
Module Steady Amps 0.06 0.30 0.23 0.125 0.295
Total Control Power (Pick Up) Watts 22.08 7.20 26.16 3.00 7.08
Total Control Power (Running) Watts 1.44 7.20 5.52 3.00 7.08

➊ Add power requirements for outputs (1 A max.) to A1/A2.

➋ Add power requirements for inputs (200 mA max.) to A3/A2.
➌ If A1 power is disconnected.
➍ Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms, which can exceed 20 A. The power supply must be capable of supporting
this amount of instant power demand when multiple units are turned ON simultaneously. If supplies are weaker, it is recommended
to apply unswitched power (A3-A2) first and after a 2…4 second delay, apply switched power.

UL/NEMA IEC
Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC
Input On-State Voltage Range 10…26V DC
3.0 mA @ 10V DC
Input On-State Current
7.2 mA @ 24V DC
Input Off-State Voltage Range 0…5V DC
Input Off-State Current <1.5 mA
200 Hz
Input Ratings – Sourced from Maximum Input Frequency Response (DeviceLogix response is greater than 200 Hz. Network response depends on
Control Circuit control system network performance.)
(A3/A2) Input Filter – Software Selectable
Off to On Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
On to Off Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
Input Compatibility N/A IEC 1133 Type 1+
Number of Inputs 4
Sensor Source
Voltage Status Only 11…26.4V DC from unswitched power (A3-A2)
Current Available 50 mA max. per input, 200 mA for any single point

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 257

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

UL/NEMA IEC
Rated Operation Voltage 26.4V DC
Rate Insulation Voltage 250V
Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC (UL) 2000V AC (IEC)
Operating Frequency Solid state sourcing output
Type of Current 24V DC
Conventional Thermal Current Ith 0.5 A each, 1 A max. combined
Peak Output Current Current limited 2-8 amps (5 amps nominal) @ 24V DC
Output Ratings – Sourced
from Control Circuit (A1/A2) Type of Contacts Normally open (N.O.)
(Do not use as a power supply Number of Contacts 2
source to other devices)
Load Types Resistive or light inductive
Surge Suppression Integrated diode, clamps @ 35V DC
Thermo-Protection Integrated short circuit and over current protection
Maximum Cycle Rate 30 operations/minute capacitive and inductive loads
Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC
Maximum On-State Voltage @ Maximum Output 1.5V DC
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current 10 μA
Beacon-based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Fault Recovery Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network
Ethernet Receptacles 2 D-coded, 4-pin female M12 connectors
Ports Embedded switch with 2 ports
IP Address DHCP enabled by default
Ethernet Port DHCP Timeout 30 s
Communication Rate 10/100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex
• Transported over both TCP and UDP
Data • Min. of 500 I/O packets/second (pps)
• Supports up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets
Embedded web server
Security Login and password configurable
Web Server
E-mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Configuration Status, diagnostics, and configuration tabs
Supports scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 & UCMM) connections
6 - Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC.
Listen-only connection requires a data connection to be established.
Device Connections
Class 1 Connection API: 2…3200 ms, Class 3 Connection API: 100…10 000 ms
20 ms Request Packet Interval (RPI) default
3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions
TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections

258 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP Chapter 11

Motor Overload Trip Curves

Motor overload current parameter provides class 10,15, and 20 overload

protection. Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the
overload.

Figure 101 - Bulletin 280E/281E Overload Trip Curves

ClassClass
10 Overload
10 Curves Class 15 Overload
Class 15 Curves

10000 10000
Approximate Trip Time (sec)

Approximate Trip Time (sec)

1000

Cold Cold
100 100
Hot Hot

10

1 1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
% of Full Load Current
Multiples Multiples%for
of Full Load Current

Note: For 280 and 281, if an overload fault occurs it may require 60 s or more before a fault
Class 20 Overload Curves
Class 20 reset is allowed. Refer to Overload Class Parameter 107, Thermo-Utilization parameter
105, and OL Reset Level parameter 108 to adjust the reset time.
10000

Note: For 280 and 281, when the mechanical motor brake voltage is applied using power from
Approximate Trip Time (sec)

the load side of the ArmorStart controller, this current adds to the load and may result in a
phase imbalance or overload if the FLA of the motor and the brake current are similar in
scale.
Cold
100
Hot

1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
% of
Multiples of Full Load Current

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 259

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

Contactor Life Load Curves

280/1_-_12* = 100-C12*
280/1_-_23* = 100-C23*

Life Load Curves:

AC-3 Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting
Ue = 230…400…460V

260 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP Chapter 11

AC-3 & AC-4 10% AC-4 Mixed operation of squirrel-cage motors

Ue = 400…460V

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 261

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

Maximum Operating Rates:

AC-3 Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting
Ue = 230…460V, Relative operating time 40%, Starting time tA = 0.25 s

AC-4 Inching of squirrel-cage motors

Ue = 230…460V, Starting time tA = 0.25 s

262 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP Chapter 11

Bulletin 284E

Electrical Ratings UL/NEMA IEC

Rated Operation Voltage 380…480V 380…480V
Rate Insulation Voltage 600V 600V
Rated Impulsed Voltage 6 kV 6 kV
Dielectric Withstand 2200V AC 2500V AC
Operating Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Utilization Category N/A AC-3
Protection Against Shock N/A IP2X
Power Circuit
SVC - Performance
3-phase Hp Rating Output Current [A]
284E-FVD1P4Z* 0.5 1.4
Rated Max. Output Operating
Current 284E-FVD2P3Z* 1 2.3
284E-FVD4P0Z* 2 4
284E-FVD6P0Z* 3 6
284E-FVD7P6Z* 5 7.6
Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC (+10%, –15%) A2 (should be grounded at voltage source)
Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V
Rated Impulsed Voltage — 4 kV
Control Circuit
Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC
Overvoltage Category — III
Operating Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Short
Gland Current Circuit
Type Rating Protection 480Y/277V 480V
0.24…1.2 A Sym. Amps rms 65 kA 65 kA
10A, 10B, Max. Circuit Breaker ➍ 100 A 60 A
0.5…2.5 A 10C
Any CR 1.1…5.5 A Max. Fuse 100 A 60 A
or DR Sym. Amps rms 30 kA 30 kA
3.2…16 A 25D Max. Circuit Breaker ➍ 100 A 60 A
Short Circuit Protection Device Max. Fuse 100 A 60 A
Short Circuit (SCPD) Performance Type 1
Protection 0.24…1.2 A Sym. Amps rms 45 kA 65 kA 65 kA
➎ ➋
0.5…2.5 A 10A, 10B, Max. Circuit Breaker
30 A N/A N/A
10C Max. Fuse
1.1…5.5 A - Non-time Delay ➊ 40 A 40 A 40 A
Any RR - Time Delay ➊ 20 A 20 A 20 A
Sym. Amps rms N/A 30 kA 30 kA
3.2…16 A 25D Max. Circuit Breaker ➎ N/A 100 A ➌ 60 A ➌
Max. Fuse ➊ N/A 100 A 60 A
SCPD List Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
➊ Type J, CC, and T fuses only.
➋ Only when used with Bulletin 140U-H frame.
➌ Only when used with Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx frame or smaller.
➍ Bulletin 140U-H or 140G-H circuit breaker, not rated more than 480V, 100 A and a maximum interrupt of 65 000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
➎ When protected by Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-xxx circuit breaker, not rated more than 480/277V, 30 A, having an interrupt rating not less than 45 000 RMS symmetrical amperes .

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 263

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

UL/NEMA IEC
Operating Temperature Range –20…40 °C (–4…104 °F)
Storage and Transportation –25….85 °C (–13…185 °F)
Temperature Range
Altitude ➊ 1000 m
Environmental
Humidity 5…95% (on-condensing)
Pollution Degree 3
Enclosure Ratings NEMA 4/12 IP67
Approximate Shipping Weight 13.6 kg (30 lb)
Resistance to Shock
Operational 15 G
Non-Operational 30 G
Resistance to Vibration
Operational 1 G, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Displacement
Non-Operational 2.5 G, 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) Displacement
Power and Ground Terminals
Primary/Secondary Terminal: Primary/Secondary Terminal:
Wire Size
Mechanical #16…#10 AWG 1.0…4.0 mm2
Primary Terminal: 10.8 lb·in. Primary Terminal: 1.2 N·m
Tightening Torque Secondary Terminal: 4.5 lb·in. Secondary Terminal: 0.5 N·m
Wire Strip Length 9 mm (0.35 in.)
Control
Terminal Wire Size #18…#10 AWG 1.0…4.0 mm2
Tightening Torque 6.2 lb·in. 0.7 N·m
Wire Strip Length 9 mm (0.35 in.)
Recommend 8 mm (5/16 in.) lock shackle or hasp.
Disconnect Lock Out The hasp should not exceed 8 mm (5/16 in.) when closed.
➊ Refer to Altitude Derating on page 269 for derating guide

EMC Emission Levels

10V rms Communications Cables
Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions 10V rms (PE)
150 kHz…80 MHz
Radiated Emissions Class A, Group 1, equivalent to C2 emissions
EMC Immunity Levels
Electrostatic Discharge 4 kV contact and 8 kV Air
Other Rating 10V/m, 80 KHz…1 GHz
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 3V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
1V/m, 2.0 GHz …2.7 GHz
2 kV (Power)
Fast Transient 2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communications and Control)
Surge Transient 1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (Earth)
Internal Fan for 284 Fan L10 Operation data: 80K hr at 40 °C (104 °F)

264 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP Chapter 11

UL/NEMA IEC
UL 508C
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN50178
EN61800-3
Standards Compliance
EN/IEC 60947-4-2
CE Marked per Low Voltage 2006/95/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
ODVA for EtherNet/IP
cULus (File No. E207834,
Certifications
Guide NMMS, NMMS7)

EtherNet/IP Version – Control and I/O Power Requirements

A1/A2 ➊ A3/A2 ➋ A1/A2 ➊ A3/A2 ➋ A3/A2 ➌
Units
W/O HOA W/ HOA
Control Voltage Volts 24V DC
Module Inrush ➍ Amps 0.92 0.30 1.09 0.125 0.295
Module Steady Amps 0.06 0.30 0.23 0.125 0.295
Total Control Power (Pick Up) Watts 22.08 7.20 26.16 3.00 7.08
Total Control Power (Running) Watts 1.44 7.20 5.52 3.00 7.08
Total Control Power (with Dynamic Brake or Output Watts 12 3 8.4
Contactor option)
Total Control Power (with Dynamic Brake and Output Watts 15 3 8.4
Contactor option)
➊ Add power requirements for outputs (1 A max.) to A1/A2.
➋ Add power requirements for inputs (200 mA max.) to A3/A2.
➌ If A1 power is disconnected.
➍ Instantaneous capacitive inrush exists for less than 10 ms, which can exceed 20 A. The power supply must be capable of supporting
this amount of instant power demand when multiple units are turned ON simultaneously. If supplies are weaker, it is recommended
to apply unswitched power (A3-A2) first and after a 2…4 second delay, apply switched power.

Drive Ratings – VFD Output Current vs. Input Current

Output Current [A] Input Current [A]
Frequency 3-Phase kW 3-Phase Hp Sensorless Vector Sensorless Vector
Line Voltage [V] [Hz] Rating Rating Control Control
0.4 — 1.4 2.15
0.75 — 2.3 3.80
380 50 1.5 — 4.0 6.40
2.2 — 6.0 9.00
3.0 — 7.6 12.40
— 0.5 1.4 1.85
— 1 2.3 3.45
460 60 — 2 4.0 5.57
— 3 6.0 8.20
— 5 7.6 12.5

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 265

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

Drive Characteristics
Output Frequency 0…400 Hz (Programmable)
Efficiency 97.5% (Typical)
Sensorless Vector Control
Maximum (kW) Hp Rating/Input Voltage 5 Hp (3.3 kW)/480V AC
Preset Speeds 8
Skip Frequency ✓
StepLogic® Functionality ✓
Timer/Counter Functions ✓

Sensorless Vector Control (SVC)

Protective Specifications – Sensorless Vector Control

Motor Overload Protection I2t overload protection – 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds (provides Class 10 protection)
Overcurrent 200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
Over Voltage 380…460V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)
Under Voltage 380…480V AC Input – Trip occurs @ 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)
Faultless Power Ride Through 100 milliseconds

Control Specifications – Sensorless Vector Control

Carrier Frequency 2…16 kHz. Drive rating is based on 4 kHz.
Frequency Accuracy – Digital Input Within ±0.05% of set output frequency.
Speed Regulation – Open Loop with Slip Compensation ±1% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range
Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including – Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and S Curve.
Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be programmed from 0…600 s in 0.1 s
Accel/Decel increments.
Electronic Motor Overload Protection Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response

Minimum DB Resistance
Drive Rating Minimum DB Resistance
Input Voltage [kW] [Hp] [Ω]
0.4 0.5 97
0.75 1 97
480V, 50/60 Hz,
1.5 2 97
Three-Phase
2.2 3 97
4.0 5 77

266 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP Chapter 11

Motor Overload Trip Curves

Motor OL Current parameter provides Class 10 overload protection. Ambient

insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.

Figure 102 - 284E Overload Trip Curves

No Derate Min Derate Max Derate
100 100 100
% of P133 Motor OL Current

% of P133 Motor OL Current

% of P133 Motor OL Current

80 80 80
60 60 60
40 40 40
20 20 20
0 0 0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of P132 [Motor NP Hertz] % of P132 [Motor NP Hertz] % of P132 [Motor NP Hertz]

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 267

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

UL/NEMA IEC
Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC
Input On-State Voltage Range 10…26V DC
3.0 mA @ 10V DC
Input On-State Current
7.2 mA @ 24V DC
Input Off-State Voltage Range 0…5V DC
Input Off-State Current <1.5 mA
200 Hz
Input Ratings – Sourced Maximum Input Frequency Response (DeviceLogix response is greater than 200 Hz. Network response depends on control system
from Control network performance.)
Circuit (A3/A2) Input Filter – Software Selectable
Off to On Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
On to Off Settable from 0…64 ms in 1 ms increments
Input Compatibility N/A IEC 1+
Number of Inputs 4
Sensor Source
Voltage Status Only 11…26.4V DC from unswitched power
Current Available 50 mA max. per input, 200 mA, any single point
Rated Operation Voltage 26.4V DC
Rate Insulation Voltage 250V
Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC (UL) 2000V AC (IEC)
Type of Control Circuit Solid state sourcing output
Type of Current 24V DC
Conventional Thermal Current Ith 0.5 A each, 1 A max. combined
Peak Output Current Current limited 2-8 amps (5 amps nominal) @ 24V DC
Output Ratings – Sourced Type of Contacts Normally open (N.O.)
from Control Circuit (A1/ Number of Contacts 2
A2)
Load Types Resistive or light inductive
Surge Suppression Integrated diode, clamps @ 35V DC
Thermo-Protection Integrated short circuit and over current protection
Maximum Cycle Rate 30 operations/minute capacitive and inductive loads
Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC
Maximum On-State Voltage @
1.5V DC
Maximum Output
Maximum Off-State Leakage Current 10 μA
— Beacon-based performance including IEEE 1588 end to end transparent clock
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Fault Recovery Ring recovery time is less than 3 ms for a 50 node network
— 2 D-coded, 4-pin female M12 connectors
Ports Embedded switch with 2 ports
IP Address DHCP enabled by default
Ethernet Port DHCP Timeout 30 s
Communication Rate 10/100 Mbs with auto negotiate half duplex and full duplex
•Transported over both TCP and UDP
Data • Min. of 500 I/O packets/second (pps)
• Supports up to 150 concurrent TCP sockets
— Embedded web server
Security Login and password configurable
Web Server
E-mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Configuration Status, diagnostics, and configuration tabs

268 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP Chapter 11

UL/NEMA IEC
Supports scheduled (Class 1) and unscheduled (Class 3 & UCMM) connections
6 - Class 3 connections are supported simultaneously
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC.
Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established.
Device Connections Class 1 Connection API: 2…3200 ms
Class 3 Connection API: 100…10 000 ms
20 ms Request Packet Interval (RPI) default
3 concurrent Encapsulation sessions
TCP port supports 5 concurrent incoming connections

Altitude Derating Altitude Rating for Bulletin 280, 281

• No altitude derating up to 2000 m (6562 ft)

Altitude Rating for Bulletin 284

• 0.5 Hp: No Derating up to 3000 m (9843 ft)
• 1 Hp: No Derating up to 3000 m (9843 ft)
• 2 Hp: Derate 1% per 100 m (328 ft) above 1000 m (3281 ft)
• 3 Hp: No Derating up to 3000 m (9843 ft)
• 5 Hp: Derate 1% per 100 m (328 ft) above 1000 m

Example: Application requires 2600 m for a 5Hp ArmorStart

• 2600 m-1000 m= 1600 m
• 1600/100 = 16
• 16 * 1%= 16%. Derate output amps by 16%
• (1-.16)*7.6amp = 6.4amp

It is possible to extend the operational range of the units if the ambient

temperature is lower than 40 °C (104 °F), or if line reactors are used.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 269

Chapter 11 Specifications for ArmorStart Controllers with EtherNet/IP

270 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Chapter 12

Accessories

Industrial Ethernet Media D Code Connectivity (M12) – 1585D

Patchcords and Cordsets IP67

Cat. No.
M12 D Code Connector Type Unshielded

Male Straight
to 1585D-M4TBDM- ➊
Male Straight

Male Straight
to 1585D-M4TBDE- ➊
Male Right Angle

Male Right Angle

to 1585D-E4TBDE- ➊
Male Right Angle

Male Straight
to 1585D-M4TBDF- ➊
Female Straight

➊ Available in 0.3, 0.6, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 271

Chapter 12 Accessories

Patchcords and Cordsets IP20 to IP67

Cat. No.
Front Mount Receptacle Connector Type Unshielded

Female Front Mount

to 1585D-D4TBJM- ➊
RJ45

Transition Cable Connector Type Unshielded

Male Straight
to 1585D-M4TBJM- ➊
RJ45

➊ Available in 0.3, 0.6, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, and increments of 5 meters up to 75 meters.

Note: See www.ab.com/networks/media/ethernet to learn more about Industrial

Ethernet Media.

M12 to RJ45 Bulkhead Adapter – 1585A Description Cat. No.

• Transition from IP20 environment to IP67 environment

• In-cabinet connectivity with RJ45 connector providing On-Machine solution with M12 D Code
connector 1585A-DD4JD
• Differential 100 ohm terminators that are used for unused pairs
• Cat 5e

272 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Accessories Chapter 12

Sensor Media
Description Description I/O Connection Pin Count Connector Cat. No.
Straight Female
889D-F4ACDM- ➊
DC Micro Straight Male
Input/Output
Patchcord Straight Female
889D-F4ACDE- ➊
EtherNet/IP Right Angle Male
4-Pin
Communications Straight Female 879D-F4ACDM- ➊
DC Micro V- Input
Cable Right Angle Female 879D-R4ACM- ➊

➊ Replace symbol with desired length in meters (for example, Cat. No. 889D-F4ACDM-1 for a 1 m cable). Standard cable lengths: 1
m, 2 m, 5 m, and 10 m.

Sensor Wiring

Sensor Wiring Pin 1: +24V (A3 or DNET)

Pin 2: Input 0
1
)
Brown
+ Pin 3: Common
2 White Pin 4: Input 1
)
3 Pin 5: NC (No Connection)
) Black
−
4 Blue
)
Female Input
Quick-Disconnect Sensor Male
ArmorStart
Connection
Connection

Motor and Brake Cables

Description Rating Length m (ft) Cat. No.

Motor Cable Cordsets

3 (9.8) 280-MTR22-M3
4 (13.1) 280-MTR22-M34
6 (19.6) 280-MTR22-M6
8 (26.2) 280-MTR22-M68
90° M22 Motor Cordset IP67/NEMA Type 4
10 (32.8) 280-MTR22-M10
12 (39.4) 280-MTR22-M12
14 (45.9) 280-MTR22-M14
20 (65.6) 280-MTR22-M20

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 273

Chapter 12 Accessories

Description Rating Length m (ft) Cat. No.

3 (9.8) 280-MTR35-M3
6 (19.6) 280-MTR35-M6
90° M35 Motor Cordset IP67/NEMA Type 4 10 (32.8) 280-MTR35-M10
14 (45.9) 280-MTR35-M14
20 (65.6) 280-MTR35-M20
Motor Cable Cordsets, High Flex
3 (9.8) 280-MTRF22-M3
4 (13.1) 280-MTRF22-M4
6 (19.6) 280-MTRF22-M6
90° M22 Motor Cordset IP67/NEMA Type 4 8 (26.2) 280-MTRF22-M8
10 (32.8) 280-MTRF22-M10
14 (45.9) 280-MTRF22-M14
20 (65.6) 280-MTRF22-M20
Motor Cable Cordsets, Shielded VFD Motor Cable Cordsets, Shielded (VFD)
3 (9.8) 284-MTRS22-M3
4 (13.1) 284-MTRS22-M4
6 (19.6) 284-MTRS22-M6
90° M22 Motor Cordset IP67/NEMA Type 4 8 (26.2) 284-MTRS22-M8
10 (32.8) 284-MTRS22-M10
12 (39.4) 284-MTRS22-M12
14 (45.9) 284-MTRS22-M14
Motor Cable Cordsets, Extended Source/Control Brake
1 (3.3) 285-BRC25-M1
3 (9.8) 285-BRC25-M3
4 (13.1) 285-BRC25-M4
6 (19.6) 285-BRC25-M6
90° M25 Source Brake Cable IP67/NEMA Type 4 8 (26.2) 285-BRC25-M8
10 (32.8) 285-BRC25-M10
12 (39.4) 285-BRC25-M12
14 (45.9) 285-BRC25-M14
20 (65.6) 285-BRC25-M120
Extended Source/Control Brake Cable Cordsets, High Flex
3 (9.8) 285-BRCF25-M3
6 (19.6) 285-BRCF25-M6
90° M25 Source Brake Cable IP67/NEMA Type 4 10 (32.8) 285-BRCF25-M10
14 (45.9) 285-BRCF25-M14
20 (65.6) 285-BRCF25-M20
Dynamic Brake Cable
M22 Dynamic Brake Cable IP67/NEMA Type 4 3 (9.8) 285-DBK22-M3
(DB Option)

274 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Accessories Chapter 12

Description Rating Length m (ft) Cat. No.

Motor Cable Patchcords

1 (3.3) 280-MTR22-M1D
90° Male/Straight Female M22 IP67/NEMA Type 4
3 (9.8) 280-MTR22-M3D
1 (3.3) 280-MTR35-M1D
90° Male/Straight Female M35 IP67/NEMA Type 4
3 (9.8) 280-MTR35-M3D
Motor Cable Patchcords, Shielded (VFD)
1 (3.3) 284-MTRS22-M1D
90° Male/Straight Female M22 IP67/NEMA Type 4
3 (9.8) 284-MTRS22-M3D
Extended Source/Control Brake Cable Patchcords
1 (3.3) 285-BRC25-M1D
3 (9.8) 285-BRC25-M3D
4 (13.1) 285-BRC25-M4D
6 (19.6) 285-BRC25-M6D
90° Male/Straight Female M25 IP67/NEMA Type 4 8 (26.2) 285-BRC25-M8D
10 (32.8) 285-BRC25-M10D
12 (39.4) 285-BRC25-M12D
14 (45.9) 285-BRC25-M14D
20 (65.6) 285-BRC25-M20D
Receptacle
Straight Male with wire IP67/NEMA Type 4 0.5 (1.6) 285-M25M-M05

Three-Phase Power
Field-Installed Receptacles
Female Male
Pin Count Assembly Rating Certifications Cable Diameter Cat. No. Cat. No.
16 AWG, 600V, 10 A 0.28…0.47 in. 280-FAM22F 280-FAM22M
14 AWG, 600V, 15 A UL Listed UL 2237
4-Pin (File No. E318496, Guide PVVA)
10 AWG, 600V, 25 A ➊ 0.48…0.81 in. 280-FAM35F 280-FAM35M

➊ When used with Cat. No. 280-PWRM24_-M* [E,F,G,or H], use Cat. No. 280-FAM35* and the corresponding mating receptacle 280-
M35F-M* .

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 275

Chapter 12 Accessories

Sealing Caps

EtherNet/IP
Description
Input Output
Plastic Sealing Cap (M12) ➊ 1485A-M12 1485A-M12
Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap
— 1485A-C1
(M22) for 10A protection*
Motor Connector Aluminum Sealing Cap
— 889A-QMCAP
(M35) for 25A protection
Dynamic Brake Connector (M22) — 1485A-C1
Source/Control Brake Cap (M25) — 280-BRCAP-M25

➊ To achieve IP67 rating, sealing caps must be installed on all unused I/O connections.

Handle and Cord Accessories

Description Cat. No.

Locking Tag
Padlock attachment to the lockable handles 140M-C-M3
Up to three padlocks 4…8 mm (5/16 in. diameter) shackle

Cord Grips for use with CR/CRW Gland

Thomas & Betts Cord Grip Thomas & Betts
0.75in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 0.75in. Lock Nut Part No.
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in. 2931NM

Thomas & Betts Cord Grip Thomas & Betts

1 in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 1 in. Lock Nut Part No.
Cable Range: 0.31…0.56 in. 2940NM

Cord Grips for use with DR/DRW Gland

Thomas & Betts Cord Grip Thomas & Betts

0.5 in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 0.5 in. Lock Nut Part No.
Cable Range: 0.5…0.75 in. 2922NM

Thomas & Betts Cord Grip Thomas & Betts

1 in. Strain Relief Cord Connector, 1 in. Lock Nut Part No.
Cable Range: 0.70…0.95in. 2942NM

276 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Accessories Chapter 12

Dynamic Braking Resistors Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Minimum Resistance and
Recommended Modules for Option DB

Table 50 - Dynamic Brake Specification for Option DB (IP20 Resistor)

Application Type 1 Application Type 2
Drive and Max Braking
Motor Size kW Resistance Continuous Max Energy Torque % of Braking Torque Braking Torque
[Hp] Cat. No. ➊ Ohms ±5% Power [kW ] [kJ ] Motor % of Motor Duty Cycle % % of Motor Duty Cycle %
380…480 Volt AC Input Drives
0.37 (0.5) AK-R2-360P500 360 0.086 17 305% 100% 47% 150% 31%
0.75 (1) AK-R2-360P500 360 0.086 17 220% 100% 23% 150% 15%
1.5 (2) AK-R2-360P500 360 0.086 17 110% 100% 12% 110% 11%
2.2 (3) AK-R2-120P1K2 120 0.26 52 197% 100% 24% 150% 16%
4 (5) AK-R2-120P1K2 120 0.26 52 124% 100% 13% 124% 10%

➊ The resistors that are listed in this table are rated for 5% duty cycle.

Note 1: Always check resistor ohmic value against minimum resistance for drive
being used.

Note 2: Duty cycle that is listed, is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration.
For constant regen. at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed.
Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque
where possible.
Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up
to a maximum of 150%.

Note 3: Dynamic brake modules have an IP20 rating.

ATTENTION: Resistor temperature may exceed 200 °C (392 °F).

ATTENTION: AC drives do not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors,
especially in the case of brake IGBT failure. A risk of fire exists if external braking
resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be protected from over
temperature or the protective circuit shown, or equivalent, must be supplied.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 277

Chapter 12 Accessories

ArmorStart Bulletin 284 Option DB (IP20) Resistor Dimensions

Cat. No. Weight

[kg (lb)]
AK-R2-091P500, AK-R2-047P500, AK-R2-360P500 1.1 (2.5)
AK-R2-030P1K2, AK-R2-120P1K2 2.7 (6)

Dimensions are in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used

for manufacturing purposes.

Figure 103 - Bulletin 284E Dynamic Brake Module Approximate Dimensions

Frame A Frame B
30.0 61.0
17.0 (1.18) 60.0 31.0 (2.40) 59.0
(0.67) (2.36) (1.22) (2.32)
US
C

US
C

316.0 335.0 386.0 405.0

(12.44) (13.19) (15.20) (15.94)
AUTOMATION
ROCKWELL

SURFACES MAY BE
AUTOMATION

Thermostat
ROCKWELL

13.0
(0.51)

AK-R2-091P500 AK-R2-030P1K2
AK-R2-047P500 AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-360P500

278 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Accessories Chapter 12

Recommended thermostat control wiring to prevent dynamic brake overheating.

Figure 104 - Thermostat Control Wiring

R (L1)

3-Phase
Power S (L2)

T (L3)
(M)
Contactor

Power Off Power On

Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat

Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) Recommended Dynamic Brake

Modules for Option DB1 (IP67 Resistor)

Application Type 1 Application Type 2

Drive and Max Braking Braking Braking
Motor Size Resistance Continuous Max Energy Torque % of Torque % of Duty Torque % of Duty
kW Cat. No. ➊ Ohms ± 5% Power kW kJ Motor Motor Cycle % Motor Cycle %
380…480 Volt AC Input Drives
0.37 (0.5) 284R-360P500-M➋ 360 0.086 17 305% 100% 47% 150% 31%
0.75 (1) 284R-360P500-M➋ 360 0.086 17 220% 100% 23% 150% 15%
1.5 (2) 284R-360P500-M➋ 360 0.086 17 110% 100% 12% 110% 11%
2.2 (3) 284R-120P1K2-M➋ 120 0.26 52 197% 100% 24% 150% 16%
4 (5) 284R-120P1K2-M➋ 120 0.26 52 124% 100% 13% 124% 10%

➊ Drive rating and DB part numbers are not interchangeable. Only use specified resistor. Customer is responsible to evaluate if
performance meets application requirement.
➋ Length is user-selectable based on a suffix added to the catalog number. For a length of 500±10 mm, add -M05 to the end of the
catalog number. For a length of 1000±10 mm, add -M1 to the end of the catalog number.

Note: Duty Cycle that is listed, is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration.
For constant regen at full speed, duty cycle capability is half of what is listed.
Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100% braking torque
where possible.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 279

Chapter 12 Accessories

Application Type 2 represents more than 100% braking torque where possible, up
to a maximum of 150%.

Figure 105 - Bulletin 284 Dynamic Brake Resistor Approximate Dimensions

Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.

B
C D

F
G

A B C D E F G H J
Cat. No. mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.)
284R-091P500 215 ± 5 235 ± 5
284R-120P1K2 89 ± 3 (8.46 ± 0.2) M05 = 0.5 m (9.25 ± 0.2) 60 ± 2 127 12.54 60 ± 2 50 ± 1.5
(3.5 ± 0.12) M1 = 1 m ➊ (2.36 ± 0.08) (5) (0.49) (2.36 ± 0.08) (1.97 ± 0.06)
420 ± 5 440 ± 5
284R-120P1K2
(16.54 ± 0.2) (17.32 ± 0.2)

➊ Length is user-selectable based on the suffix added to the catalog number. For a length of 500 ±10 mm, add
-M05 to the end of the catalog number. For a length of 1000 ±10 mm, add -M1 to the end of the catalog number.

Note: The customer must protect the resistor in the event of a shorted switch in
the VFD. This is done via PLC control. An example ControlLogix program can
be downloaded from http://samplecode.rockwellautomation.com

280 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Appendix A

Applying More Than One ArmorStart

Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit
on Industrial Machinery

Introduction In the general multiple-motor branch circuit case, installing a motor controller
that is not listed for group installation, violates the NEC and NFPA 79.

Each ArmorStart motor controller is listed for group installation. This appendix
explains how to use this listing to apply ArmorStart motor controllers in
multiple-motor branch circuits.

Background The NEC®is NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. NFPA 79 is the Electrical
Standard for Industrial Machinery. The 2012 NEC refers to NFPA 79 in Article
670's first informational note.

Group installation means that a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker
protects a branch circuit that supplies two or more motors and their controllers.
Both the NEC and NFPA 79 have rules for installing controllers in these
multiple-motor branch circuits. Both also have special rules for controllers that
are not listed for group installation and general rules for those that are.

The special rules for controllers that are not listed for group installation restrict
some variables. These restricting rules are found in the NEC's 430.53(A),
430.53(B), and 430.53(C)(2)(b) and NFPA 79's 7.2.10.2, 7.2.10.3, and the
7.2.10.4(1) condition “…does not exceed that permitted by 7.2.10.1…”. . For
example, for 480V motors, the NEC's 430.53(A) limits each motor's rating to
1 Hp or less and the protective device rating to 15 amperes or less. The following
will not address these special cases.

The following addresses this general case: if a motor controller is listed for group
installation, the NEC and NFPA 79 permit (1) installing it in a branch circuit
with other motors having any mix of horsepower ratings and (2) protecting all
wiring and controllers with a single set of fuses or a single circuit breaker large
enough to operate this mix of motors. The rules for this general case are found in
the NEC's 430.53(C) and 430.53(D) and NFPA 79's 7.2.10.4 and 7.2.10.5.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 281

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

For this general case, the following conclusions apply:

Importance of a motor controller being listed for group installation

• Unless a motor controller is listed for group installation, its listing covers
only individual motor circuit installation, and installing it in a general
multiple-motor circuit violates the NEC and NFPA 79.
• This listing is physically important because it ensures the controller's short
circuit current rating is valid with the larger fuses and circuit breakers
necessary to operate the multiple-motor circuit.
• If a motor controller is not listed for group installation, the installer must
add fuses or a circuit breaker in each motor controller's input circuit.
• So, the group installation listing is important because it ensures the
controller's short circuit current rating applies to the multiple-motor
branch circuit and eliminates the requirement for the additional input
circuit protective device(s).

From the perspective of the ArmorStart product family, being listed for group
installation means one set of fuses or one circuit breaker may protect a branch
circuit that has two or more of these motor controllers that are connected to it.
This appendix refers to this type of branch circuit as a multiple-motor branch
circuit. The circuit topology that is shown in Figure 106, is one configuration,
but not the only possible configuration, of a multiple-motor branch circuit. In
these circuits, a single set of fuses (or a single circuit breaker) protects multiple
motors, their controllers, and the circuit conductors. The motors may be any
mixture of power ratings and the controllers may be any mixture of motor
controller technologies (magnetic motor controllers and variable-frequency AC
drive controllers).

This appendix addresses only NFPA 79 applications. This is not because these
products are only suitable for industrial machinery, but because industrial
machinery is their primary market. In fact, while all versions of the ArmorStart
products may be applied on industrial machinery, the versions that have the
Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option may also be used in applications governed
by NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), (see “ArmorStart Product
Family”).

282 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Listing requirements for a “factory assembly” and “separate

assemblies”
• The first sentence of the NEC's 430.53(C) relies on two terms that the
NEC does not define: “”factory assembly” and “separate assemblies”. But
the text also requires both to be “listed”: “listed factory assembly” or
“separate assemblies listed for such use”. 45A of UL 508C contains the
430.53(C) listing requirements for drives. 52A of UL 508 contains the
430.53(C) listing requirements for contactor-based motor controllers.
Neither contains the term “factory assembly” or the term “separate
assemblies” and each requires this marking: “Suitable for motor group
installation…”.
• Therefore, the terms “factory assembly” and “separate assemblies” do not
change the listing requirements. All drives and contactor-based motor
controllers that are listed for 430.53(C) installation are marked “Suitable
for motor group installation…”.

In the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79, motor controllers that are listed for group
installation may be installed in multiple-motor branch circuits according to
either of two alternative sets of requirements. The first is found in 7.2.10.4(2),
the second in 7.2.10.4(3). The requirements of 7.2.10.4(3) are similar to those in
430.53(C) of NFPA 70, while the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2) are found only in
NFPA 79. This appendix explains the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2), rather than
those of 7.2.10.4(3), because this is the simpler method to use when applying the
ArmorStart family of motor controllers.

The user must determine the requirements – NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 – to use for
the application. When making this determination, it is necessary to understand
the ArmorStart product characteristics and useful to understand the definition of
industrial machinery. The section of this appendix, “ArmorStart Product Family”,
specifies whether a motor controller is suitable for installation according to
NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 (or both). The definition of industrial machinery is found
in 3.3.56 of NFPA 79 and 670.2 of Article 670, Industrial Machinery, in NFPA
70.

These conventions are used throughout this appendix. First, although all
equipment is connected to a three-phase electrical supply, all figures are shown as
one-line diagrams. Second, although all ArmorStart motor controllers are listed
for group installation with both fuses and a specific family of inverse time circuit
breakers, this appendix considers only fuses. This is done to avoid repetitive
explanations with minor, but necessary qualifications, for circuit breakers.
Generally, the principles for selecting the fuses also apply to selecting inverse time
circuit breakers. Third, all references, unless indicated otherwise, are to NFPA 79
– 2012.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 283

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Note: The following example uses an ArmorStart LT circuit. This provides a

more comprehensive example,

Figure 106 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit

Electrical Supply

Disconnecting
Means
Final
Overcurrent Single Set of Fuses
Device
NFPA 79, 3.3.10 Branch Circuit. The Circuit
Conductors Between the Final Overcurrent Device
Protecting the Circuit and the Outlet(s). [70:100]

Any Mixture of Motor Controller

Technologies
½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294
Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload
Class 10 Class 10 Class 10/15/20 Class 10/15/20 Class 10

Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate*

* Each Controller is Listed for Group

Installation with Specified Maximum
Protection

1/2 Hp 2 Hp 5 Hp 5 Hp 1 Hp

Two or More Motors with any

Mixture or Power Ratings

ArmorStart Product Family This section contains a brief description of the attributes of the ArmorStart LT
motor controllers that are relevant to applying them in multiple-motor branch
circuits. These same relative attributes are can be assumed for ArmorStart.
controllers

The term motor controller refers to the device that stops and starts the motor.
The ArmorStart product family consists of two types of motor controllers. The
Bulletin 290 and 291 controllers are magnetic motor controllers that use an
electromechanical contactor to stop and start the motor. The Bulletin 294 motor
controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to stop, start and vary the speed of
the motor. This appendix refers to the Bulletin 290, 291 and 294 products as
either motor controllers or just controllers.

Each ArmorStart motor controller incorporates an integrated overload relay and

motor disconnecting means. The Underwriters Laboratories’ (UL) listing for
each motor controller confirms that the motor controller – including its integral
overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is suitable for motor group
installation.

284 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

The suitability of each ArmorStart LT motor controller for installation according

to either NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 depends on the means of connecting the power
circuit wiring. All controllers are suitable for installation in multiple-motor
branch circuits on industrial machinery according to 7.2.10.4 of NFPA 79. The
controllers that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option are also suitable
for installation in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 430.53(C) and
430.53(D) of NFPA 70 (NEC). The controllers that have the Power Media
Gland Plate Option are suitable for installation only on industrial machinery.
These versions are limited to industrial machinery because the UL listing for the
power media connectors themselves and their matching cable assemblies covers
installation only on industrial machinery.

Multiple-Motor Branch Multiple-motor branch circuits, like that shown in Figure 106, have this
fundamental tradeoff: protecting more than one controller with a single set
Circuits and Motor of fuses requires more electrical and mechanical robustness in each controller.
Controllers Listed for Group
Installation – General In exchange for eliminating the cost and space necessary for a dedicated set of
fuses in front of each controller, the construction of each controller itself must be
more robust. For the circuit configuration shown in Figure 106 to be practical,
the ampere rating of the fuse must be large enough to operate all motors, without
opening, under normal starting and running conditions. This rating of fuse must
be larger than the rating permitted to protect a circuit that supplies only a single
motor and its controller. In general, as the rating of the fuse increases, so does the
magnitude of fault currents that flow until the fuse opens. This higher magnitude
of fault current results in more damage to the controller. Therefore, the
additional controller robustness is necessary to withstand these higher fault
currents, without controller damage, that could result in a shock
or fire hazard.

Consequently, to the controller, being listed for group installation mostly means
the UL testing is performed with fuses that have this practical, and higher,
ampere rating. This testing verifies that it is safe to apply this controller in a
multiple-motor branch circuit, provided the fuse is of the same class and does
not have a rating exceeding that marked on the controller.

The example in Figure 107, illustrates this increase in the maximum ampere
rating of fuse that is permitted to protect a controller. This example compares the
rating of the fuse used in the UL testing of two variable-frequency AC drive-
based motor controllers. Both controllers have a rated power of 0.5 Hp and a
rated output current of 1.5 A. The controller that is shown on the left is intended
for installation in individual-motor branch circuits. The controller that is shown
on the right is the ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294 controller that must be listed for
group installation to be installed, as intended, in multiple-motor branch circuits.
For this example, assume that all testing is done with fuses of the same class.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 285

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

The UL investigation of both controllers is done according to UL 508C, Power

Conversion Equipment. The controllers are connected to the test supply through
the three-phase conductors and equipment grounding conductor and then
covered with cotton in areas that are likely to vent hot gases and sparks during
the tests. During the test, electrical faults are impressed on the output of, and
internal to, these variable-frequency AC drive-based controllers. Increasing the
ampere rating of the fuses increases the magnitude of the fault currents that flow
through, and damage, the controller before the fuses open. Afterwards, the
damage to the controller is evaluated to determine whether a potential shock or
fire hazard exists when protected by fuses having this ampere rating. One
criterion of the evaluation is the examination of the equipment grounding
conductor that must not open during the test as this could leave exposed
conductive parts in an energized state (shock hazard). Another criterion is that
the cotton must not ignite as this indicates the expulsion from the controller
of hot gases or molten metal fragments (fire hazard).

Referring to the controller on the left, UL 508C permits the individual-motor

testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to
protect an individual-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70 and
NFPA 79, this is 400 percent of the full-load current rating of the largest motor
that the controller can supply. In UL 508C, this is taken to be 400 percent of the
rated output current of the controller, or 6 A.

Referring to the controller on the right, UL 508C permits the group installation
testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to
protect a multiple-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70
(430.53(C)) and NFPA 79 (7.2.10.4(3)), this is 250 amperes. This value, derived
from the installation requirements of 430.53(C) and 430.53(D) of NFPA 70, is
determined by the largest size of power conductor that the ArmorStart LT
controller can accept, 10 AWG. Because the UL 508C test covers all possibilities
in NFPA 70 and NFPA 79, it permits the maximum value of 250 amperes. This
covers 7.2.10.4(2), which permits only 100 amperes. However, in this case, the
manufacturer, Rockwell Automation, chose to test and mark with the lower value
of 45 A. This value was chosen as the tradeoff between the maximum number
and type of controllers in the branch circuit – limited by the maximum fuse
rating - and the electrical and mechanical robustness engineered into each
controller.

Therefore, to make its use in the multiple-motor branch circuit of Figure 106
practical, the 0.5 Hp, Bulletin 294 controller was engineered to be robust enough
to safely contain the damage when protected by a fuse having a rating
of 45 A, rather than just 6 A.

286 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Figure 107 - UL508C Variable-Frequency AC Drive Motor Controller Evaluation

Short-Circuit Test Circuit Short-Circuit Test Circuit

UL 508C – Manufacturer’s choice -

test with 6 Reduce rating for test
ampere max to 45 A Maximum
conductor size
= 10 AWG
½ HP Motor Max = 400% * Rated Output Current Max rating for 10 AWG Bulletin 294
Controller = 400% * 1.5 A = 6 A = 250 A ½ HP Motor
Controller
Max permitted rating Suitable for
Max permitted for test fuse based motor group
rating for test installation
on maximum size
Rated Output fuse based on of power conductors Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A Rated Output Current = 1.5 A

6A fuse max
Current 45 A fuse max

Maximum
conductor size
= 10 AWG

Motor Motor

Maximum Fuse Ampere This section uses Figure 108 to explain the requirements from 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) that are relevant to, and permit, the multiple-motor branch circuit of
Rating According to Figure 106.
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
The following is the complete text of 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and an
abbreviated version of Table 51 from the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79. The table is
abbreviated to cover the size of conductors that are generally relevant to the
ArmorStart LT motor controllers.

Complete Text

“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors or one or more motor(s) and other load(s), and
their control equipment shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch
circuit where short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a single
inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses, provided the following
conditions under (1) and either (2) or (3) are met:

(1) Each motor controller and overload device is either listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection or selected such
that the ampere rating of the motor branch short-circuit and ground-fault
protective device does not exceed that permitted by 7.2.10.1 for that individual
motor controller or overload device and corresponding motor load.

(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection
device does not exceed the values in Table 51 for the smallest conductor in the
circuit.”

(3) …(not considered in this appendix)

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 287

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Table 51 - Abbreviated Table 7.2.10.4

Table 7.2.10.4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short-Circuit
Protective Device for Power Circuits Group Installations
Conductor Size (AWG) Maximum Rating
Fuse or Inverse Time*
Circuit Breaker
(amperes)
… …
… …
14 60
12 80
10 100
8 150
6 200
… …

The following text and Figure 108 provide an explanation of 7.2.10.4(1) and (2).
In the following, the text not relevant to Figure 106 is replaced by ellipsis points
(…). Then each individual requirement is underlined and followed by an
underlined letter in parentheses. This underlined letter in the following text
corresponds to the letter in Figure 108.

“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors (a)…and their control equipment (b) shall be
permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit (c) where short-circuit and
ground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a
single set of fuses (d), provided the following conditions under (1) and…(2)…are
met:

(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation
with specified maximum branch-circuit protection (e) …

(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection
device does not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4 for the smallest conductor in
the circuit.” (f )

Summarizing the requirements relevant to Figure 106: 7.2.10.4(1) and

7.2.10.4(2) permit two or more ArmorStart LT motor controllers to be installed
in a single branch circuit provided (1) all motor controllers are listed for group
installation, (2) the fuse does not exceed the maximum rating that Table 51
permits to protect the smallest conductor and (3) the fuse complies with the
maximum fuse ratings of all controllers.

288 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Figure 108 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit

“The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit

and ground-fault protection device does
d “...a single set
of fuses…” f not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4
for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
Branch circuit (shown as dotted lines) –
all of the conductors on the load side c “...shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit…”
of the single set of fuses

“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”

“Each motor controller
e and overload device is ... Max. Ratings
listed for group Sym. Amps RMS 5 KA 10 KA
Fuse 45A 45A*
installation with specified
maximum branch-circuit * Type CC, J and T fuses only
protection…” ½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294
Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload
e Class 10 Class 10 Class 10/15/20 Class 10/15/20 Class 10
Markings that satisfy
Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate*
7.2.10.4(1)
“... and their control
b equipment … ”

1/2 HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC =
1.1 A** 3.4 A** 7.6 A** 7.6 A** 2.1 A**

a “Two or more motors ...”

* Each controller is listed for group installation with the same specified maximum protection

Explanatory Example The example addresses the overcurrent protection of the conductors, controllers
and motors. Protection for three overcurrent conditions is considered: motor
running overloads, short-circuit (line-to-line) faults, and ground-faults (line-to-
ground). The short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection is governed by
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and explained in Requirements 1,2 and 3 and
Figure 109. The overload protection, explained in Requirement 4, is governed by
7.3.1 and 7.3.1.1. Overload coordination depends on each conductor having the
minimum ampacity given by 12.5.3 and 12.5.4. The method for determining this
minimum ampacity is explained in Requirement 5 and Figure 110.

The example branch circuit is shown in Figure 109 and Figure 110. The circuit
topology consists of a set of 10 AWG conductors that supply multiple sets of
14 AWG conductors. Each set of 14 AWG conductors supply a controller and
motor. These conductor sizes are chosen to be the smallest conductors that have
sufficient ampacity, without derating, for the loads each must carry. All wiring is
customer-supplied, rather than the ArmorConnect Power Media, because all
controllers have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option. Fuses protect the
branch circuit.

The example addresses five basic requirements that the motor controllers, fuses,
and conductors must satisfy. The letters in the circles on Figure 109 and
Figure 110 are referenced in the explanations as letters in parentheses. Ellipses
points (…)
are used to replace NFPA 79 text that is not applicable to the multiple-motor
branch circuit that is shown in Figure 109 and Figure 110. Unless indicated, all
text is from NFPA 79.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 289

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Figure 109 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit —

Conductor and Controller Protection

Electrical Supply -
480Y/277V
Available Fault Current
Sym. Amps RMS 9 KA

Disconnecting
Means

Fuses
a
45 A Max,
Branch short-circuit
CC, J or T
and ground-fault
d protection device
Combined Load Conductors 10 AWG
Controller
ratings
further
restrict the
fuse
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG
Max. Ratings
Sym. Amps RMS 5 KA 10 KA
Fuse 45A 45A*

* Type CC, J and T fuses only ½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP

Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294
a Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload
Class 10 Class 10 Class 10/15/20 Class 10/15/20 Class 10
Compare to
d controller max
Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate*
fuse ratings
b

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG
Conductor
Table 7.2.10.4
Conductor c protection
Max protection -
Fuse 60 A max, “Smallest
AWG (A) any class Determine conductor”
- - fuse class
14 60 and max
12 80 rating for
10 100 1/2 HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
conductor FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC =
8 150
- - protection 1.1 A** 3.4 A** 7.6 A** 7.6 A** 2.1 A**
7.2.10.4(2) -
“smallest
conductor in
the circuit” * Each controller is suitable for group installation with the same maximum ratings of fuse.
= 14 AWG
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011

Figure 110 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit Minimum

Conductor Ampacity
Electrical Supply
Minimum Required Ampacity (MRA)
MRA = 1.25 * Max {controller input currents} + Sum {remaining controller input currents}
Controller input currents = {I1,I2,I3,I4,I5}
Max controller input current = I3 = I4, choose I3 as Max (either is ok)
c MRA = 1.25 * I3 + (I1 + I2 + I4 + I5}
= 1.25 * 7.6 A + (1.8 A + 5.5 A + 7.6 A + 3.0 A) = 27.4 A
Combined Load Conductors 10 AWG
Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. =
125% * 1.8 A 125% * 5.5 A 125% * 7.6 A a 125% * 7.6 A b 125% * 3.0 A
I1 = I2 = I3 = I4 = I5 =
14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG
1.8 A 5.5 A 7.6 A 7.6 A 3.0 A

½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin
294 294 291 290 294

1.1 A 3.4 A 7.6 A 7.6 A 2.1 A

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. =
125% * 1.1A 125% * 3.4 A 125% * 7.6 A a 125% * 7.6 A b 125% * 2.1 A

1/2 HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC =
1.1 A** 3.4 A** 7.6 A** 7.6 A** 2.1 A**

** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011

290 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

1. Requirement One: Controller Ratings — The motor controllers and

overload relays must be listed for group installation with specified maximum
branch-circuit protection.

Text: “7.2.10.4(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”

Analysis: To apply the ArmorStart LT motor controllers in the multiple-motor

branch circuit that is shown in Figure 109, 7.2.10.4(1) must be satisfied; each
controller must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-
circuit protection. The UL listing for each ArmorStart LT motor controller
confirms that it – including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting
means — is suitable for motor group installation with specified fuses, satisfying
7.2.10.4(1). The Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers are listed for group
installation according to UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment. The Bulletin
294E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment.

Referring to Figure 110 (a) indicates the markings on the nameplate that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1). The marking “Suitable for Motor Group Installation” satisfies the
requirement to be listed for group installation. The ratings that are located
beneath the description “Max. Ratings” are the specified maximum branch
circuit protection. The (a) beside the fuse(s) indicates that the maximum
protection specified on the nameplate applies to these fuse(s).

2. Requirement Two: Conductor Short-circuit and Ground-Fault

Protection — The fuse must protect the conductors for short-circuit faults
and ground faults.

Text: “7.2.10.4(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-
fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 51 for the smallest
conductor in the circuit.”

Analysis: Referring to Figure 109, 7.2.10.4(2) must be satisfied. The fuse, as

indicated by the description in Figure 109 (a), is the branch short-circuit and
ground-fault protection device. The word circuit means the branch circuit.
The conductors of the branch circuit start at the load side of the fuses and end
at the input to the motor, including the conductors between the motor
controllers and the motor. The smallest conductor in the circuit is any one
of the 14 AWG conductors that supply each controller and motor. The note
at (b) indicates the conductor protection is based on the smallest conductor,
14 AWG. Referring to Table 51 a 14 AWG conductor may be used in a circuit
that is protected by a fuse of any class having a rating of 60 amperes or less (c).
Therefore, selecting a fuse of any class with a maximum rating of 60 amperes
satisfies the conductor protection requirement of 7.2.10.4(2).

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 291

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Supplementary Note 1: The value that is specified in Table 51 is the maximum

rating of fuse that 7.2.10.4(2) permits to protect that size of conductor. The
rating of the fuse may be set to the maximum value given by Table 51 for the
smallest conductor without further justification. However, if any controller, or
other component, has a maximum rating of fuse that is less than the Table 51
value, the maximum rating of the fuse protecting the branch circuit must be
reduced to the lower value so that all components are applied according to their
ratings. For example, as shown in Requirement Three, a lower value may be
necessary to protect the motor controller within its ratings because its specified
maximum protection is less than the rating that Table 51 permits for the smallest
circuit conductor. Another reason to use a lower rating of fuse is to provide more
conservative conductor and controller protection. However, in all cases it is
important to ensure the ampere rating is sufficient to start and operate the motors
without nuisance opening of the fuse(s).

Supplementary Note 2: The note at (b) points to the conductor on the output
of the 0.5 Hp Bulletin 294E controller to emphasize that the smallest conductor
in the circuit includes the conductors between each controller and motor. This
includes the output of the variable-frequency AC drive-based Bulletin 294E
controllers; even though these drives have electronic short-circuit protection.
According to NFPA 79, the fuse, and not the drive’s electronic short-circuit
protection, provides the short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection for these
output conductors.

Supplementary Note 3: Generally, connecting a smaller conductor to a larger

conductor requires the installation of fuses at the connection. This connection
may be made without this fuse, in some cases, by using a tap rule that indirectly
protects the smaller conductor by limiting two things: the ratio of the ampacity
of the larger conductor to the ampacity of the smaller conductor and the
maximum length of the smaller conductor (see, for example, 7.2.8.2). When
applying 7.2.10.4(2), such a tap rule is neither applicable nor necessary. In
Figure 109, the smaller 14 AWG conductors may be connected to combined load
conductors of any size because 7.2.10.4 does not indirectly protect the smaller
conductor by limiting the ratio of the larger to smaller conductor ampacities and
the conductor length. Instead, Table 51 protects the smallest conductor directly
by specifying the maximum rating of fuse that may protect a branch circuit that
contains a conductor of that size.

3. Requirement Three: Controller Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault

Protection — Each motor controller must be protected according to its own
ratings, that is, applied in accordance with its listing.

Text: “(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”

Analysis: See (d) in Figure 109. The characteristics of the fuse(s) permitted to
protect the conductors (see Requirement 2) must now be compared to those in
the controller’s ratings. To comply with the listing of each motor controller and
overload relay, the fuse(s) must comply with the maximum branch-circuit
protection specified in the controller markings. Therefore, the fuse(s) must be
of a class marked on all controllers and the rating of the fuse(s) must not exceed

292 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

the rating that is marked on any of the controllers. The markings of each
controller specify that a fuse having a maximum rating of 45 A may protect the
motor controller. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available
fault current of 5000 A or less, the class of the fuse is not specified and may be any
class. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault current
from 5000 to 10000 A, the class of the fuse must be CC, J
or T. Since the electrical supply has an available fault current of 9000 A, selecting
a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A or less ensures each motor controller
is applied within its own ratings.

Supplementary Note 1: The rating of the fuse must not exceed the rating that is
permitted by 7.2.10.4(2) to protect the smallest conductor in the circuit.
Selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A, being less than 60 A, also
protects the conductors (see Requirement 2). Although the ArmorStart LT
products presently have a maximum fuse rating of 45 A, future controllers may
have maximum fuse ratings that exceed 60 A. In this case, the maximum rating of
fuse is limited by the rating to protect the 14 AWG conductors, 60 A. The
maximum rating that is permitted for the controller, 45 A, is a maximum rating
and can be reduced, for more conservative protection, provided nuisance opening
of the fuses do not occur.

Supplementary Note 2: In this appendix, a fuse having a rating of any class

means a fuse having the let-through characteristics of an Class RK-5 fuse. Class
RK-5 fuses are assumed to have the maximum let-through of any class of fuse. For
this reason, the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are marked for use with
fuses, without a restriction to a particular class, have been tested with and are
intended to be used with fuses having a class of RK-5. Of course, fuses of a class
that have lower let-throughs than Class RK-5, such as Class CC, J or T, are also
acceptable. A fuse having a rating of any class also restricts the fuse to those that
have been evaluated for use as branch-circuit protection devices. This means that
semiconductor fuses, used to protect power electronic equipment, or
supplemental fuses cannot be used to protect the multiple-motor branch circuit.

Supplementary Note 3: There are four complementary ratings relevant to the

“specified maximum branch-circuit protection” of 7.2.10.4(1). They are: the fuse
class, the maximum fuse rating, the voltage rating and connection of the source
(480Y/277 V), and the available fault current of the source. Applying the
controllers according to these four ratings means that a fault on the output of all
controllers, and internal faults for Bulletin 294 controllers, will not result in a
shock or fire hazard.

Supplementary Note 4: In this example, the assumption is made that the

available fault current at the controller is that of the source on the line side
of the fuses. Although it is true that the wiring impedance between the fuses
and the first controller reduce the fault current available at the controllers, this
reduction is neglected by assuming the first controller, the 0.5 Hp, Bulletin 294
controller, is very close to the fuses.

4. Requirement Four: Overload Protection — The motors, conductors and

controllers must be protected against motor overload conditions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 293

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Text:

“7.3.1 General. Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor, motor
controller, and branch-circuit conductor against excessive heating due to motor
overloads or failure to start.”

“7.3.1.1 Motors. Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with

Article 430, Part III, of NFPA 70.”

Analysis: Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integral

overload relay. This overload function must be set in accordance with Article 430,
Part III of NFPA 70. Selecting the ampacity of the circuit conductors
appropriately (see Requirement 5) ensures the overload relays, when set
according to 7.3.1.1, will protect the conductors against overheating due
to motor overloads.

Supplementary Note: Each individual controller overload relay directly protects

the conductors that are connected to the input and output of that controller and
the motor that the controller supplies. The combined load conductor is
protected by the tripping of one or more of the controller overload relays, that
remove(s) the overloaded motor(s) before the combined load conductor
overheats.

5. Requirement: Conductor Ampacity —The minimum ampacity

of conductors.

Text:

“12.5.3 Motor circuit conductors supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity
not less than 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating.”

“12.5.4 Combined load conductors shall have an ampacity not less than … 125
percent of the full-load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of
the full-load current ratings of all other connected motors…”

Analysis: Referring to Figure 110, (a), (b) and (c) explain the method for
calculating the minimum required conductor ampacity for each of these
conductors: input and output conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers
(a), input and output conductors of Bulletin 294E controllers (b) and combined
load conductors that supply Bulletin 290E, 291E, and 294E controllers (c). The
currents I1 through I5 are the input currents to the controllers. For the Bulletin
290E and 291E controllers, these are the same as the output motor currents. For
the Bulletin 294E controllers, these currents are the rated input currents.

The example does not address conditions of use such as an ambient temperature
exceeding 30 °C or more than three current-carrying conductors in a cable or
raceway. In a particular application, these conditions of use may require derating
of the ampacity that is given in Table 12.5.1. This example assumes that, under
the conditions of use, both conductors have sufficient ampacity for the
application. This means the 14 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less
than 9.5 A and the 10 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than 27.4 A.

294 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Input and Output Conductors AmorStart models that use an electromechanical contactor to control the motor,
the input current like the output current, is just the current to the motor.
for Mechanical Controllers (a) Therefore, the minimum conductor ampacity for both input and output
conductors is 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating, as specified in the
text of 12.5.3 (a).

Referring to Figure 110, the full-load current rating of a three-phase, 460 V, 5 Hp

induction motor is 7.6 A. Using this value, both the input and output conductors
must have an ampacity that is not less than 125% of 7.6 A or 9.5 A.

Input and Output Conductors ArmorStart models that are a variable-frequency AC drive, are used to control
the motor. These drives use a power conversion method that generates input
for Variable Frequency Drives currents that are larger than the output currents. The input currents are larger
(b) because, unlike the output currents to the motor, they are not sinusoidal.
Consequently, when determining the minimum ampacity of the input
conductors, the requirement of 12.5.3 must be based on the rated input current
of the controller, rather than the full-load current rating of the motor. Therefore,
the minimum ampacity of the input conductors must be 125% of the controller
rated input current, while that of the output conductors must be 125% of the
motor full-load current rating.

Referring to Figure 110, the 1 Hp Bulletin 294E controller has a rated input
current of 3.0 A. Using the rated input current, the conductors from the
combined load conductors to the controllers must have an ampacity of 125%
of 3.0 A or 3.75 A. The output conductors must have an ampacity of 125% of
2.1 A or 2.6 A.

Combined Load Conductors The requirement for the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors
is given by 12.5.4. When the combined load conductors supply one or more
(c) Bulletin 294E controllers, the minimum ampacity calculation of 12.5.4 must
be made by substituting the rated input current of the Bulletin 294E controllers
for the full-load current rating of the motors that these controllers supply.

In Figure 110, the currents I1, I2, I3, I4, and I5 are the input currents to each
controller. I3 and I4 are the full-load current ratings of the 5 Hp motors. I1, I2
and I5 are the rated input currents of the Bulletin 294E controllers. Referring to
the explanatory text (c) in Figure 110, the method for calculating the minimum
ampacity of the combined load conductors follows: first, multiply the largest
input current to any controller – Bulletin 290E, 291E or 294E - by 125%. In this
case, the input currents to the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, I3 and I4, are
the largest, 7.6 A. Because they are the same, either can be used. Choose I3 to
calculate 125% of the maximum. 125% of 7.6 A is 9.5 A. Second, sum the
remaining input currents (I1, I2, I4, I5) for a total of 17.9 A. Third, add the result
from the first step to the result from the second for a total of 27.4 A. Finally, the
minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is 27.4 A.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015 295

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Supplementary Note 1: The input currents to the Bulletin 294E motor

controllers are larger than the output currents to the motor because the input
currents contain harmonics resulting from the power conversion process.
This harmonic content and the magnitude of the resulting non-sinusoidal input
currents depend on the impedance of the electrical supply. The value that is
specified for the rated input current is the maximum value over the range of
possible supply impedances. For this reason, the magnitude of current measured
on a particular electrical system may be less than the specified value.

296 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

 Appendix B

CIP Information

High Level Product The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP controller is an extension of the ArmorStart
DeviceNet controller. Three product types are offered:
Description
Bulletin Number Distributed Starter Type
280E DOL
281E Reversing
284E Inverter

Product Codes and Name Strings

The following table lists the product codes and name strings that will be added
to the ArmorStart product family for EtherNet/IP.

Product Code Product Code

(hex) (decimal) Identity Object Name String
0x91 145 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 0.5…2.5 A 24V DC
0x92 146 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 1.1…5.5 A 24V DC
0x93 147 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 3.2…16 A 24V DC
0x9A 154 ArmorStart Bulletin 280E 0.3…1.5 A 24V DC
0xD1 209 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0.5…2.5 A 24V DC
0xD2 210 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 1.1…5.5 A 24V DC
0xD3 211 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 3.2…16 A 24V DC
0xDA 218 ArmorStart Bulletin 281E 0.3…1.5 A 24V DC
0x172 370 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 0.5 Hp
0x174 372 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 1 Hp
0x176 374 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 2 Hp
0x177 375 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 3 Hp
0x178 376 ArmorStart Bulletin 284E PF40 480V 5 Hp

CIP Explicit Connection The ArmorStart controller allows run, jog and user outputs to be driven by
connected explicit messages when no I/O connection exists, or when an I/O
Behavior connection exists in the idle state, a single EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit
connection is allowed to send “explicit control” messages via an “Active Explicit”
connection.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 297

Appendix B CIP Information

An EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection becomes the “explicit control”

connection when it becomes the first EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection to
send a “set” service to one of the following:

• The “value” attribute of any DOP instance (class code 0x09).

• The “data” attribute of any output (consumed) Assembly instance (class

code 0x04).

• Attribute 3 or 4 of the Control Supervisor Object (class code 0x29).

EDS Files

Most of the information that is contained in the EDS (Electronic Data Sheet)
files for the ArmorStart EtherNet/IP product line is able to be extracted via the
network.

CIP Object Requirements The following CIP objects are covered in the following subsections.

Class Object
0x0001 Identity Object
0x0004 Assembly Object
0x0006 Connection Manager Object
0x0008 Discrete Input Point Object
0x0009 Discrete Output Point Object
0x000F Parameter Object
0x0010 Parameter Group Object
0x001D Discrete Input Group Object
0x001E Discrete Output Group Object
0x0029 Control Supervisor Object
0x002C Overload Object
0x0047 Device Level Ring Object
0x0048 QoS Object
0x0097 DPI Fault Object
0x0098 DPI Alarm Object
0x00B4 Interface Object
0x00F5 TCP/IP Interface Object
0x00F6 Ethernet Link Object

For convenience, all objects that are accessible via the EtherNet/IP port
are included.

298 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Identity Object CLASS CODE 0x0001

The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1
2 Get Max Instance UINT 9

Up to nine instances (Instance 1…9) of the Identity Object are supported. The
following table shows what each instance represents, and what the revision
attribute reports:

Instance Name Revision Attribute

1 EtherNet/IP Module The firmware rev of the EtherNet/IP board main firmware.
2 EtherNet/IP Boot The firmware rev of the EtherNet/IP board boot firmware.
3 FPGA The rev of the FPGA program
A coded revision reflecting the revision attribute of the other various identity object
instances (excluding boot code). Major revisions are coded as: 0SSSMMMM
• 0 = reserved by DeviceNet
4 Control Module • SSS = Revision of Soft-start or inverter. Initial release = 0; We will be limited
to support for 8 major revisions.
• MMMM = Revision of Main ArmorStart board. Initial release = 1; We will be
limited to support for 15 major revisions.
Main Control Board
5 The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board OS stored in flash memory.
Operating System
6 Main Control Board Boot Code The firmware rev of the Main ArmorStart board boot code stored in flash memory.
7 The Internal PF 40 Inverter The firmware rev of the Inverter as read from the RS-485 connection.
8➊ MCB IIC Daughter Board The firmware rev of the MCB IIC Daughter Board
9➊ BASE IIC Daughter Board The firmware rev of the Base IIC Daughter Board

➊ These instance numbers assume the next available instance base on the unit configuration. (If the unit is a DOL (No Drive) and there
is an MCB Daughter board present its instance number will be 7.)

IMPORTANT Attempts to access Attribute 10 of all DeviceNet Main Control Board instances are
blocked. If Attribute 10 (Heartbeat Interval) is accessed, an “Attribute Not Supported”
error will be generated.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 299

Appendix B CIP Information

Instance 1 of the Identity Object contains the following attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Vendor UINT 1
2 Get Device Type UINT 22
3 Get Product Code UINT Starter Rating specific
Revision Structure of:
4 Get Major Revision USINT See table above.
Minor Revision USINT
Bit 0…0 = Not Owned; 1 = Owned by Master
Bit 2…0 = Factory Defaulted; 1 = Configured
Bit 8 - Minor Recoverable fault
5 Get Status WORD Bit 9 - Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 - Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 - Major Unrecoverable fault
6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique number for each device
Product Name Structure of:
7 Get String Length USINT Product Code specific
ASCII String STRING
8 Get State USINT Returns the value "3 = Operational"
Configuration
9 Get UINT "Module FRS"
Consistency Value
102 ➊ Get Build Number UDINT Build number of EtherNet/IP Module firmware.

➊ Instance 1 only.

The following common services are implemented for Instance 1. Service requests
to other instances are serviced through the bridge.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All
0x05 No Yes Reset
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attributes_Single

The Type 0 and 1 reset service types, reset the Control Module. The EtherNet/IP
module performs the Type 0 or 1 reset on itself.

300 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004

The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1

The following static Assembly instance attributes are supported for each
Assembly instance.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT —
Member List Array of STRUCT Array of CIP paths
Member Data Description UINT Size of Member Data in bits
2 Get Member Path Size UINT Size of Member EPATA in bytes
Packed
Member Path Logically encoded member name
EPATH
3 Conditional Data Array of BYTE —
4 Get Size UINT Number of bytes in attribute 3
100 Get Name String STRING —

The following services are implemented for the Assembly Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
0x18 No Yes Get_Member

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 301

Appendix B CIP Information

I/O Assemblies

The following table summarizes the Assembly instances that are supported in the
ArmrorStart EtherNet/IP product:

Instance Type Description

3 Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance
52 Produced Required ODVA Produced Instance
150 Produced Default Bulletin 280E/281E Produced Assembly
151 ➊ Produced Default Bulletin 284E Produced Assembly
162 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for DOL and Reversing Starters
166 ➊ Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type Starters
191 Consumed Empty assembly for Input Only I/O Connection
192 Consumed Empty assembly for Listen Only I/O Connection

➊ These assemblies are selectable on Inverter Type ArmorStart units only.

Instances 3 and 52 are required by the ODVA Motor Starter Profile. When used
as an EtherNet/IP Class 1 connection point, the I/O data attribute is simply
passed through the bridge.

Instance 3

This is the required output (consumed) assembly.

Instance 3 ODVA Starter

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 — — — — — — — Run Fwd

Instance 52

This is the required input (produced) assembly.

Instance 52 ODVA Starter

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
— — — — — — Running — Fault

302 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Instance 150

This is the default input (produced) assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E starters.

Instance 150 "Starter Stat" - Default Status Assembly for Bulletin 280E, 281E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
1 Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
2 Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
3 Reserved (AOP Tag name: {name}:I.Fault)
4 — — — Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent
5 — — DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In1 In0
6 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
7 Logic Enable Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
8 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int00DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord0Param
9 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int00DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord0Param
10 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord1Param
11 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int01DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord1Param
12 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int02DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord2Param
13 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int02DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord2Param
14 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg” (low byte) - ProducedWord3Param
15 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter Int03DeviceOut Cfg” (high byte) - ProducedWord3Param

Note: Byte 0 - 3 refers to PLC communication status. All 1s (bit high) indicates a
connection fault (communication fault) exists or all 0s (bit low) connection
is normal.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 303

Appendix B CIP Information

Instance 151

This is the default input (produced) assembly for Inverter Type Distributed
Starters.

Produce Assembly - Instance 151 “Drive Status” - 284E Starters

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
1 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
2 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
3 Reserved - {name}:I.Fault
4 AtReference Network NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent
ReferenceStatus
5 OutputContactor BrakeContactor DisconnectClosed Hand In3 In2 In1 In0
Status Status
6 OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
7 OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
8 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
9 LogicEnable Pt14DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut P10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
10 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (low byte)” - Int00DeviceOut
11 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 13 Prod Assy Word 0" (high byte)” - Int00DeviceOut
12 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (low byte)” - Int01DeviceOut
13 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 14 Prod Assy Word 1" (high byte)” - Int01DeviceOut
14 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (low byte)” - Int02DeviceOut
15 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 15 Prod Assy Word 2" (high byte)” - Int02DeviceOut
16 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (low byte)” - Int03DeviceOut
17 Value of the parameter pointed to by “Parameter 16 Prod Assy Word 3" (high byte)” - Int03DeviceOut

Note: Byte 0 - 3 refers to PLC communication status. All 1s (bit high) indicates a
connection fault (communication fault) exists or all 0s (bit low) connection
is normal.

** Contactor Reference
Contactor 1 Source Brake Contactor status
Contactor 2 Output Contactor status

304 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Instance 162

This is the standard output (consumed) assembly with

Network Inputs.

Instance 162 Default Consumed DOL and Reversing Starter

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 OutB OutA — — — ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
2 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn

Instance 166

This is the standard output (consumed) assembly for Inverter Type Distributed
Starters with network inputs.

Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Out B Out A — JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 DriveInput4 DriveInput3 DriveInput2 DriveInput1 DecelCtrl_1 DecelCtrl_0 AccelCtrl_1 AccelCtrl_0
2 FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3 FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
5 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt9DeviceIn Pt8DeviceIn

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 305

Appendix B CIP Information

Connection Manager Object CLASS CODE 0x0006

The following class attributes are supported for the Connection Manager Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1
2 Get Max Instance UINT —
3 Get Number of Instances UINT —
4 Get Optional Attribute List Array of UINT —
6 Get Max Number Class Attribs UINT —

Two Class 1 connections for I/O transfer are supported.

Six Class 3 explicit connections are supported.

The following instance attributes are supported:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get/Set Open Requests UINT Number of Forward Open service requests received.

2 Get/Set Open Format Rejects UINT Number of Forward Open service requests that were rejected
due to bad format.
Number of Forward Open service requests that were rejected
3 Get/Set Open Resource Rejects UINT due to lack of resources.
Number of Forward Open service requests that were rejected
4 Get/Set Open Other Rejects UINT for reasons other than bad format or lack of resources.
5 Get/Set Close Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests received.
Number of Forward Close service requests that were rejected
6 Get/Set Close Format Requests UINT due to bad format.
Number of Forward Close service requests that were rejected
7 Get/Set Close Other Requests UINT for reasons other than bad format.
Total number of connection timeouts that have occurred in
8 Get/Set Connection Timeouts UINT connections that are controlled by this Connection Manager

The following services are implemented for the Connection Manager Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
4E hex No Yes Forward_Close
54 hex No Yes Forward_Open

306 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Class 1 Connections

Class 1 connections are used to transfer I/O data, and can be established to the
assembly object instances. Each Class 1 connection establishes two data
transports, one consuming and one producing. The heartbeat instances are used
for connections that shall access only inputs. Class 1 uses UDP transport.
• Total numbers of supported Class 1 connections equals 2 (total for:
exclusive owner + input only + listen only)
• Supported Actual Packet Interval (API): 2…3200 ms (Note that the
minimum API can be higher if processor resources become a problem)
• T->O (Target to Originator) Connection type: point-to-point, multicast
• O->T (Originator to Target) Connection type: point-to-point
• Supported trigger type: cyclic, change-of-state

The producing instance can be assigned to multiple transports, using any

combination of multicast and point-to-point connection types.

Only one Exclusive-owner connection are supported at each time. If there is

already an Exclusive-owner connection that is established and an originator tries
to establish a new Exclusive-owner connection an “Ownership conflict” (general
status = 0x01, extended status = 0x0106) error code is returned.

For a connection to be established the requested data sizes must be an exact

match of the connections points that the connection tries to connect to. If the
requested and actual sizes don’t match, an “Invalid connection size” (general
status = 0x01, extended status = 0x0109) error code will be returned.

Exclusive Owner Connection

This connection type is used for controlling the outputs of the module and shall
not be dependent on any other condition. Only one exclusive owner connection
can be opened against the module.

If an exclusive owner connection is already opened “Connection in use” (general

status = 0x01, extend status = 0x0100) shall be returned an error code.

• Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 3, 162

or 166 (162 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 166 for product codes
> 0x100 only).

• Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 150

or 151 (150 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 151 for product codes
> 0x100 only).

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 307

Appendix B CIP Information

Listen Only Connection

This connection is dependent on another connection to exist. If that connection

(exclusive owner or input only) is closed, the listen only connection shall be
closed as well.

It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the Forward_Open
be zero.

• Number of supported listen only connections equals two (shared with

exclusive owner and listen only connection).

• Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 192 (Listen

only heartbeat)

• Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 150

or 151 (150 for product codes <= 0x100 only, 151 for product codes
> 0x100 only)

Class 3 CIP Connections

Class 3 CIP connections are used to establish connections to the message router.
The connection is used for explicit messaging. Class 3 CIP connections use TCP
connections.
• Three concurrent encapsulation sessions are supported
• Six concurrent Class 3 CIP connections are supported
• More than one Class 3 CIP connection per encapsulation session are
supported
• Supported Actual Packet Interval (API): 100…10000 ms
• T->O Connection type: point-to-point
• O->T Connection type: point-to-point
• Supported trigger type: application

308 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Discrete Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008

The following class attributes are currently supported for the Discrete Input
Point Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2
2 Get Max Instance UINT 4

Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances
contain the following attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
115 Get/Set Force Enable BOOL 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
116 Get/Set Force Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON

The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Point
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 309

Appendix B CIP Information

Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009

The following class attributes are supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1
2 Get Max Instance UINT 4 or 10

Four instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported for DOL/
Reverser units. Ten instances are supported for Drive units. The following table
summarizes the DOP instances.

Instance Name Alternate Mapping Description

Run Forward output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the
1 Run Fwd Output 0029-01-03 ArmorStart CPU to the actuator.
Run Reverse output. For all starter types, this output is hard wired from the
2 Run Rev Output 0029-01-04 ArmorStart CPU to the actuator.
3 User Output 1 None
These are the two ArmorStart user outputs for all starter types.
4 User Output 2 None
5 Drive Input 1 None
6 Drive Input 2 None These four instances exist for Inverter units only. They are drive the outputs on
7 Drive Input 3 None the main control board that are connected to Drive Inputs 1…4.

8 Drive Input 4 None

9 Drive Jog Fwd None
This instances exists for Inverter units only.
10 Drive Jog Rev None

All instances contain the following attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
5 Get/Set Fault Action BOOL 0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
6 Get/Set Fault Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
7 Get/Set Idle Action BOOL 0 = Fault Value attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
8 Get/Set Idle Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
113 Get/Set ➊ Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 = Pr Fault Value attribute, 1 = Ignore
114 Get/Set ➊ Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
115 Get/Set Force Enable BOOL 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
116 Get/Set Force Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Size of Appendix I encoded path
STRUCT: Appendix I encoded path
117 Get/Set Input Binding USINT NULL path means Attribute 3 drives the output.
Array of USINT Otherwise, this is a path to a bit in the Bit Table.

➊ For DOP Instances 1, 2, 9 and 10, Attributes 113 and 114 have “Get” only access, and their values are always 0.

310 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Parameter Object CLASS CODE 0x000F

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT —
2 Get Max Instance UINT —
8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD —

The number of instances of the parameter object depend upon the type of
Control Module that the EtherNet/IP board is connected to.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 311

Appendix B CIP Information

The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get/Set Value Specified in Descriptor —
2 Get Link Path Size USINT —
Array of:
3 Get Link Path BYTE —
EPATH
4 Get Descriptor WORD —
5 Get Data Type EPATH —
6 Get Data Size USINT —
7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING —
8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING —
9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING —
10 Get Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor —
11 Get Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor —
12 Get Default Value Specified in Descriptor —
13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT —
14 Get Scaling Devisor UINT —
15 Get Scaling Base UINT —
16 Get Scaling Offset INT —
17 Get Multiplier Link UINT —
18 Get Divisor Link UINT —
19 Get Base Link UINT —
20 Get Offset Link UINT —
21 Get Decimal Precision USINT —

The following services are implemented for the Parameter Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
0x4b No Yes Get_Enum_String

312 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT —
2 Get Max Instance UINT —

The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING —
2 Get Number of Members UINT —
3 Get 1st Parameter UINT —
4 Get 2nd Parameter UINT —
n Get Nth Parameter UINT —

The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Group
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 313

Appendix B CIP Information

Discrete Input Group Object CLASS CODE 0x001D

No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object.

A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported and contains
the following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4
4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DIP Instances
6 Get/Set Off_On_Delay UINT —
7 Get/Set Off_On_Delay UINT —

The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Discrete Output Group Object CLASS CODE 0x001E

No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group Object.

Instance 1 exists for all ArmorStart units. Instance 2 exists for drive units only.

Instances 1 contains the following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4 for DOL/Soft Starter 10 for Inverters
4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DOP Instances
6 Get/Set Command BOOL 0 = Idle, 1 = Run
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
104 Get/Set Network Status Overrride BOOL 1 = Override (run local logic)
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
105 Get/Set Comm Status Overrride BOOL 1 = Override (run local logic)

314 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Instance 2 contains the following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4
4 Get Binding Array of UINT 5, 6, 7, 8
7 Get/Set Fault Action BOOL 0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
8 Get/Set Fault Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On
9 Get/Set Idle Action BOOL 0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
10 Get/Set Idle Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On
113 Get/Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 = Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Ignore
114 Get/Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On

The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Group
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 315

Appendix B CIP Information

Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029

No class attributes are supported.

A single instance (Instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object is supported and

contains the following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

These Run outputs also map to DOP
3 Get/Set Run 1 BOOL
Instances 1 and 2
4➊ Get/Set Run 2 BOOL —
7 Get Running 1 BOOL —
8➊ Get Running 2 BOOL —
9 Get Ready BOOL —
10 Get Tripped BOOL —
12 Get/Set Fault Reset BOOL 0->1 = Trip Reset
100 Get/Set Keypad Mode BOOL 0 = Maintained, 1 = Momentary
101 Get/Set Keypad Disable BOOL 0 = Not Disabled, 1= Disabled
Bits 0…1 = Reserved
Bit 2 = PL Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = PR Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 5 = CP Warning
Bit 6 = I/O Warning
115 Get Warning Status WORD Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = PI Warning (does not apply for Ethernet version)
Bit 9 = DN Warning
Bits 10…12 = Reserved
Bit 13 = HW Warning
Bit 14 = Reserved
Bit 15 = DB Warning
124 Get/Set Trip Enable WORD Bit enumerated trip enable word
130 Get/Set Trip Reset Mode BOOL 0 = Manual, 1 = Auto
131 Get/Set Trip Reset Level USINT 0 = 100%, Default = 75
150 ➋ Get/Set High Speed Ena BOOL 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
Bit 0 = IP67
151 Get Base Enclosure WORD Bit 2 = PLe Cat 4
Bits 3…15 Reserved
Bit 0 = Output Fuse
Bit 2 = CP Fuse Detect
Bits 3…7 = Reserved
152 Get Base Options WORD
Bit 8 = 10A Base
Bit 9 = 25A Base
Bit 10…15 = Reserved
Bit 0 = Conduit
Bit 1 = Round Media
153 Get Wiring Options WORD
Bit 2 = 28xG Gland
Bits 3…15 = Reserved

316 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

Bit 0 = IP67
Bit 1 = NEMA 4x
154 Get Starter Enclosure WORD
Bit 2 = 28xG Ple Cat4
Bits 3…15 Reserved
Bit 0 = Full Keypad
Bit 1 = Safety Monitor
Bit 2 = Source Brake
Bit 3 = CP Brake
Bit 4 = Dynamic Brake
155 Get Starter Options WORD
Bit 5 = Output Contactor
Bit 6 = EMI Filter
Bit 7 = 0…10V Analog In
Bit 8 = Fused Dyn Brake
Bits 9…15 = Reserved
156 Get Last Pr Trip UINT —
Bit 0 = DB Faulted
Bit 1 = DB Overtemp Warning
157 ➋ Get DB Status WORD Bit 2 = DB On
Bit 3 = DB Flt Reset Inhibit
Bits 4…15 = Reserved
Bit 0 = DB Overtemp
Bit 1 = DB OverCurrent
Bit 2 = DB UnderCurrent
Bit 3 = DB Shorted Switch
Bit 4 = DB Open
158 ➋ Get DB Fault WORD
Bit 5 = Reserved
Bit 6 = DB Bus Voltage Link Open
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = DB Comms
Bits 9…15 = Reserved

➊ Reversing Starters and Inverter Starters only.

➋ Inverter Starters only

The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 317

Appendix B CIP Information

Overload Object CLASS CODE 0x002C

No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object.

A single instance (Instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported for DOL and
Reversing Starters. Instance 1 contains the following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get/Set FLA Setting BOOL xxx.x amps
4 Get/Set Trip Class USINT —
5 Get Average Current INT xxx.x amps
7 Get % Thermal Utilized USINT xxx% FLA
8 Get Current L1 INT
9 Get Current L2 INT xxx.x amps
10 Get Current L3 INT
190 Get/Set FLA Setting Times 10 BOOL xxx.xx amps
192 Get Average Current Times 10 UINT xxx.xx amps
193 Get Current L1 Times 10 UINT
194 Get Current L2 Times 10 UINT xxx.xx amps
195 Get Current L3 Times 10 UINT

The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

318 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Device Level Ring (DLR) CLASS CODE 0x0047

Object
The following class attributes are supported for the DLR Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2

A single instance (Instance 1) are supported with the following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Network Topology USINT 0 = Linear, 1 = Ring
2 Get Network Status USINT 0 = Normal
1 = Ring Fault
2 = Unexpected Loop Detect
3 = Partial Network Fault
4 = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycle
10 Get Active Supervisor Address Struct of Ring Supervisor
UDINT
Array of 6
USINT
12 Get Capability Flags DWORD 0x00000002

The following common services are implemented for the DLR Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 319

Appendix B CIP Information

Qos Object CLASS CODE 0x0048

The following class attributes are supported for the QoS Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1

A single instance (Instance 1) are supported and it contains the following

instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Set 802 1Q Tag Enable USINT 0 = Disable (Default)
1 = Enable
4 Set DSCP Urgent USINT Default = 55
5 Set DSCP Scheduled USINT Default = 47
6 Set DSCP High USINT Default = 43
7 Set DSCP Low USINT Default = 31
8 Set DSCP Explicit USINT Default = 27

The following common services are implemented for the QoS Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

320 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

DPI Fault Object CLASS CODE 0x0097

The DPI Fault Object is implemented in the DeviceNet Main Control Board.

The following class attributes are supported:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Class Revision UINT 1
2 Get Number of Instances UINT 4
3 Get Fault Cmd Write USINT 0 = NOP, 1 = Clear Fault, 2 = Clear Flt Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing
4 Get Fault Instance Read UINT information about the Fault that tripped the Device.
6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT The number of Faults recorded in the Fault Queue.

Four instances of the DPI Fault Object are supported. Instance 1 is the most
recent fault while 4 is the oldest. The have the following instance attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

0 Get Full/All Info Struct of: —
— — Fault Code UINT See table below.
— — Fault Source Struct of: —
— — DPI Port Number USINT 0
— — Device Object Instance USINT 0x2c
— — B Fault Text BYTE[16] See table below.
— — Fault Time Stamp Struct of: —
— — Timer Value ULDINT —
— — Timer Description WORD —
— — Help Object Instance USINT —
— — Fault Data —
1 Get Basic Info Struct of: —
— — Fault Code UINT See table below.
— — Fault Source Struct of: —
— — DPI Port Number USINT 0
— — Device Object Instance USINT 0x2C
— — Fault Time Stamp Struct of: —
— — Timer Value ULINT —
— — Timer Description WORD —
3 Get Help Text STRING See table below.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 321

Appendix B CIP Information

The following services are supported:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single

The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL
and Reversers.

Table 52 - Bulletin 280E, 281E

Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
1 Hdw Short Ckt The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped.
2 Sfw Short Ckt The wire protection algorithm detected an unsafe current surge.
3 Motor Overload Load has drawn excessive current that is based on trip class selected.
4 Fault 4 —
5 Phase Loss Indicates missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled.
6 Fault 6 —
7 Fault 7 —
8 Fault 8 —
9 Fault 9 —
10 Fault 10 —
11 Fault 11 —
12 Fault 12 —
13 Control Pwr Loss Indicates the loss of control power. This fault can be disabled.
14 Control Pwr Fuse The Control Power Fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
15 Input Short Flags a shorted sensor, input device, or input wiring mistake.
16 Output Fuse The Output Fuse has blown. Remove all power and replace the fuse.
17 Over Temp Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded.
18 Fault 18 —
19 Phase Imbalance Indicates an imbalanced supply voltage.
20 Fault 20 —
21 A3 Power Loss Unswitched (A3) Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold.
22 Internal Comm Communication with an internal component has been lost.
23 Fault 23 —
24 Fault 24 —
25 Fault 25 —
26 Fault 26 —
27 MCB EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
28 Base EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
29 Fault 29 —

322 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Table 52 - Bulletin 280E, 281E

Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
30 Wrong Base The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type.
31 Wrong CTs This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
32 Fault 32 —
33 Fault 33 —
34 Fault 34 —
35 Fault 35 —
36 Fault 36 —
37 Fault 37 —
38 Fault 38 —
39 Fault 39 —
40 Unknown Fault —
41 Fault 41 —
42 Fault 42 —
43 Fault 43 —
44 Fault 44 —
45 Fault 45 —

The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for VFD
units.

Table 53 Bulletin 284E

Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
1 Hdw Short Ckt The built in 140M Circuit Breaker has tripped.
2 Fault 2 —
3 Motor Overload The Load has drawn excessive current.
4 Drive Overload 150% load for 1 min. or 200% load for 3 sec. exceeded
5 Phase U to Gnd A Phase U to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor.
6 Phase V to Gnd A Phase V to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor.
7 Phase W to Gnd A Phase W to Ground fault is detected between drive and motor.
8 Phase UV Short Excessive current is detected between phases U and V.
9 Phase UW Short Excessive current is detected between phases U and W.
10 Phase VW Short Excessive current is detected between phases V and W.
11 Ground Fault A current path to earth ground at one or more output terminals.
12 Stall The drive is unable to accelerate the motor.
13 Control Pwr Loss Indicates the loss of control power. This fault can be disabled.
14 Control Pwr Fuse The Control Power Fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
15 Input Short Flags a shorted sensor, input device, or input wiring mistake.
16 Output Fuse The Output Fuse has blown. Remove all power and replace the fuse.
17 Over Temp Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 323

Appendix B CIP Information

Table 53 Bulletin 284E

Fault Code Fault Text Help Text
18 Heatsink OvrTmp The Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value.
19 HW OverCurrent The drive output current has exceeded the hardware limit.
20 SW OverCurrent Programmed parameter 198 (SW Current Trip) has been exceeded.
21 A3 Power Loss Unswitched (A3) Power was lost or dipped below the 12V DC threshold.
22 Internal Comm Communication with the internal Power Flex drive has been lost.
23 Drive Comm Loss The RS-485 port on the internal Power Flex stopped communicating.
24 Power Loss Drive DC Bus Voltage remained below 85% of nominal bus voltage.
25 Under Voltage DC Bus Voltage fell below the minimum value.
26 Over Voltage DC Bus Voltage exceeded the maximum value.
27 MCB EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
28 Base EEPROM This is a major fault that renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
29 Drive EEPROM The drive EEPROM checksum checks have failed.
30 Wrong Base The ArmorStart controller is connected to the wrong base type.
31 Fan RMP The internal cooling fan is not running properly.
32 Power Unit A major failure has been detected in the drive power section.
33 Drive I/O Brd A failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section.
34 Restart Retries Automatic fault reset and run retries exceeded.
35 Drive Aux In Flt The drive auxiliary input interlock is open inside the ArmorStart.
36 Analog Input (PF Fault Code 29)
37 Drv Param Reset Internal Drive Parameters (Parameters > 100) have been defaulted.
38 SCV Autotune The drive automatic tuning function was either aborted or failed.
39 Source Brake The source brake fuse has blown. Remove power and replace fuse.
40 Unknown Fault —
41 DB1 Comm Communication with an internal DB1 board has been lost.
42 DB1 Fault A fault has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake.
43 DB Switch Short The Dynamic Brake switch is shorted.
44 Fault 44 —

45 ➊ Incompatible COMM The Software version of the Drive is not compatible with the ArmorStart.
Device
➊ The Fault text for this error is not return by the device, and is only reported as “Fault 45”.

324 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

DPI Alarm Object CLASS CODE 0x0098

The following class attributes are supported:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Class Revision UINT 1
2 Get Number of Instances UINT 4
3 Set Alarm Cmd Write USINT 0=NOP, 1=Clear Fault, 2=Clear Flt Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information
74 Get Alarm Instance Read UINT about the Fault that tripped the Device.
6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT The number of Faults that are recorded in the Fault Queue.

Four instances of the DPI Alarm Object are supported with the following
instance attributes. Instance 1 is the most recent fault while 4 is the oldest. See
Table 52 on page 322 and Table 53 on page 323 above for fault codes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

0 Get Full/All Info Struct of: —
— — Alarm Code UINT —
— — Alarm Source Struct of: —
— — DPI Port Number USINT —
— — Device Object Instance USINT —
— — Alarm Text STRING —
— — Alarm Time Stamp Struct of: —
— — Timer Value ULINT —
— — Timer Descriptor WORD —
— — Help Object Instance USINT —
— — Alarm Data — —
1 Get Basic Info Struct of: —
— — Alarm Code UINT —
— — Alarm Source Struct of: —
— — DPI Port Number USINT —
— — Device Object Instance USINT —
— — Alarm Time Stamp Struct of: —
— — Timer Value ULINT —
— — Timer Descriptor WORD —
3 Get Help Text STRING —

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 325

Appendix B CIP Information

The following services are supported.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single

The table below lists Warning Codes, Warning Text, and Warning Help Strings
that do not match the fault text.

Fault Code Fault Text Help Text

The Base enclosure type does not match the Control Module
101 IP67/4X Mismatch enclosure type.
102 DB Terminal A warning has been detected with the operation of the Dynamic Brake.

326 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Interface Object CLASS CODE 0x00B4

The following class attribute are supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 for DOL
1 Get Revision UINT
2 for Inverters

A single instance (Instance 1) of the Interface Object is supported with the

following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Min/Max Default Description

USINT (rev 1)
7 Get/Set Prod Assy Word 0 — 1 Defines Word 0 of Assy 120
UINT (rev 2)
USINT (rev 1)
8 Get/Set Prod Assy Word 1 — 5 Defines Word 1 of Assy 120
UINT (rev 2)
USINT (rev 1)
9 Get/Set Prod Assy Word 2 — 6 Defines Word 2 of Assy 120
UINT (rev 2)
USINT (rev 1)
10 Get/Set Prod Assy Word 3 — 7 Defines Word 3 of Assy 120
UINT (rev 2)
13 Get/Set Starter COS Mask WORD 0 - 0xFFFF 0xFFFF Change of state mask for starter bits
15 Get/Set Autobaud Enable BOOL 0-1 1 1= enabled, 0 = disabled
16 Get/Set Consumed Assy USINT 0 to 185 162 (VFD 166) 3, 162 (also for drives 166, 191, and 192)
17 Get/Set Produced Assy USINT 100 to 187 150 (VFD 151) 52, 150, 161 (also for drive 151)
19 Get/Set Set To Defaults BOOL 0 to 1 0 0 = No action, 1 = Reset
23 Get I/O Produced Size — 0 t0 20 — —
24 Get I/O Consumed Size USINT 0 to 16 — —
30 Get DNet Voltage UINT — — DeviceNet Voltage
50 Get/Set PNB COS Mask WORD 0 to 0x00FF 0 Change of state mask for PNBs
Multiple Identity Object instances are unlocked when
64 Get/Set Unlock Identity USINT — 0 this attribute is set to the value 0x99.

The following common services are implemented for the Interface Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 327

Appendix B CIP Information

TCP/IP Interface Object CLASS CODE 0x00F5

The following class attributes are supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1

One instance of the TCP/IP Interface Object are supported with the following
instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Status DWORD —
2 Get Configuration Capability DWORD 0x00000014
0 = Configuration from NVS
3 Get/Set Configuration Control DWORD
2 = Configuration from DHCP
Struct of
4 Get Physical Link Object UINT 2 words
Padded EPATH NULL Enet Link Object Instance
Struct of
UDINT IP Address
UDINT Network Mask
5 Get/Set Interface Configuration UDINT Gateway Address
UDINT Primary DNS
UDINT Secondary DNS
STRING Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names
6 Get/Set Host Name STRING —
8 Get/Set TTL Value USINT Time to Live value for EtherNet/IP multicast packets
Struct of
USINT Allocation Control
9 Get/Set Multicast Config USINT Reserved
UINT Number of multicast addresses to allocate (1…4)
UDINT Multicast starting address.
11 Get/Set LastConflictedDetected Struct of
State of last ACD Activity when last conflicted detected.
AcdActivity USINT
Default = 0
Array of 6 MAC address of a remote node from the ARP DPU in which a
RemoteMAC
USINT conflict was detected. Default = 0
Array of 28 Copy of raw ARP DPU in which a conflict was detected.
ArpPdu
USINT Default = 0

The following common services are implemented for the TCP/IP Interface
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

328 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 CIP Information Appendix B

Ethernet Link Object CLASS CODE 0x00F6

The following class attributes are supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 3
2 Get Max Instance UINT 2
3 Get Number of Instances UINT 2

One instance of the Ethernet Link Object are supported with the following
instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Interface Speed UDINT 10 or 100 Mbit/Sec
2 Get Interface Flags DWORD See ENet/IP Spec
3 Get Physical Address ARRAY of 6 USINTs MAC Address
Struct of:
In Octets
In Ucast packets
In NUcast packets
In Discards
In Errors
4 Get Interface Counters —
In Unknown Protos
Out Octets
Out Ucast packets
Out NUcast packets
Out Discards
Out Errors
Struct of:
Alignment Errors
FCS Errors
Single Collisions
SQE Test Errors
Deferred Transmits
5 Get Media Counters —
Late Collisions
Excessive Collisions
MAC Transmit Errors
Carrier Sense Errors
Frame Too Long
MAC Receive Errors
Struct of:
6 Get/Set Interface Control Control Bits —
Forced Interface Speed
7 Get Interface Type USINT —
8 Get Interface State USINT —
9 Get/Set Admin State USINT —
Instance 1: Port 1
10 Get Interface Label SHORT_STRING
Instance 2: Port 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 329

Appendix B CIP Information

The following common services are implemented for the Ethernet Link Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

330 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Appendix C

Using DeviceLogix

DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the

ArmorStart controller. The program is embedded in the product software so that
there is no additional module that is required to use this technology. To program
DeviceLogix, you need the latest AOP for ArmorStart EtherNet/IP for
ControlLogix or other Logix family PLCs.

In addition to the actual programming, DeviceLogix can be configured to

operate under specific situations. It is important to note that the DeviceLogix
program only runs if the logic has been enabled. This can be done within the
“Logic Editor.” The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the
“Network Override” and “Communication Override” parameters. The following
information describes the varying levels of operation:

• If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled, the ONLY time
DeviceLogix runs is if there is an active I/O connection with a master, i.e.
the master is in Run mode. At all other times, DeviceLogix is running the
logic, but does NOT control the state of the outputs.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 331

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

• If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, then

DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run
mode and if a network fault such as Duplicate MAC ID or module Bus off
condition occurs.

• If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, the

device does not need any I/O connection to run the logic. As long as there
is control power and a DeviceNet power source that is connected to the
device, the logic controls the state of the outputs.

• DeviceLogix provides a “Motion Disable” function that is driven from the

DeviceLogix program. When this is active all motor run commands are
disabled, including the HOA. The run command is disabled regardless of
where the command is initiated from such as DeviceLogix or DeviceNet.

DeviceLogix Programming DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only
limited to the imagination of the programmer. Keep in mind that the application
of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines.

DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators such as AND,

OR, NOT, timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is done by combining
these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs
used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device
hardware. Hardware I/O is the physical Inputs and Outputs that are on the
device, such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the
ArmorStart.

There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the
most common are listed below:
• Increased system reliability
• Fast update times (1 - 2 ms possible)
• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
• Operation independent of PLC or network status
• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
• Critical operations can be safely shut down through local logic

332 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

DeviceLogix Programming The following example shows how to program a simple logic routine to interface
the ArmorStart EtherNet I/P controller with a remote hard-wired startstop
Example station. In this case, the I/O is wired as shown in Table 54.

Table 54 - Hardware Bit Assignments and Description for the ArmorStart

Input Table Output Table

Bit Description Bit Description
In 0 Start Button Run Forward Contactor Coil
In 1 Stop Button N/A N/A
In 2 N/A — —
In 3 N/A — —

IMPORTANT Before programming logic, it is important to decide on the conditions under which the
logic will run. As defined earlier, the conditions can be defined by setting parameter 8
(Network Override) and parameter 9 (Comm. Override) to the desired value.

1. While in the AOP, click the DeviceLogix tab. Click the Launch Editor
button.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 333

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

2. Select Function Block or Ladder editor. Note that once selected, you are
not able to switch back without recreating the logic.

3. Refer to the tool bar at the top of the DeviceLogix editor window, click the
Move/Logical group and select the RSTD (Latch Reset). Move it to the
work space and click to drop it.

334 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

4. From the toolbar, Click the “Bit Input” button and select In 0 from the
Hardware Boolean tree. This is the remote start button based on the
example I/O table.

5. Place the input to the left of the reset function. To drop the input on the
page, left click the desired position.
6. Place the mouse cursor over the tip of In 0. The tip turns green. Click the
tip when it turns green.
7. Move the mouse cursor toward the Set input of the reset function. A line
follows the cursor. When a connection can be made, the tip of the RSL
function also turns green. Click the on Input and the line is drawn from In
0 to the Set Input of the reset function.

Note: If this was not a valid connection, one of the pin tips would have turned
red rather than green. Left double-clicking the unused portion of the grid or
pressing the “Esc” key at any time cancels the connection process.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 335

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

8. From the toolbar, Click the “Bit Input” button and select In 1 from the
pull-down menu. This is the remote stop button based on the example I/O
table.
9. Place the input to the left of the reset function.
10. Connect the input to the reset input of the reset function.

336 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

11. From the toolbar, Click the “Bit Output” button and select “Run
Forward” from the hardware boolean tree. Run Forward is the relay
controlling the coil of the contactor.

12. Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the reset
function block.
13. Connect the output of the reset function block to Run Forward.

14. Click the “Verify” button that is located in the toolbar or select “Logic
Verify” from the “Tools” pull-down menu.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 337

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

15. Click file close. The program is not saved automatically. Fill in the
information on following window and accept changes. This saves the
program but has not been downloaded in the product.

16. The last step is to enable the logic via the pull-down menu.

17. Click OK. To download the DeviceLogix program, you must go on-line
with the PLC and allow the download. Ensure that the PLC is in the
Program position. If in any other position, the download will not occur
and an error will be generated.
18. The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active.

338 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

Import and Export The ArmorStart EtherNet/IP AOP provides users an import or export function.
The export function allows the DeviceLogix program to be saved to a file. This
file can then be imported into a similar product of same function regardless of
horsepower. Importing of DeviceLogix between unlike products is not allowed,
for example Bulletin 284E and Bulletin 280E.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 339

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

Notes:

340 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Appendix D

Renewal Parts

Bulletin 280E, 281E Control Module Renewal Part - Product Selection

Figure 111 - Bulletin 280E, 281E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure

280 E – F 12Z – N B – R – Option 1

Bulletin Number
280 Full Voltage Starter
281 Reversing Starter Option 1
3 Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad
Communications
3FR Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad
E EtherNet/IP with Forward/Reverse

Enclosure Type Motor Connection

F Type 4/12 (IP67) R Round

Overload Selection
Contactor Size/Control Voltage Current Range
A 0.24…1.2
24V DC
B 0.5…2.5 A
12Z Control Module C 1.1…5.5 A
N Control Module Only D 3.2…16 A
23Z

Table 55 - Full Voltage Starters – IP67/NEMA Type 4

kW Hp Cat. No.
Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC
[A] 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24V DC
0.24…1.2 0.18 0.37 — — 0.5 280E-F12Z-NA-R
0.5…2.5 0.37 0.75 0.5 0.5 1 280E-F12Z-NB-R
1.1…5.5 1.1 2.2 1 1 3 280E-F12Z-NC-R
3.2…16 4 7.5 3 5 10 280E-F23Z-ND-R

Table 56 - Reversing Starters – IP67/NEMA Type 4

kW Hp Cat. No.
Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC
[A] 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24V DC
0.24…1.2 0.18 0.37 — — 0.5 281E-F12Z-NA-R
0.5…2.5 0.37 0.75 0.5 0.5 1 281E-F12Z-NB-R
1.1…5.5 1.1 2.2 1 1 3 281E-F12Z-NC-R
3.2…16 4 7.5 3 5 10 281E-F23Z-ND-R

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 341

Appendix D Renewal Parts

Base Module Renewal Part - Product Selection

Figure 112 - Bulletin 280E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure

280 E – F N – 10 – C
Bulletin Number
280 Base Module

Communications
E EtherNet/IP
Motor Connection
C Conduit Entrance
R ArmorConnect Power Media
Enclosure Type
F Type 4/12 (IP67)
Short Circuit Protection (Bulletin 140M)
10 10 A Rated Device
Control Module
25 25 A Rated Device
N Control Module Only

Table 57 - Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters –
IP67/NEMA Type 4, with Conduit Entrance

kW Hp
Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC
[A] 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz Cat. No.
0.24…1.2 0.18 0.37 — — 0.5 280E-FN-10-C
0.5…2.5 0.37 0.75 0.5 0.5 1 280E-FN-10-C
1.1…5.5 1.1 2.2 1 1 3 280E-FN-10-C
3.2…16 4 7.5 3 5 10 280E-FN-25-C

Table 58 - Bulletin 280E Full Voltage Starters and Bulletin 281E Reversing Starters –
IP67/NEMA Type 4, with ArmorConnect Connectivity

kW Hp
Current Rating 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC
[A] 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz Cat. No.
0.24…1.2 0.18 0.37 — — 0.5 280E-FN-10-R
0.5…2.5 0.37 0.75 0.5 0.5 1 280E-FN-10-R
1.1…5.5 1.1 2.2 1 1 3 280E-FN-10-R
3.2…16 4 7.5 3 5 10 280E-FN-25-R

Table 59 - Motor and Brake Cables - See Motor and Brake Cables

342 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Renewal Parts Appendix D

Bulletin 284E Control Module Renewal Part - Product Selection

Figure 113 - Bulletin 284E Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure

284 E – F V D2P3 Z – N – R – Option 1 – Option 2 – Option 3

Bulletin Number
284 VFD Starter Option 3
EMI EMI Filter
Communications OC Output Contactor
E EtherNet/IP

Option 2
DB DB Brake Connector
Enclosure Type DB1 DB Brake Connector for IP67 Dynamic
F Type 4 (IP67) Brake Resistor
Control Module
SB Source Brake Connector
N Control Module Only

Control Voltage Option 1

Torque Performance Mode
Z 24V DC 3 Hand-Off-Auto Selector Keypad with Jog Function
V Sensorless Vector Control,
Volts per Hz Blank Status Only

Output Current

Motor Media Type

R Round

Table 60 - Bulletin 284E Control Module with Sensorless Vector Control,

IP67/NEMA 4
24 V DC
Input Voltage kW Hp Control Voltage
0.4 0.5 284E-FVD1P4Z-N-R
0.75 1.0 284E-FVD2P3Z-N-R
380…480V
50/60 Hz 1.5 2.0 284E-FVD4P0Z-N -R
3-Phase
2.2 3.0 284E-FVD6P0Z-N-R
3.0 5.0 284E-FVD7P6Z-N-R

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 343

Appendix D Renewal Parts

Base Module Renewal Part - Product Selection

Figure 114 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure

284 D – F N – 10 – C – Options
Bulletin
Number
Option 2 & 3 — Brake Cable Options
Communications SM Safety monitor
D DeviceNet

Line Media
Enclosure Type C Conduit
F Type 4/12 (IP67) R ArmorConnect™ Power Media

Short-Circuit Protection
Bulletin 140 Current Rating (A)
Base
10 10 A Rated Device
N Base Only — no starter
25 25 A Rated Device

Table 61 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part, IP67/Type 4/12, Up to 600V AC With Conduit
Entrance
Input Voltage kW Hp Output Current Cat. No.
200..240V 0.4…0.75 0.5…1.0 2.3 A 280D-FN-10-C
50/60 Hz
1.5 2.0 7.6 A 280D-FN-25-C
3-Phase
380…480V 0.4…2.2 0.5…3.0 1.4…4.0 A 280D-FN-10-C
50/60 Hz
3.0 5.0 6.0…7.6 A 280D-FN-25-C
3-Phase
460…600V 50/60Hz 0.75…1.5 1.0…2.0 1.7....3.0 A 280D-FN-10-C
3-Phase
2.2...4.0 3.0...5.0 4.2...6.6 A 280D-FN-25-C

Table 62 - Bulletin 284E Base Module Renewal Part, IP67/Type 4/12, Up to 600V AC with
ArmorConnect Connectivity
Input Voltage kW Hp Output Current Cat. No.
200..240V 0.4…0.75 0.5…1.0 2.3 A 280D-FN-10-R
50/60 Hz
1.5 2.0 7.6 A 280D-FN-25-R
3-Phase
380…480V 0.4…2.2 0.5…3.0 1.4…4.0 A 280D-FN-10-R
50/60 Hz
3.0 5.0 6.0…7.6 A 280D-FN-25-R
3-Phase
460…600V 50/60Hz 0.75…1.5 1.0…2.0 1.7....3.0 A 280D-FN-10-R
3-Phase
2.2...4.0 3.0...5.0 4.2...6.6 A 280D-FN-25-R

344 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Renewal Parts Appendix D

Table 63 - Motor Cables

Description Cable Rating Length [m (ft)] Cat. No.
90° M22 Motor IP67/Type 4/12 3 m (9.8) 280-MTR22-M3
Cordset
6 m (19.6) 280-MTR22-M6
14 m (45.9) 280-MTR22-M14
90° M22 Motor IP67/Type 4/12 3 m (9.8) 284-MTRS22-M3
Cordset (Shielded)
6 m (19.6) 284-MTRS22-M6
14 m (45.9) 284-MTRS22-M14
90° Male/ Straight IP67/Type 4/12 1 m (3.3) 280-MTR22-M1D
Female- M22
Pathcords 3.0 m (9.8) 280-MTR22-M3D

Table 64 - Dynamic Brake Cable

Description Cable Rating Length [m (ft)] Cat. No.
90° M25 Source Brake Cable IP67/Type 4/12 3m (9.8) 285-DBK22-M3

Table 65 - Source Brake Cable

Description Cable Rating Length [m (ft)] Cat. No.
90° M25 Source Brake IP67/Type 4/12 3m (9.8) 285-BRC25-M3
Cable
6 m (19.6) 285-BRC25-M6
14 m (45.9) 285-BRC25-M14

Table 66 - Miscellaneous

Description Notes Qty Cat. No.

Internal Replacement Fan — — 284-FAN
Alignment Pin Replacement ONLY if base and control module have 2/each 284-PIN
provision for it. Cannot retrofit without placement

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 345

Appendix D Renewal Parts

Replacement Fuses
Description
Output Fuse
Fast acting, high-interupting capacity, tubular fuse
Rating: 2.5 A, 250V Littlefuse PN 021602.5
Dimension [mm (in.)]: 20 (0.787) x 5 (0.197)
Control Fuse
UL Listed Class CC, CSA HRC-1 Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-7
Rating: 7 A, 600V or
Dimensions [in.]: 1.5 x 0.405 Littlefuse PN KLKR007.T
Source Brake Fuse (For use with Bulletins 284 and 283 with Brake option CB/SB)
UL Listed Class CC, CSA HRC-1 Cooper Bussman PN KTK-R-3
Rating: 3 A, 600V or
Dimensions [in.]: 1.5 x 0.405 Littlefuse PN KLKR003.T

Replacement Parts
Description Cat. No.

Replacement At-Motor Disconnect Handle Kit

280-DISHDL
Includes (1) handle, (1) guard, and (3) screws

Replacement Fan for 284 Control Module 284-FAN

Replacement Guide Pins (2 pins per package) ➊ 284-PIN

➊ These pins are replacement parts for factory-installed alignment pins. They cannot be retrofitted in the field. The base module and
control module require mating features as indicated in the following diagrams.

346 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Appendix E

System Design Considerations When

Using a Line Reactor

General Rule Generally a line reactor for an ArmorStart controller is not required. Customers
familiar with Rockwell Automation PowerFlex drives may ask this when
installing an ArmorStart controller.

Reasons to Use The most common reason's to use a line reactor are to:
• Extend the working life of the DC- bus capacitors by reducing the
associated heating impact that is caused by ripple noise currents in these
capacitors.
• Reduce the impact of line disturbances on other equipment that result
VFD input switching.
• Reduce the RMS input current that is associated with peak changes in
current that results from VFD input switching, allowing the use of smaller
input conductors and transformers.
• Mitigate the impact of power system transients on the drive.

Repeated line disturbances in current and voltage can lead to premature input
power structure failure for AC drives. One way to mitigate these types of issues is
to add impedance to the incoming power line to the drive. Impedance comes in
the form of transformers, line reactors, and conductors. When a large power
distribution system (>100 kVA) is feeding many small VFDs, the associated input
impedance can be lower than 1%. This low impedance can result in voltage and
current disturbances that negatively impact performance and the overall life of an
AC drive. A line reactor is one possible solution to absorb these power line
disturbances. This does not mean that a reactor must be used in every situation.
Conductors add impedance. On Machine solutions are generally further away
from the power distribution panel therefore the length of cable adds impedance.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 347

Appendix E System Design Considerations When Using a Line Reactor

ArmorStart Design The ArmorStart design incorporates features and additional components that
allow for better heat transfer keeping the internal components cooler. This cooler
design assures longer life of the DC bus capacitors that extend the life of the
VFD. In addition, if line disturbance mitigation is necessary, the ArmorStart can
be equipped with an EMI filter and shielded motor cable reducing the impact of
the power switching components. However, if users specify input line reactors or
transformers the recommendation is to group the ArmorStarts at the distribution
panel under one line reactor (not individual reactors or transformers).

Lastly, when full voltage ArmorStarts controllers are included with VFD
ArmorStart controllers, and line reactors are used, the starting currents of the full
voltage ArmorStart controllers can be significant. The current must be accounted
for in the selection of the line reactor or there is a risk of nuisance faults.

348 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Appendix F

Application Examples

Manual Brake Control If the user wants to activate the mechanical brake (source brake option) of the
ArmorStart Bulletin 284E there are several parameters that need attention. The
following configuration allows the brake to operate normally during running and
when the Bulletin 284 is not running, allows the release of the brake for
maintenance.

See the consume assembly (164 for DeviceNet or 166 for EtherNet/IP).

1. Select which Drive Input (1, 2, 3, 4) you will use to trigger the release of the
brake. Configure the corresponding parameter that references the Drive
Input P151, P152, P153, or P154.

Table 67 - Selecting Drive Input

Parameter Number Parameter Name Description Factory Default Group

Digital In 1 Sel
Digital In 2 Sel See Table 24 on
151…154 Selects the function for the digital inputs. page 179 Drive Advanced Setup
Digital In 3 Sel
Digital In 4 Sel

• Set the Drive In you select to "27", Em Brk Release - If EM Brake

function enabled, this input releases the brake manually.

27 ➊ Em Brk Rls If EM Brake function enabled, this input releases the brake. See parameter 155 and set to EM Brk Cntrol (22).
➊ Provides programmable control of Em Brk via digital input (1...4)

2. Set P137, Stop Mode to one of the following:

• 8 = Ramp + EM B, CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop
command clears active fault.
• 9 = Ramp + EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 349

Appendix F Application Examples

3. Set P155, Relay Out Sel, to "22" EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized.
• Program Parameter 260 (EM Brk OFF Delay) for desired action.
– Sets the time that the drive remains at minimum frequency (P134)
before ramping to the commanded frequency.

EM Brk OFF Delay Parameter Number 260

Related Parameters 134, 137
Sets the time that the drive remains at
minimum frequency before ramping Access Rule GET/SET
to the commanded frequency and
Data Type UNIT
energizing the brake coil relay when
Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is set to Group Drive Advanced Setup
Option 8 or 9. Units 0.01 sec
Minimum Value 0.01 sec
Maximum Value 10 sec
Default Value 0.0 sec

• Program Parameter 261 (EM Brk On Delay) for desired action.

• (P137)

EM Brk On Delay Parameter Number 261

Related Parameters 134, 137
Sets the time that the drive remains at
minimum frequency before stopping Access Rule GET/SET
and de-energizing the brake coil relay
Data Type UNIT
when Parameter 137 (Stop Mode) is
set to Option 8 or 9. Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units 0.01 sec
Minimum Value 0.01 sec
Maximum Value 10.00 sec
Default Value 0.0 sec

Frequency

260 [EM Brk Off Delay] Ram 261 [EM Brk On Delay]
l
cce

pD
pA

ece
l
R am

Minimum Freq

Time
Start EM Brk Stop EM Brk Drive Stops
Commanded Energized (Off) Commanded De-Energized (On)

350 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

4. See the consume assembly below. The Drive Input that was configured in
step #1, is used to control the mechanical brake.

Default Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs ArmorStart EtherNet/IP

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 Out B Out A — JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 DriveInput4 DriveInput3 DriveInput2 DriveInput1 DecelCtrl_1 DecelCtrl_0 AccelCtrl_1 AccelCtrl_0
2 FreqCommand (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3 FreqCommand (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
5 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt9DeviceIn Pt8DeviceIn

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 351

Appendix F Application Examples

Bulletin 284 - VFD Preset DeviceLogix can be used to select one of multiple preset frequencies
cooperatively with the PLC or independently based on user input. This can be
Speed Example done using the four digit inputs or the frequency control bits in DeviceLogix.
The digital inputs provide the user the most flexibility, but can be more complex
to configure. If a preset speed is needed, the simpler approach is to use frequency
control that is found in the produced network bits of DeviceLogix. If you prefer
not to apply DeviceLogix for preset speeds, then implement the digit inputs to
select preset speed via Instance 166 found in Chapter 5. The following example
demonstrates the use of frequency control bits in DeviceLogix

Frequency control (Freq Cntl) bits allow a maximum of 4 Preset Speeds, each
preset has a predefined accel or decel reference. If more are required, then digital
inputs must be configured and properly used. The example focuses on Frequency
Control 2,1,0 in the Produced Network Bit Table 68. Note that there are other
capabilities that are shown in the table that are not reviewed in this example.

Figure 115 below shows all available network outputs supported by Bulletin
284.Referring to Table 68 the preset frequencies are defined in parameter
170,171,172 and 173 of Bulletin 284. Also note the truth table that selects each
of those frequencies. For example if Freq Cntl bit 2=1, 1=1, and 0=0 then the
controller frequency is based on Parameter 172 (Preset Freq 2).

Figure 115 - Bulletin 284E Produced Network Bits in DeviceLogix Output

352 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

Table 68 -

See table 22 - Parameters 170…177 Preset Freq Options for predefined accel
and decel

Accel2 Accel1 — Description

0 0 — No Command
0 1 — Accel 1 Enable
1 0 — Accel 2 Enable
1 1 — Hold Accel Rate Selected
Decel 2 Decel 1 — —
0 0 — No Command
0 1 — Decel 1 Enable
1 0 — Decel 2 Enable
1 1 — Hold Decel Rate Selected
Freq Ctrl 2 Freq Ctrl 1 Freq Ctrl 0 —
0 0 0 No Command
0 0 1 Freq Source = P136 (Start Source)
0 1 0 Freq Source = P169 (Internal Freq)
0 1 1 Freq Source = Comms
1 0 0 P170 (Preset Freq 0) (Accel/Decel 1)
1 0 1 P171 (Preset Freq 1) (Accel/Decel 1)
1 1 0 P172 (Preset Freq 2) (Accel/Decel 2)
1 1 1 P173 (Preset Freq 3) (Accel/Decel 2)

Using parameters 170-173, set them to 0,10,30, and 60 respectively. Figure 116
shows the preset frequencies 0-3.

Figure 116 - P170-173 Preset Frequency Settings

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 353

Appendix F Application Examples

In this example, DeviceLogix receives data from the PLC program. The
communication and network overrides are disabled as shown below.

Figure 117 shows the DeviceLogix program. This allows the user to select one
of three predefined frequencies that are based on two network bits.

Figure 117 - DeviceLogix Program

Once you exit the DeviceLogix editor, verify that the logic is “Enabled” otherwise
the preset frequency control does not operate. See Figure 118.

Figure 118 -

354 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

This simple PLC program is used to select one of three preset speeds, speed 1, 2,
or 3. For the purpose of this example speed 1, 2, & 3 are BOOL bits but they can
be any valid input. Notice that there is an interlock for speed 1 and speed 2 to
ensure that they do not trigger simultaneously. This would accidentally cause
speed 3 to run.

Download the finished program file to the PLC. In order for the parameters and
DeviceLogix program to update in the device, verify the PLC is in program
mode, and open the AOP for the Bulletin 284E.

Select the Parameters and DeviceLogic tab. This forces a correlation between the
program file and the device. If a difference exists either upload from the device or
download from the project to the device. In this example, choose to download.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 355

Appendix F Application Examples

Figure 119 is an example of the parameter correlation when a difference occurs

between the project and the device.

Figure 119 -

Figure 120 is an example of the DeviceLogix correlation when a difference occurs

between the project and the device.

Figure 120 - DeviceLogix Correlation

356 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

Note the caution statement before download.

After the DeviceLogix correlation is successful, the following window is

displayed.

After both correlations are complete place the PLC in run mode and test the
program by exercising speed 1, 2, and 3 bits.

IMPORTANT To download a new DeviceLogix program, connect to the PLC and stay in program
mode. There can be no active I/O connections to the device or the download fails. Open
the AOP and select the DeviceLogix tab to start the correlation process. If a difference
exists, then an upload or download is necessary.

Operation
When bit Speed_1 is ON then the Bulletin 284E accelerates to 10 Hz or
decelerate using accel/decel Time 2

When bit Speed_2 is ON then the Bulletin 284E accelerates to 30 Hz or

decelerate using accel/decel Time 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 357

Appendix F Application Examples

DeviceLogix Ladder Editor ArmorStart EtherNet/IP supports DeviceLogix in a ladder programming

environment. When using the ladder editor, additional explanation is needed
Example with regard to naming conventions. Fault bits such as “Overload Trip” are tagged
“FB0, FB1, FB2, etc. Status bits such as “Running Fwd” are tagged SB0, SB1, SB2,
etc. Outputs such as “Run Reverse” are tagged DOP0, DOP1 etc. Produced
Network Bits such as “Fault Reset” are tagged PNB0, PNB1, etc.

This document helps users interpret the naming conventions.

ArmorStart 280 and 281 Status Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose status bits in the ladder editor.

The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 280D and
281D units:

Status Bit Declaration

0 = Tripped
1 = Running Fwd
2 = Running Rev
3 = Ready
4 = Net Ctl Status
5 = At Reference
6 = Keypad Hand
7 = HOA Status
8 = 140M On
9 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists
10 = IO Cnxn Exists
11 = Explicit Cnxn Fault
12 = IO Cnxn Fault
13 = IO Cnxn Idle
14 = Current Flowing
15 = Keypad Hand Direction

358 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Fault Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose fault bits in the ladder editor.

The following table contains the fault bit definitions for Bulletin 280D and
281D ArmorStart units:

Fault Bit Declaration

0 = Short Circuit
1 = Overload
2 = Phase Loss
3 = Control Power
4 = IO Fault
5 = Over Temp
6 = Phase Imbalance
7 = DNet Power Loss
8 = EEprom
9 = HW Flt
10 = PL Warning
11 = CP Warning
12 = IO Warning
13 = Phase Imbal Warn
14 = DN Warning
15 = HW Warning

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 359

Appendix F Application Examples

Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Outputs

The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor.

The Bulletin 280 and 281 have the following bit definitions:

0 = Run Forward
1 = Run Reverse
2 = User Output A
3 = User Output B

Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the ladder editor.

The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin
280 and 281 ArmorStart units

Produce Network bit declaration

0 = Net Output 0
1 = Net Output 1
2 = Net Output 2
3 = Net Output 3
4 = Net Output 4
5 = Net Output 5
6 = Net Output 6
7 = Net Output 7
8 = Net Output 8
9 = Net Output 9
10 = Net Output 10
11 = Net Output 11
12 = Net Output 12
13 = Net Output 13
14 = Net Output 14
15 = Fault Reset
16 = Motion Disable
17 = Keypad Disable

360 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Status Bits

The following table contains the status bit definitions for ArmorStart 284

Status bit declaration

0 = Tripped
1 = Warning
2 = Running Fwd
3 = Running Rev
4 = Ready
5 = Net Ctl Status
6 = Net Ref Status
7 = At Reference
8 = Drive Opto 1
9 = Drive Opto 2
10 = Keypad Jog
11= Keypad Hand
12 = HOA Status
13 = 140M On
14 = Contactor 1
15 = Contactor 2
16 = Explicit Msg Cnxn Exists
17 = IO Cnxn Exists
18 = Explicit Cnxn Fault
19 = IO Cnxn Fau
20 = IO Cnxn Idle
21 = Keypad Hand Direction

Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Fault Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose Fault Bits in the ladder editor.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 361

Appendix F Application Examples

The following table contains the fault bit definitions for ArmorStart 284

Fault bit declaration

0 = Short Circuit
1 = Overload
2 = Phase Short
3 = Ground Fault
4 = Stall
5 = Control Power
6 = IO Fault
7 = Over Temp
8 = Phase Over Current
9 = DNet Power Loss
10 = Internal Comm
11 = DC Bus Fault
12 = EEprom
13 = HW Flt
14 = Reset Retries
15 = Misc. Fault
16 = CP Warning
17 = IO Warning
18 = DN Warning
19 = HW Warning

Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Outputs

The screen capture below shows how to choose outputs in the ladder editor.

The Bulletin 284 bit definitions:

0 = Run Forward
1 = Run Reverse (Reserved)
2 = User Output A
3 = User Output B
4 = Drive Digital In 1
5 = Drive Digital In 2
6 = Drive Digital In 3
7 = Drive Digital In 4
8 = Jog Forward
9 = Jog Reverse

362 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Produced Network Bits

The screen capture below shows how to choose Produced Network Bits in the
ladder editor.

The following table contains the produced network bit definitions for Bulletin
284 ArmorStart units
0

Produce network bit declaration

0 = Net Output 0
1 = Net Output 1
2 = Net Output 2
3 = Net Output 3
4 = Net Output 4
5 = Net Output 5
6 = Net Output 6
7 = Net Output 7
8 = Net Output 8
9 = Net Output 9
10 = Net Output 10
11 = Net Output 11
12 = Net Output 12
13 = Net Output 13
14 = Net Output 14
15 = Fault Reset
16 = Accel 1
17 = Accel 2
18 = Decel 1
19 = Decel 2
20 = Freq Select 1
21 = Freq Select 2
22 = Freq Select 3
23 = Motion Disable
24 = Keypad Disable

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 363

Appendix F Application Examples

Reporting Examples How to Report the RPM of the 284 Internal Fan

To get the fan RPM of the fan, an explicit "get single" message instruction is
needed using a service of 0x000E.

The fan RPM can be read using the following CIA Class 0x00B4, Instance 1, and
Attribute 103. The nominal fan rpm value is 2800-3000 RPM. The ArmorStart
trips once the fan speed falls below 62% (1736)

There is no FAN FAULT warning. The user needs to develop their own warning
PLC code using the CIA message referred above for critical applications.

How to report the Heat Sink Temperature of the 284

To get the heat sink temperature of the 284, an explicit "get single" message
instruction is needed.

The heat sink temperature can be read using the following CIA Class 0x000F,
Instance 124, and Attribute 1.

Service: e (hex) Class: f (hex) Instance: 124 Attribute: 1 (hex)

364 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

 Application Examples Appendix F

How to Report the Last Four Faults

By default, the ArmorStart controller provides only the last fault as a parameter.
To retrieve the last four faults, a PLC message instruction is required. Class
0x0097 DPI Fault Object is used to extract a structure of information that is
related to the last four faults. The following example shows how to configure an
explicit message to get all four fault logs. To retrieve information on all four
faults, the instance value must be indexed from 1, 2, 3, and 4, where 1 is the most
recent fault information. If more detailed information is needed, change the
attribute to 0.

How to Report an IP Address Conflict Detection

Refer CIP Class 0x00F5 address conflict detection. This is stored in non-volatile
memory and can be accessed through the TCP/IP Interface Object, instance 1,
attribute 11 (“LastConflictDetected”) via Message instruction.

Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015 365

Appendix F Application Examples

Demand Torque Off ArmorStart EtherNet/IP does not support safety torque off internally, therefore
this capability must be implemented external to the ArmorStart controller within
Considerations the safety circuit. To achieve a required safety performance without damage to
the ArmorStart 284 its required to have some coordination between the safety
safety circuit and the VFD enable. When there is a demand of the safety system it
is important that the ArmorStart VFD is disabled before any line side contactor
opening. One way to accomplish this digitally is to configure one of digital inputs
via parameter 151- 154 to option 9. Then using the consumed instance 166 and
the previously defined digit input to disable the VFD before the safety contactors
opening. This disables the ArmorStart allowing the contactors to open without
damaging the VFD. Alternatively, if the safety circuit removes A1-A2 (switched
control power) power before the safety contactors open this results in the same
behavior and prevents damage to the VFD.

Keypad Disable with HOA operation can be prevented dynamically without parameter modification,
as follows:
DeviceLogix
The DeviceLogix program that is shown below turns off the keypad if both
inputs are true and the keypad is in either “OFF” or “AUTO” mode.

Note: If the user is already pressing the “HAND” button, the program does not
disable the keypad; if the inputs are on after the “HAND” mode is actuated.

Motion Disable The motion disable program disables motion regardless of the HOA status, PLC
control, or DeviceLogix. Once motion disable is turned off, the ArmorStart or
PLC resumes control of the motor again. The motion disable does not disable the
HOA keypad. The keypad operation appears normal but it does not control the
run command until the motion disable is off.

366 Rockwell Automation Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P – September 2015

Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to
software service packs. You can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ for software
updates, support chats and forums, technical information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates.

In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more
information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone.

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/overview.page, or contact your local
Rockwell Automation representative.

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400

Publication 280E-UM001C-EN-P - September 2015

Supersedes Publication 280E-UM001B-EN-P - July 2012 Copyright © 2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.